Download MBA Finance 3rd Semester Strategic Financial Management

Download MBA Finance (Master of Business Administration) 3rd Semester Strategic Financial Management


UNIT 1

LESSON I

FINANCIAL POLICY AND STRATEGIC PLANNING





Today most business enterprises engage in strategic planning, although the

degrees of sophistication and formality vary considerably. Conceptually, strategic

planning is deceptively simple: Analyze the current and expected future situation,

determine the direction of the firm, and develop means for achieving the mission.

In reality, this is an extremely complex process which demands a systematic

approach for identifying and analyzing factors external to the organization and

matching them with the firm`s capabilities.



Planning is done in an environment of uncertainty. No one can be sure

what the external as well as the internal environment will be even next week,

much less several years from now: Therefore, people make assumptions or

forecasts about the anticipated environment. Some of the forecasts become

assumptions for other plans. For example, the gross national product forecast

becomes the assumption for sales planning, which in turn becomes the basis for

production planning and so on.



Strategies and policies are closely related. Both give direction, both are the

frame work for plans, both are the basis of operational plans, and both affect all

areas of managing.

Strategy and Policy



The term strategy (which is derived from the Greek word strategies,

meaning "general" )has been used in different ways. Authors differ in at least

one major aspect about strategies. Some writers focus on both the end points

(purpose, mission, goals, objectives) and the means of achieving them (policies
and plans). Others emphasize the means to the ends in the strategic process rather

than the ends per se.

Policies are general statements or understandings which guide managers thinking

in decision making. They ensure that decisions fall within certain boundaries.

They usually do not require action but are intended to guide managers in their

commitment to the decision they ultimately make.



The essence of policy is discretion. Strategy on the other hand, concerns

the direction in which human and material resources will be applied in order to

increase the chance of achieving selected objectives.

The Strategic Planning Process

Although Specific steps in the formulation of the strategy may vary, the process

can be built, at least conceptually, around the key elements shown in Figure given

below:

Inputs

The various organizational inputs are the goal inputs of the claimants,

Enterprise Profile

The enterprise profile is usually the starting point for determining where the

company is and where it should go. Thus, top managers determine the basic

purpose of the enterprises and clarify the firm`s geographic orientation, such as

whether it should operate in selected regions, in all states in the United States, or

even in different countries . In addition, managers assess the competitive situation

of their firm.

Orientation of Top Managers

The enterprise profile is shaped by people, especially top managers, and their

orientation is important for formulating the strategy. They set the organizational

climate, and they determine the direction of the firm. Consequently, there values,
their preferences, and their attitudes toward risks have to be carefully examined

because they have an impact on the strategy.

Purpose and Objectives

The purpose and the major objectives are the end points towards which the

activities of the enterprise are directed. Since the previous chapter dealt with these

topics at length, additional discussion here is unnecessary.

External Environment

The present and future external environment must be assessed in terms of threats

and opportunities. The evaluation focuses on economic, social, political, legal,

demographic, and geographic factors. In addition, the environment is scanned for

technological developments, for products and services on the market, and for

other factors necessary in determining the competitive situation of the enterprises.

Internal Environment

Similarly the firms internal environment should be audited and evaluated in

respect to its weaknesses and strengths in research and development, production,

operations, procurement, marketing, and products and services. Other internal

factors important for formulating a strategy include that the assessment of human

resources , financial resources, and other factors such as the company image, the

organization structure and climate, the planning and control system, and relations

with customers.

Alternative Strategies

Strategies alternatives are developed on the basis of an analysis of the external

and internal environment. An organization may pursue many different kinds of

strategies . It may specialize or concetrate, as the Korean Hyundai company did

by producing lower-priced cars (in contrast to General Motors, for example,

which has a complete product line ranging from inexpensive to luxurious cars).


Alternatively, a firm may diversity, extending the operation into new and

profitable markets. Sears not only is in retailing but also provides many financial

services.

Still another strategy is to go international and expand the operation into other

countries. The multinational firms provide many examples. The same chapter also

examines joint ventures, which may be an appropriate strategu for some firms

have to pool their resources, as illustrated by the joint venture of General Motors

and Toyota to produce small cars in California.

Under certain circumstances, a company may have to adopt a liquidation strategy

by terminating an unprofitable product line or even dissolving the firm. But in

some cases liquidation may not be necessary and a retrenchment strategy may be

appropriate. In such a situation the company may curtail its operation temporarily.

These are just a few examples of possible strategies. In practice, companies,

especially large ones, pursue a combination of strategies.

Evaluation and Choice of Strategies

The various strategies have to be carefully evaluated before the choice is made.

Strategic choices must be considered in light of the risks involved in a particular

decision. Some profitable opportunities may not be pursued because a failure in a

risky venture could result in bankruptcy of the firm. Another critical element in

choosing a strategy is timing. Even the best product may fail if it is introduced to

the market at an inappropriate time. Moreover, the reaction of competitors must

be taken into consideration. When IBM reduced its price of the PC computer in

reaction to the sales success of Apple`s Macintosh computer, firms producing

IBM-compatible computers had little choice but to reduce their prices as well.

This illustrates the interconnection of the strategies of several firms in the same

industry.


Medium ? and Short-Range Planning, Implementation, and Control

Although not a part of the strategic planning process and short-range planning as

well as the implementation of the plans must be considered during all phases of

the process. Control must also be provided for monitoring performance against

plans. The importance of feedback is shown by the loops in the model.

Consistency and contingency

The last key aspect of the strategic planning process is testing for consistency the

preparing for contingency plans.

MAJOR KINDS OF STRATEGOIES AND POLICIES

For a business enterprise and, with some modification, for other kinds of

organizations as well), the major strategies and policies that give an overall

direction to operations are likely to be in the following areas.

Growth

Growth strategies give answers to such questions as these: How much growth

should occur? How fast? Where? How should it occur?

Finance

Every business enterprise and, for that matter, any non business enterprise must

have a clear strategy for financing its operations. There are various ways of doing

this and usually many serious limitations.

Organisation

Organisational strategy has to do with the type of organizational pattern an

enterprise will use. It answers practical questions. For example, how centralized

or decentralized should decision-making authority be? What kinds of

departmental patterns are most suitable? How should staff positions be designed?

Naturally, organization structures furnish the system of roles and role

relationships that help people accomplish objectives.

Personnel
There can be many major strategies in the area of human resources and

relationships. They deal with such topics as union relations. Compensation,

selection, hiring, training, and appraisal, as well as with special areas such as job

enrichment.

Public Relations

Strategies in this area can hardly be independent; they must support other major

strategies and efforts. They must also be designed in the light of the company`s

type of business, its closeness to the public, and its susceptibility to regulation by

government agencies. In any area, strategies can be developed only if the right

questions are asked. While no set of strategies can be formulated that will fit all

organizations and situations, certain key questions will help any company

discover what its strategies should be. The right questions will lead to answers. As

examples, some key questions are presented below for two major strategic areas:

products or services and marketing. With a little thought, you can devise key

questions for other major strategic areas.

Products or Services.

A business exists to furnish products or services. In a very real sense, profits are

merely a measure-although an important one-of how well a company serves its

customers. New products or services, more than any other single factor, determine

what an enterprise is or will be.



The key questions in this area can summarized as follows:



What is our business?



Who are our customers?



What do our customers want?



How much will our customers buy and at what price?



Do we wish to be a product leader?



Do we wish to develop our own new products?


What advantages do we have in serving customer needs?



How should we respond to existing and potential competition?



How far can we go in serving customer needs?



What Profits can we expect?



What basic form should our strategy take?

Marketing

Marketing strategies are designed to guide managers in getting products or

services to customers and in encouraging customers to buy. Marketing strategies

are closely related to product strategies; they must be interrelated and mutually

supportive. As a matter of fact, Peter Drucker regards the two basic business

functions as innovation (e.g., the creation of new goods or services) and

marketing. A business can scarcely survive without at least one of these functions

and preferably both.

The key questions that serve as guides for establishing a marketing strategy are

these:



Where are our customers, and why do they buy?



How do our customers buy?



How is it best for us to sell?



Do we have something to offer that competitors do not?



Do we wish to take legal steps to discourage competition?



Do we need, and can we supply , supporting services?



What are the best pricing strategy and policy for our operation?

Summary

There are different definitions of strategy. A comprehensive one refers to the

determination of basic long-term objectives and of courses of action and

allocations of resources to achieve these aims. Policies are general statements or
understanding which guide managers` thinking in decision making. Both

strategies and policies give direction to plans. They provide the framework for

plans and serve as a basic for the development of tactics and other managerial

activities.

Major kinds of strategies and policies need to be developed in areas such as

growth, finance, organization, personnel, public relations, products or services,

and marketing. Professor Porter identified three generic competitive strategies

related to overall cost leadership, differentiation, and focus.

To implement strategies effectively, mangers must communicate the strategies

and planning premises to all who should know them and must make sure that the

plans contribute to and reflect the strategies and goals they serve. Mangers also

must review strategies regularly, develop contingency strategies, and be sure that

the organization structure of the enterprise fits its planning program. Mangers

need to make, learning about planning and implementing strategy an ongoing

process.

Planning premises are the anticipated environment. They include assumptions or

forecasts of future and known conditions. Effective premising requires proper

selection of premises, development of alternative premises for contingency

planning, provision for consistency, and communication of the planning premises.

Key Ideas and concepts for review



Strategies





Major kinds of strategies



Policies





Three generic strategies by Porter



Key elements in the

Requirements for successful

strategies planning process implementation if strategies

TOWS Matrix by Weihrich Planning premises Portfolio Matrix by the

Boston Requirements for effective premising



Consulting Group
For Discussion

1. How can you distinguish between strategies and policies?

2. Are strategies and policies as important in a non business enterprise

(such as a labor union, the State Department, a hospital, or a city fire

department) as they are in a business? Why and how?

3. Why are contingency strategies important?

4. Choose an organization you know and identify its strengths and

weaknesses. What are its special opportunities and threats in the

external environment?

5. How would you make an organizational appraisal of your college or

university? What kind of business is the school in?

6. How can strategies be implemented effectively?





LESSON I

FINANCIAL POLICY AND STRATEGIC PLANNING

LESSON OUTLINE

Strategy and Policy

The Strategic Planning Process

Major Kinds of Strategies and Policies

LEARNING OBJECTIVE

After reading this chapter you should be able to :



Understand the nature of strategy and Policy



Define and Conceptualize the Concept of Strategy and Policy



Describe the relationship between strategy and Policy



Detail the process of strategic analysis


LESSON II

FORMULATION OF STRATEGIES AND POLICES



POLICY



The term policy is derived from the Greek word politeia` relating to

policy, that is citizen and Latin word politis` meaning polished, that is to say,

clear. According to New Webster Dictionary, policy means the art or manner of

governing a nation, the line of conduct which rulers of a nation adopt on a

particular question specially with regard to foreign countries, the principle on

which any measure or course of action is based. While these descriptions of

policy relate to any field, policy in the organizational context is defined as

management`s expressed or implied intent to govern action in the achievement

of company`s aims?. This definition, however, is at high level of abstraction and

requires deeper analysis. It suggests that it governs actions of people in the

organization but does not say how the action is governed. Therefore, an

operational definition of policy may be as follows:



A policy is the statement or general understanding which provides

guidelines in decision-making to members of an organization in respect to any

course of action.



On the basic of this definition, following features of policy can be

identified:

1. A policy provides guidelines to the members of the organization for

deciding a course of action and, thus, restricts their freedom of action.

Policy provides and explains what a member should do rather than what

he is doing. Policies, when enforced, permit prediction of roles with

certainly. Since a policy provides guidelines to thinking in decision-
making, it follows that it must allow some discretion, otherwise it will

become a rule.

2. Policy limits an area within which a decision is to be made and assures

that to decision will be consistent with and contributive to objectives. A

policy tends to predecide issues, avoid repeated analysis, and give a

unified structure to other types of plans, thus permitting managers to

delegate authority and still retaining control of action. For example, if the

organization has framed a policy that higher positions in the organization

will be filled by internal promotion, the managers concerned can deal with

the situation in this light whenever a vacancy at higher level arises. Thus

organization gets assurance that higher positions are filled by internal

members without further control.

3. Policies are generally expressed in qualitative, conditional, or general

way. The verbs most often used in stating policies are to maintain, to

continue, to follow, to adhere, to provide, to assist, to assure, to employ, to

make, to produce, or to be. Such prescriptions may be either explicit or

these may be interpreted from the behaviour of organization members,

particularly at the top level. When such a behaviour is interpreted as

policy guideline it is normally known as precedent, that is what has

happened in the past on a particular issue if there is no clearly specified

declaration.

4. Policy formulation is a function of all managers in the organization

because some form of guidelines for future course of action is required at

every level. However, higher is the level of a manager, more important is

his role in policy making . Similarly, policies may exist in all areas of the

organization from major organizational policies to minor policies

applicable to the smallest segment of the organization.
A policy is somewhat a permanent feature of an organization. It being a standing

plan provides guidelines to managerial decisions. Therefore, policies should be

developed on a sound basis. If this is not done, managers have to make decisions

again and again. However, what features constitute a sound policy cannot be

prescribed universally because situations vary so greatly that an organization may

differ in respect of a policy formulation and implementation from others.

However, the soundness of policy can be judged on the basis of following criteria.



i.

Does it reflect present or desired organizational practices and

behaviour?

ii.

Is it clear, definite, and explicit leaving no scope for

misinterpretation?

iii.

Does it exist in the area critical to the success of the

organization?

iv.

Is it consistent with other policies and does it reflect the timing

needed to accomplish the objectives?

v.

Is it practical in a given existing or expected situation?



A sound policy will (i) specify more precisely how the decision will come ? what

is to be done, who is to do it, how it is to be done , and when it is to be finished;

(ii) establish a follow-up mechanism to make sure that the decision intended will

take place and (iii) lead to new strengths which can be used for decisions in

future. Based on these questions and specifications, some major characteristics of

a sound policy can be identified as follows:

1. Relationship to Organisational Objectives. A policy is formulated in the

context of organizational objectives. Therefore, it tries to contribute

towards the achievement of these objectives . Therefore, in formulation of
a policy, those functions or activities which do not contribute to the

achievement of objectives should be eliminated. For example, if a policy

of filling higher positions from within produces hindrance in attracting

talents at higher level but the organization needs them, the policy can be

changed because in the absence of suitable manpower, the organization

may not be able to achieve its objectives.

2. Planned formulation. A policy must be the result of careful and planned

formulation process rather than the result of opportunistic decisions made

on the spur of the movement. Since policies are relatively permanent

features of the organization, adhocism should be avoided because it is

likely to create more confusion. It is true it is not possible to solve every

problem in the organization on the basis of policies because new situations

may arise, however, for matters of recurring nature, there should be well-

established policies.

3. Fair Amount of Clarity. As far as possible, policy should be clear and

must not leave any scope for ambiguity. If there is a problem of

misinterpretation, the organization should provide the method for

overcoming the ambiguity. Further, policy provides some discretion for

managerial decisions but it should minimize the number of cases were

decisions are based on personal judgement. If this happens frequently,

there should be close scrutiny of the policy and suitable amendments

should be made.

4. Consistency . The policy should provide consistency in the operation of

organizational functions. Often the organization formulates various

functional areas and each function is related to other functions of the

organization. If the policy in one area is inconsistent with another area,

there may be conflict resulting into inefficiency. This happens very

frequently in functions. Therefore, the formulation of policies should be
taken in an integrated way so that policies in each area contribute to other

areas also.

5. Balanced. A sound policy maintains balance between stability and

flexibility. On the one hand, a policy is a long-term proposition and it

must provide stability so that members are well aware about what they are

required to do in certain matters. On the other hand, the policy should not

be so inflexible that it cannot be changed when the need arises. In a

changed situation, the old policy becomes obsolete. Therefore, there

should be a periodic review of policies and suitable changes should be

incorporated from time to time. The changes may be in the form of

addition, deflection, or substitution of the existing policy.

6. Written. A policy may be in the form a statement or it may interpreted by

the behaviour of the people at the top level. However, clearly-specified

policy works better than the one which has to be interpreted by the

organization members. When the policy is in writing, it becomes more

specific and clear. It creates an atmosphere in which individuals can take

actions. A written policy is easier to communicate through the

organizational manuals. However, written policy has certain disadvantages

in the form of being flexible, too much emphasis on written words and

their interpretation, and leakage of confidential policy. However, if the

policy has been formulated carefully, many of the dangers will be

overcome. Of course, confidential policies cannot be made part of

organizational manuals.

7. Communication. It is not just sufficient to formulate policies. Unless they

are communicated property to the persons concerned, no meaningful

purpose will be served. Therefore, a system should be developed to

communicate the policies to them who are to make decisions in the light

of those policies. While written policies can be communicated easily,
problems exist for communicating un written ones. In such cases, there

should be more frequent interaction between policy framers and policy

implementations.

STRATEGY



The concept of strategy is even more confusing in management literature

as compared to policy. The word strategy has entered in the field of management

more recently. It has been derived from Greek work strategos` which means

general. Therefore, the word strategy means the art of general. Frequently used in

Military (troops, ships, aircraft, etc) as to impose upon the enemy the place, time

and conditions for fighting by oneself. Strategy ends or yields tactics when actual

contact with enemy is made. However, in organizations, it is used in different

form. For example, Learned etc., have defined strategy as follows:



Strategy is the pattern of objectives, purposes or goals, stated in such a

way as to define what business the company is in or is to be in and the kind of

company it is or is to be.



Chandler is more explicit on the subject, when he defines strategy as

follows:



Strategy is the determination of basic long-term goals and objectives of

an enterprise, and the adoption of course of action and the allocation of resources

necessary for carrying out these goals.



If this view is taken, the scope of strategy becomes too broad to include

total managerial functions are related with the achievement of organizational

objectives with the co-operation of others. Further, whether strategy formulation

should include objective determination also is not agreed upon. For example, one

view suggests that strategy is a way in which the firm, reacting to its environment,

deploys its principal resources and marshals its main efforts in pursuit of its

purpose. This is done in context of organizational objectives. The controversy can

be aside by identifying two types of strategies; master, root, or grand strategy and
competitive strategy. In face, the marshalling of resources is a type of competitive

strategy while master strategy may include objective formulation as well as the

resultant actions. Therefore, strategy can be defined as follows.



Strategy is the determination of organizational objectives in the light of

environmental variables and determination of course of action and commitment of

organizational resources to achieve those objectives.

Based on these definitions of strategy, its following features can be identified.



1. Strategy is the action of relating the organization with its environment,

particularly the external environment, management and treats an

organization as part of a society consequently affected by it.

2. Strategy is the right combination of factors both external and internal. In

relating an organization to its environment, management must also

consider the internal factors too, particularly in terms of its strengths and

weaknesses, that is, what it can do and what it cannot do.

3. Strategy is a relative combination of actions. The combination is to meet a

particular condition, to solve certain problems, or to attain a desirable

objective. It may take any form; for various situations vary and, therefore,

require somewhat different approach.

4. Strategy may involve even contradictory action. Since strategic action

depends on environmental variables, a manager may take an action today

and may revise or reverse his steps tomorrow depending on the situation.

5. Strategy is forward looking. It has to do orientation towards the future,

Strategic action is required in a new situation. Nothing new requiring

solutions can exist in the past, therefore, strategy is relevant only to future.

It may take advantages of the past analysis.

STRATEGY AND TACTICS: Differences


It is desirable to make distinction between strategy and tactics so that top-

level managers concentrate more on strategic functions rather than engage

themselves in tactical functions. The major difference between strategy and

tactics is that strategy determines what major plans are to be undertaken and

allocates resources to them, while tactics is means by which previously

determined plans are executed. Beyond this major difference, there are some other

differences which can be better understood by analyzing these words as used in

military.



Therefore, from business point of view, the distinction between strategy

and tactics can be identified as follows:

1. Level of Conduct. is formulated at the top-level management, either at the

headquarter level or major divisional office level. Tactics is employed at

comparatively lower-level management. In fact, tactics is derived from the

strategy itself and works within the parameters developed by it.

2. Periodicity. The formulation of strategy is both continuous and irregular.

The process is continuous but the timing of decision is irregular as it

depends on the appearance of opportunities, new ideas, management

initiative, and other non-routine factors. For example, information

collection which may form the basis of strategy formulation is a regular

process but when the decision on the information will be taken is not sure

and, therefore, irregular. Tactics is determined by various organizations on

a continuous periodic basis. For example, budget preparation, a tactical

exercise, is a regular feature.

3. Time Horizon. Strategy has a long-term perspective, specially the

successful strategies are followed for long periods. However, if the

particular strategy does not succeed, it is changed. Thus depending on the

situation, strategy may have flexible time horizon; however, emphasis is

on long term. On the other hand, time horizon of tactics is short term and
definite. Moreover, the duration is mostly uniform. For example, budgets

are prepared at regular time intervals and for comparatively short period of

time. Deployment of resources, a part of strategy, is a decision committed

for very long period, being investment in plant and machinery.

4. Information Needs. Formulation of strategy as well as tactics requires the

use of certain information. However, the type of information required for

two elements differs considerably. In the case of strategic decisions,

mangers require more information. Moreover, some assumptions are made

about the nature of environmental factors. In fact, strategic decisions are

made under the condition of partial ignorance because managers do not

have all the information about the environment. Tactical decisions are

taken basically on the information generated within the organization,

particularly from accounting and statistical sources.

5. Subject Values. The formulation of strategy is affected considerably by the

personal values of the persons involved in the process. For example, what

should be the objective of the organization; a strategic decision us affected

by the personal values of the person concerned. On the other hand, tactics

in normally free of such values because this type of decision is taken

within the context of strategic decisions.

6. Importance. Strategic decisions are more important for the organizational

effectiveness as they decide the future course of the organization as a

whole. They decide the nature of the organization. On the other hand,

tactical decisions are less important because they are concerned with

specific part of the organization. This difference, though simple, is quite

important because once a strategy fails, the organization requires

considerable time to recoup its position.



Though these differences between strategy and tactics are there, often in

practice, two are blurred. At one extreme, the differences between the two are
quite clear, but at the other end, these differences may not hold good because

tactics is generated by strategy and can be called as sub strategy. Moreover, what

is one manger`s strategy may be a tactics for another manager. For example,

strategies are developed at the corporate level in the planning process.

Substratagies within this strategy may then be pursued by various divisions of the

organization. Thus what might be considered as tactical plans at the corporate

level may be termed as the division level strategy. Thus depending on the level of

the organization, an action may be strategic or tactical. Therefore, the managers

have to find out their positions and decision context and must emphasizes on

strategic decisions.

Role of Strategies and Policies



Strategies and policies are important in all types of organizations-business

or non-business, public sector or private sector, small or large, in developed

countries or underdeveloped countries. The systems approach of management

suggests interaction of an organization with its environment on continuous basis.

This interaction can better be maintained through formulation of suitable

strategies and policies. In fact, the function of formulation of strategies and

policies has become so important that it is equated with total top management

function because it is the top management which is primarily responsible for

organizational adaptation to the needs of environment.



Careful strategies and policies play a significant role in the success of an

organization. If we look at the Indian industrial scene over the last generation or

so, we find that great names like Martin Burn, Jessops, Andrews have touched the

rock bottom, while total unknowns few years ago like Reliance, Larsen and

Tourbo, etc., have touched gigantic heights. Similarly, companies like Hindustan

Lever, ITC Limited, TISCO, TELCO, have maintained their high profile. There

are numerous such examples of good companies in the Indian scene as well as the

world over which have been successful because they have adopted suitable
strategies and policies. This happens because strategies and policies contribute in

several ways in managing an organization; the more important of them are as

follows:

1. Framework for planning. Strategies and policies provide the framework

for plans by channeling operating decisions and often predeciding them. If

strategies and policies are deployment of organizational resources in

those areas where they find better use. Strategies define the business area

both in terms of customers and geographical areas served. Better the

definition of these areas, better will be the deployment of resources. For

example, if an organization has set that it will be deployment of resources.

For example, if an organization has set that it will introduce new products

in the market, it will allocate more resources to research and development

activities which is reflected in budget preparation.

2. Clarity in Direction of Activities. Strategies and policies focus on direction

of activities by specifying what activities are true to be undertaken for

achieving organizational objectives. They make the organizational

objectives more clear and specific. For example, a business organization

may define its objective as social objective. But these definitions are too

broad and even vague for putting them into operation. They are better

spelled by strategies which focus on operational objectives and make them

more practical. For example, strategies will provide how profit objective

can be sharply defined in terms of how much profit is to be earned and

what resources will be required for that. When objectives are spelled out

in these terms, they provide clear direction to persons in the organization

responsible for implementing various courses of action. Most people

perform better if they know clearly what they are expected to do and

where their organizational is going.


Looking into the role of strategy and policy, Ross and Kami have

suggested that Without a strategy the organization is like a ship without a rudder,

going around in circles. It is like a tramp; it has no place to go. They ascribe most

business failures to lack of strategy, or the wrong strategy, or lack of

implementation of a reasonably good strategy. They conclude from their study

that without appropriate strategy effective implemented, failure is a matter of

time.

FORMULATION OF STRATEGIES AND POLICIES



Formulation of strategies and policies is a creative and analytical process.

It is a process because particular functions are performed in a sequence over the

period of time. The process involves a number of activities and their analysis to

arrive at a decision. Though there may not be unanimity over these activities

particularly in the context of organizational variability, a complete process of

strategy and policy formulation can be seen from the following figure.

The process set out above includes strategy formulation and its implementation,

what has been referred to as strategy and policy. The figure suggests the various

elements of strategy formulation and process and the way they interact among

themselves. Accordingly the various elements are corporate mission and

objectives, environmental analysis, corporate analysis, identification of

alternatives, and choice of alternative. Up to this stage the formulation is

complete. However, implementation is closely related with formulation because it

will provide feedback for adjusting strategy or policy.

A brief discussion of each element will be helpful to understand the problems

involved in each.





Environmental



Analysis




Choice of

Organisational

Alternatives

alternatives

Implementation

Review and

mission and objective

Control







Corporate Analysis







Personal Values

and expectations





1. Corporate Mission and Objective. Organisational mission and objectives

are the starting point of strategy and policy formulation. As discussed

earlier, mission is the fundamental unique purpose of an organization that

sets it apart from other organizations and objective is the end-result which

an organization strives to achieve. These together provide the direction of

which other aspects of the process will be taken up.

2. Environmental Analysis. The second aspect of the process is the

environmental analysis. Since the basic objective of strategies and policies

is to integrate the organization with its environment, it must know the kind

of analysis. The process of environmental analysis includes collection of

relevant information from the environment, interpreting its impact on the

future of organizational working, and determining what opportunities and

threats-positive and negative aspects- are offered by the environment. The

environmental information can be collected from various sources like

various publications, verbal information from various people, spying, and

forecasting. The process of environmental analysis works better if it is
undertaken on continuous basis and is made an intrinsic part of the

strategy formulation.

3. Corporate Analysis. While environmental analysis is the analysis of

external factors, corporate analysis takes into account the internal factors.

These together are known as SWOT (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities

and threats) analysis. It is not merely enough to locate what opportunities

and threats are offered by the environment but equally important is the

analysis of how the organization can take the advantages of these

opportunities and overcome threats. Corporate analysis discloses

strengths and weaknesses of the organization and points out the areas in

which business can be undertaken. Corporate analysis is performed by

identifying the factors which are critical for the success of the present or

future business of the organization and then evaluating these factors

whether they are contributing in positive way or in negative way. A

positive contribution is strength and a negative contribution is a weakness.

4. Identification of Alternatives. Environmental analysis and corporate

analysis taken together will specify the various alternatives for strategy

and policy. Usually this process will bring large number of alternatives.

For example, if an organization is strong in financial resources, these can

be used in many ways, taking several projects. However, all the ways or

projects cannot be selected. Therefore, some criteria should be set up to

evaluate each alternative. Normally the criteria are set in the light of

organizational mission and objectives.

5. Choice the Strategy and Policy. The identification and evaluation of

various alternatives will narrow down the range of strategies and policies

which can seriously be considered for choice. Choice is deciding the

acceptable alternative among the several which fits with the organizational

objectives. Normally at this stage personal values and expectations of
decisions-maker play an important role in strategy and policy because he

will decide the course of action depending on his own likings and

dislikings. This happens because in one way, the organizational objectives

reflect the personal philosophy of individuals particularly at the top

management level.

6. Implementation . After the strategy and policy have been chosen, they are

put to implementation, that is, they are put into action. Choice of strategy

and policy is mostly analytical and conceptual while implementation is

operational or putting them into action. Various factors which are

necessary for implementation are design of suitable organization structure,

developing and motivating people to take up work, designing effective

control and information system, allocation of resources etc., When these

are undertaken, these may produce results which can be compared in the

light of objectives set and control process comes into operation. If the

results and objectives differ, a further analysis is required to find out the

reasons for the gap and taking suitable actions to overcome the problems

because of which the gap exists. This may require a change in strategy and

policy if there is a problem because of the formulation inadequacy. This

puts back the managers at the starting point of the strategy and policy

formulation.

Summary

Once the creative and analytical aspects of strategy formulation have been settled,

the managerial priority is one of converting the strategy into operationally

effective action. Indeed a strategy is never complete, even as formulation, until it

gains a commitment of the organisation`s resources and becomes embodied in

organizational activities. Therefore, to bring the result, the strategy should be put

to action because the choice of even the soundest strategy will not affect
organizational activities and achievement of its objectives. Therefore , effective

implementation of strategy is a must for the organization.

Discussion Questions

1. Policies are guides for managerial action. Discuss. Should policies be

permanent or subject to ready change? Explain.

2. A Manager states that in his organization most policies are defined as the

result of an appeal rather than being formulated and this has the advantage

of having policies where most needed and avoiding unnecessary policy

statements. Do you agree with the manager? Explain. What roles are

performed by policies formulated in various areas?

3. Discuss the characteristics of a sound policy

4. The term strategy is frequently used to denote specific course of action

that can be taken to achieve an organisation`s goals usually in the context

of a competitive environment. Explain. How does strategy differ from

Policy and Tactics?

5. The chief executive of a large textile unit manufacturing high-priced

fabrics faces competition from the new entrant in the field. The chief

executive of the unit asks you to design suitable strategy for it. How will

you proceed?

6. What actions can be taken for the successful implementation of a strategy?

LESSON III

CORPORATE PLANNING

Corporate Planning

The concept of corporate planning has in recent years gained wide currency in

management literature. Its connotation is somewhat overlapping with the concept

of strategic planning. It is, therefore necessary that the scope of corporate

planning and strategic planning should be clearly understood.
Simply stated, corporate planning is a comprehensive planning process which

involves continued formulation of objectives and the guidance of affairs towards

their attainment. It is a systematic of the objectives of an organization or

corporate body, determination of appropriate targets, and formulation of practical

plans by which the objectives could be achieved. It is undertaken by top

management for the company as a whole on a continuous basis for making

entrepreneurial (risk-taking) decisions systematically and with the best possible

knowledge of their probable outcome and effects, organizing systematically the

efforts and resources needed to carry out the decisions, and measuring the results

of these decisions against the expectations through organized systematic

feedback.

The object of corporate planning is to identify new areas of investment and

marketing. Initiating new projects, new courses of action, and analyzing past

experience are the subject-matter of corporate planning. Thus, it implies (a) the

imposition of a planning discipline on the present operations of the business, and

(b) a reappraisal of the business and of the corporate planning competencies to the

most profitable uses. Innovation is the core of such planning. At the same time it

ensures that managers are continually measuring their performance against the

company`s long-term profit and market objectives, evaluating alternative

methods of reaching the goals, and keeping in touch with changes in the market

and in technology.

Constituents of corporate planning

The comprehensive nature of the corporate planning process lies in that

operational planning, project planning and strategic planning are its constituents.

Let us examine the nature and scope of each of these constituents.

It is essential for every business firm to manage its ongoing operations efficiently

to keep the business a flot in the market with which it is familiar. Operational

planning is necessary so as to ensure that changes in the market situation for the
existing product line do not adversely affect the earnings of the firm. Thus,

operational planning involves study of the market conditions for the existing

range of products to maintain and improve the position of the firm in the face of

competition. It is essentially a short-term exercise and deals with the existing

product, market and facilities. The degree of uncertainly in operational planning is

of a low order; the time span of discretion is short; choice not alternatives is

relatively simple. But the firm can ill-afford to ignore long-term changes in the

product markets. It has to look for new markets for the existing product, develop

new products, create a market for the same, and utilize the existing facilities and

expertise to meet new requirements. Considerations such as these characterize

project planning, which is a forward looking exercise concerned with new

markets, new products and new facilities. Project planning, therefore involves a

greater degree of uncertainty, and demands a higher order of judgement on the

part of planners due to the risks involved.

Strategic planning refers of a unified, comprehensive and integrated plan aimed at

relating the strategic advantages of the firm to the challenges of the environment.

It is concerned with appraising the environment in relation to the company,

identifying the strategies to obtain sanction for one of the alternatives to be

interpreted and communicated in an operationally useful manner. Thus, strategic

planning provides the framework within which future activities of the company

are expected to be carried out. Compared with project planning, the time span of

discreation in strategic planning is much longer, the degree of uncertainly and

corresponding risks involved are much greater, and judgement to be exercised is

more important.

Inasmuch as strategic planning determines the future direction of a company,

corporate planning is essentially based on strategic planning, and at the same time

takes care of project planning and operational planning. Thus corporate planning

is described as a formal systematic managerial process, organized by
responsibility, time and information, to ensure that operational planning, project

planning and strategic planning are carried out regularly to enable top

management to direct and control the future of the enterprise. It follows that

corporate planning is concerned with determination of objectives and developing

means to achieve the objectives. It may encompass both short periods as well as

long periods. The time span depends on how far ahead a company wants to

forecast and to plan, which, in turn, depends upon the nature of business that the

company wants to be in and commitment of resources required for it. For

instance, in the modern heavy engineering industry, commitment of resources is

generally required for a fairly long period-10-15 or 20 years. In the ready-made

garment industry, on the other hand, resource commitment is for a very short

period, generally required for a fairly long period ?10, 15 or 20 years. In the

ready-made garment industry, on the other hand, resource commitment is for a

very short period, generally one year, so that operations may be adapted to

changing fashions and taste. Therefore, corporate planning in an engineering

enterprise will involve long-term considerations regarding market demand,

technology and such other factors. It will have a short time horizon in the case of

garment industry. Longtime horizon in view, generally five years or more.

Corporate planning in capital-intensive industries is always associated with long-

range planning. Besides, corporate planning is concerned with the existing

products in existing markets as well as new products and new markets. Long-

range planning essentially takes care of only the existing products in existing

markets.

Why is Strategic planning Necessary

A variety of reasons may be adduced to justify business policy or strategic

planning. One justification is that it has been found useful in practice. Research

studies, based on the experience of companies and executive viewpoints, have

indicated that strategic planning contributes positively to the performance of
enterprises. Studies made by Igor Ansoff and his associates. Eastlack and Mc

Donals David Herold have revealed that companies which had undertaken formal

strategic planning not only outperformed the non-planners on most measures of

success (return on equity, growth of sales, earning per share, and value of the

firm), but significantly outperformed their own past results as well, besides, the

companies that used strategic planning were able to predict the outcome of

planning much better than others. Malik and Karger in their analysis of the

performance of 38 chemical/drug, electronics and machinery firms found that in

nine out of 13 financial measures (sales volume, earnings per share, net income,

etc) firms having formal, integrated, long-range planning far outperformed

those doing it informally. Investigations have also shown that strategic planning

can isolate the key factors in an industry and thus help companies plan their

strategies more effectively.

Executive viewpoints on the contribution of strategic planning to the success of

firms were sought in a survey conducted by Ramanujam, Camillus and

Venkatarman. The survey conducted 200 executives of US corporations. Their

collective view clearly indicated that strategic management has been a significant

and critical factor in determining their individual and organizational success, As

high as 887 p.c., of the respondents were of the view that reducing emphasis on

strategic planning would be detrimental to their long-term performance. Again

70.6 p.c. of the respondents stated that they had improved the sophistication of

strategic planning systems in their organisations.

Apart from the empirical evidence in support of strategic planning, it is justified

on several other grounds. With fast changing environment of business and

industry ?product-market conditions, by which future opportunities and problems

can be anticipated by company executives. It enables executives to provide

necessary direction for the enterprise, take full advantage of new opportunities

and minimize the attendent risks. Secondly, with clear goals and direction
provided for the future, employees in general and mangers in particular can better

perceive the ways and means of achieving the corporate objectives consistently

with the individual and group aspirations. This is conducive to greater harmony

and goal congruence. Moreover, formal strategic planning focuses on problems of

the total enterprise, not just functional problems in the marketing, finance or

personel areas. Persons exposed to strategy formation thus develop a breadth of

understanding and undergo change of attitudes in the process. Strategic planning

is likely to be beneficial particularly in organsiations when there is a long time lag

between managerial decisions and the results thereof. Thus, for instance, if

research and development efforts take several years to finally design and

manufacture a new product, events in the intervening period may nullify the

outcome of the R&D effort based on the original decision. Strategic planning

enables management to improve the chances of making decisions which will

stand the test of time, and revising the strategy on the basis of monitoring the

progress of R & D and the changes in product market conditions.

Thus, the advantages of a systematic approach to strategic planning and

management may be said to include (a) providing necessary guidance to the entire

organsiation about what is expected to be achieved and how (b) making managers

more alert to new opportunities and potential threats (c) unifying organizational

efforts leading to greater harmony and goal congruence (d) creating a more

proactive management posture (e) promoting a constantly evolving business

model so as to ensure bottom-line success for the enterprise and (f) providing the

rationale for evaluating competing budget requests for steering resources into

strartegy-supportive and results- producing areas.

However, it would not be true to contend that strategic planning alone invariably

leads to success. Achievements of corporate enterprises are caused by multiple

factors : adequate resources, competent managers, specialist services, product-

market conditions, and so forth. Strategic planning is a necessary, though not
sufficient, condition for success. But is makes a difference. Executives who

engage in formal strategic planning are likely to be more effective in achieving

their objectives than those who do not.

Benefits of Strategic Planning

Formulation and implementation of strategies which constitute the two main

aspects of strategic management may be expected to yield several benefits.

1. Financial benefits

On the basis of empirical studies and logical analysis it may be claimed that the

impact of strategic management is primarily that of improved financial

performance in terms of profit and growth of firms with a developed strategic

management system having major impact on both planning and implementation

of strategies.





2. Enhanced capability of problem prevention

This is likely to result from encouraging and rewarding subordinate attention to

planning considerations, and mangers being assisted in their monitoring and

forecasting role by employees who are alerted to the needs of strategic planning.

3. Improved quality of strategic decisions through group interaction

The process of group interaction for decision-making facilitates generation of

alternative strategies and better screening of options due to specialized

perspectives of group members. The best alternatives are thus likely to be chosen

and acted upon.

4. Greater Employee Motivation

Participation of employees or their representatives in strategy formulation leads to

a better understanding of the priorities and operation of the reward system. Also

there is better appreciation on their part of the productivity-reward linkage
inherent in the strategic plan. Hence goal-directed behaviour is likely to follow

the incentives.

5. Reduction resistance to change.

The benefit of acceptability of change with minimum resistance is also likely to

follow the participative process of strategy making as there is greater awareness

of the basis of choosing a particular option and the limits to available alternatives.

The uncertainty which is associated with change in also eliminated in the process

and resistance.

Negative Effects of Strategic Planning

While the benefits of strategic management are well recognized, alongside the

positive behavioural consequences of group-based strategic decisions, there are

certain unintended negative effects as well:

a. The process of strategic planning and management as a formalized system

is naturally a costly exercise in terms of the time that needs to be devoted

to it by mangers. But the negative effect of mangers spending time away

from their normal tasks may be quite serious. For defaults on the part of

managers in discharging their operational responsibilities may be

irreparable. This eventuality may of course be guarded against. Mangers

may be trained to schedule their activities so as to devote adequate time

for strategic work without cutting down the time they have to devote to

normal operations.

b. Another type of unintended negative effect may arise due to the non-

fulfilment of participating subordinates expectations leading to frustration

and disappointment. For instance, subordinates who have been involved in

strategy making at some stages may expect that their participation will be

solicited in other areas too, which again may not happen. Such

eventualities may be unavoidable. So mangers need to be trained to

anticipate disappointments, minimize the impact and respond
constructively to the sense of frustration that may on occasions be

experienced by subordinates.

c. A third dysfunction or unintended effect of strategic management relates

to the risk of participants shirking the responsibility of inputs in the

decision-making process and the conclusions subsequently drawn. This

may happen if those associated with the formulation of strategy are not

intimately involved with the implementation of strategy. Hence,

assurances with the outcomes and results of strategic decisions should be

limited to the performance that can be achieved by the strategy-makers

and their subordinates.

Strategic Planning in Small Business Firms

Is it worthwhile for managers of small business firms to engage in the strategic

planning exercise? No doubt the size of an organization can make a significant

difference in the nature and scope of planning. Small firms generally have a few

products or services to offer, mainly because their resources and capabilities are

limited. Usually they do not have formal procedures to monitor the environment,

make forecasts, or evaluate and control the existing strategy. Managerial

personnel in such firms are mostly trained on the job. Thus, they tend to rely on

experience as a guide, rather than on systematic, specified procedures. In many

cases, the firms are owned and managed by family members, relatives and close

friends.

Obviously, because of their differentiating characteristics, the planning process in

small firms is bound to be less systematic and explicit as well as less formal. The

strategic planning model suited to large organizations may serve the purpose of a

guideline, but it cannot be adopted by small firms with the same kind of detailed

and complex analyses. However, it may be useful for managers of small firms to

realize that strategic planning does not necessarily have to be an expensive,

complex exercise or involve the use of quantitative data, nor does it need to be a
formal exercise. It may be undertaken on a modest scale focusing on only the

steps which are relevant to the firm`s needs. Gilmore has suggested in more

concrete terms that, in smaller companies, strategy should be formulated by the

top management team at the conference table. According to him, Judgement,

experience, intuition and well-guided discussion are the key to success, not staff

work and mathematical models.

Another point to be kept in view is that strategic planning may serve as a learning

process. Managers of small firms may progressive come to know more about the

capabilities and limitations of the firm as well as about the opportunities and

threats in the environment. They can become increasingly more familiar also with

the environment. They can become increasingly more familiar also with the

process of strategic planning itself, which can become more formal and

sophisticated over time as managers develop the necessary skills.

Thus, for strategic planning in small business, it is essential for managers to

realize that (a) to start with strategic planning need not be a complex, formal

process, and (b) it has its usefulness also as a learning process. Further, as a rice

has observed, strategic planning is frequently easier to accomplish in small

companies, for once developed, strategies can be clearly communicated to, and

understood by, all personnel which ensure effective implementation of the

strategies.

Robinson, who conducted survey of 101 small retail, service nand

manufacturing firms in USA over a three-year period, reported a significant

improvement in sales, profitability and productivity of those firms which engaged

in strategic planning when compared to firms without systematic planning

activities.

Strategies Planning in Not-for-profit Organisations

Non ?profit organisations, by definition, differ from profit-oriented business

organisations. There are diverse types of not-for-profit organisations in India as in
other countries, including research institutions, hospitals, educational , social,

cultural, and political organisations, trade unions, and the like. In spite of this

diversity, however, certain common charatertics are noticeable in such

organsiations that distinguish them from business firms. Generally, their output

consists of services of an intangible nature which are not amenable to direct

measurement. The influence of their clients or customers is often limited. Many

of these organisations are funded by way of grants and donations from

Government and public trusts. Discretionary powers of internal management team

are thus subject to the overall regulation of the funding bodies. The personnel of

some organisations like research institutes, social and cultural organisations, often

are committed more to their profession or to a cause or ideal. Their allegiance to

the organization is thereby weakened. Rewards and punishments are subject to

restraints due to the intangible nature of services, external funding and the

professional commitments of employees.

Because of these characteristics of not-for-profit organisations, partly because of

their diversity inter se, and since strategic planning techniques have developed out

of the experience of large business enterprises, top management of not-for-profit

organisations are said to be less likely to engage in strategic planning. Wortman

in his study in the American context found that such organisations tended to be

managed much more in a short-term operational sense than in a strategic sence.

According to Hofer and Schendel also. There is some evidence that some of

these organisations have no strategies at all. Rather, they seem motivated more by

short-term budget cycles and personal goals than by any interest in re-examining

their purpose or mission in the light of altered environmental circumstances.

Summary

The orgnisation of Business Policy` or Policy and strategy` as a field of study

for executives and students of management is based on the experience of

corporate enterprises and the history of success and experience of corporate
enterprises and the history of success and failure of business firms over time.

Business Policy or strategy formulation is the outcome of top management

decisions bearing on the future of on going enterprises. a formal approach to such

policy-making requires conceptualization and systematic application of

knowledge and skill.

Strategic planning and management forming the core of business policy study

include top management responsibilities of defining the business mission and

objectives, formulation of strategic alternatives, choice of strategy and its

implementation. These responsibilities have made it obligatory for individuals

who occupy or aspire for higher executive positions to develop an understanding

of ideas and realities in the total organsiational context. The ability to sense what

information is needed and relevant and how it should be ordered to facilitate

comprehensive understanding involve scientific-analytical approaches to

knowledge, problems and decisions. But more than that it also involves the

exercise of informed judgement which is an art, and there is no certainty of

outcome of such judgement.

Review Questions

1. How is formulation of objectives related to corporate planning?

2. Strategic planning determines the future direction of a company Educate?

3. Strategic planning in a necessary condition for success`. Do you agree?

4. Is it worth while for managers of small business firms in engage in the

strategic planning exercise?

5. Is strategic planning necessary for not-for-profit organization?

Key words



Empirical evidence



Group interaction



Gaps


Overlaps



Scientific ? analytical approaches.

LESSON III

CORPORATE PLANNING

LESSON OUTLINE

Concept of Corporate planning

Constituents of Corporate planning

Why is Strategic planning necessary

Benefits of Strategic Planning

Negative Effects of Strategic Planning

Strategic Planning in small Business firm

Strategic Planning in Not-for Profit Organisation

LEARNING OBJECTIVE

After reading this chapter you should be able to :



Understand the importance of Corporate Planning

The need of Corporate Planning

Narrate the advantages of Corporate Planning

Point out the warning signals of Corporate Planning.

LESSON IV

IMPORTANCE OF FINANCIAL PLANNING



One of the most important functions of the financial manager is that of

planning. In order to formulate plans, he must first know his company`s

immediate position . Like a doctor, he needs to know the condition of his patient

before prescribing a remedy. You would not launch a financial weak company on

a programme of expansion and heavy promotional activity any more than you
would send out a patient with a heart condition to do two hour of road work each

morning. In other words, plans must fit the financial capabilities of the concern.

Planning business finances and carrying out financial plans is a continuous

process in the day-to-day administration of a business. Financial planning is

essentially concerned with the economical procurement and profitable use of

funds ? a use which is determined by realistic investment decisions. This

approach requires a sensible appraisal of the economic, industrial and share

market patterns which are likely to emerge as plans are developed and

operationally assessed. In this connection, G. D. Bond says: Whilst making profit

is the mark of corporation success, money is one energizer which makes it

possible. The aim in financial planning should be to match the needs of the

company with those of the investors with a sensible gearing of short-term and

long-term fixed interest securities. Ernest W. Walker and William H. Baughn

state that in view of the complex nature of the business enterprise today,

management places a great emphasis upon financial planning. The primary

advantage accrued to financial planning is the elimination of waste resulting from

complexity of operation. For example, technological advantages, higher taxes,

increasing cost of social legislation, fluctuations tend to cause management to

exert wasteful effort. Financial planning helps management to avoid waste by

providing policies and procedures which make possible a closer co-ordination

between various functions of the business enterprise. It aids the company in

preparing for the future. A firm which performs no financial planning depends

upon past experience for the establishment of its objectives, policies and

procedures. Since the company in which the firm operates is dynamic in

character, past experience cannot be relied upon in dealing with future conditions.

To plan effectively requires that forecasts be made of future trends, and when

these are used as a basis for plans, many unprofitable ventures are eliminated. A

clearly developed financial plan, when made known to executives at different
levels of management, tends to relieve top management from detailed financial

plan, the lower echelons of management may often develop their own policies an

procedures, which would produce confusion and waste such as loss of time,

goodwill and financial resources. The success or failure of production and

distribution functions of firms hinges upon the manner in which the finance

functions of firms hinges upon the manner in which the finance function is

performed, and in many instances, a single financial decision as the policy-

making level determines the success or planned before any action is taken. The

objectives of a business enterprise should be well-known to the financial

manager. On the basis of these objectives, he can formulate his financial plans.

But whatever the financial plans, their ultimate objective is to enable a firm to

take such decision as would make it possible for it to accomplish its goals and

objectives. Palmer and Taylor recommend that financial planning should be

directed to aiding the management in achieving its objectives and in

implementing its policy. At the same time, both the scope of the objectives and

the nature of the policy may well be limited by financial considerations. Gordon

Donaldson observes that, as the central integrating document for corporate

strategy and action, the financial plan should do more than include the best

available information about the economic and competitive environment in which

the business operates, and establish targets for the sales and profits to be achieved

by certain dates. It should also promote the co-ordination of resources and efforts

to reach these target positions and form the basis for measuring performance as

the future unfolds. Financial planning is one of the most important aspects of the

financial manager`s job. The success of an organization often depends upon the

information contained in a plan for future performance. Not only should one plan

the future with proper forecast and budgets, but one should continually evaluate

the performance of the firm in comparison with past forecasts. Financial planning

should achieve a total integration and co-ordination of all the plans of the other
functions of the firm. It should estimate the resources that will be required to

carry out the operations and determine how far these resources can be generated

by the firm itself and how far they will have to be obtained externally. A system

of control, on the other hand, involves obtaining, processing and recording

information in such a way that it can be easily analyzed and thus highlight the

areas in which improvement may be effected in the operations of the firm.



The financial plan of a corporation should be formulated in the light not

only of present but of future developments as well. It should take into

consideration the present capital needs for fixed assets, working capital, probable

earnings, and requirements of investors; and it should anticipate possibilities of

later expansion, combination with other corporations, higher or lower future

interest rates, etc., All of these consideration resolve themselves into a

determination of:

1. The amount of capital to be raised;

2. The form and proportionate amount of securities to be issued

3. Policies bearing on the administration of capital



Total financial planning has been defined as advance programming of all

the plans of financial management and the integration and co-ordination of these

plans with the operating plans of the other functions of the enterprise. Henry

Hoagland defines the financial plan of a corporation as its pattern of outstanding

stocks and bonds.



Financial planning is the responsibility of top level management. One of

the reasons for the high place in the authority ladder occupied by financial

mangers is the importance of planning, analysis and control operations for which

they are responsible. Another reason why financial authority is rarely

decentralized or delegated to subordinates is that many financial decisions are

crucial for the survival of the firm. The issue of stocks and bonds of a corporation

must be so timed as to bring about an integration and co-ordination of different
plans. Plans invariable depend upon the availability of funds for their successful

implementation. Financial planning is, therefore, a part of a larger planning

process in an organization. It is, in a way, an indication of the overall plan of a

firm in financial terms. A financial plan generally describes a firm`s operating or

commercial activities, the investment it requires, and the sources of the funds to

be used all in a time-phased schedule. S.K. Bose points out that one of the

important ways in which some headway can be profitably made by a firm is the

use of mathematical model of a company which has an input of various

accounting and financial statistic, and an output of various financial

measurements of business performance and Performa financial statements. Inputs

may be sales forecasts, cash balances, debt structure and the cost of production,

and output may be projections of profit-and-loss statements, cash flow statements,

balance sheets, sources and use of funds, and various ratio analyses.



International financial planning must be analysed within the context of a

global plan to ensure that the financial aspects of strategic planning are consistent

with the basic aims and philosophy of business, its competitive posture in

international markets, major opportunities and risks, action programmes of the

business and contingency strategies, if any. Overseas capital budgeting projects

must be analyed within the general global strategy questioning the basic

assumptions of the strategy and its general direction. The financial ability to

impose more explicit goals on the global planning process and clear modes of

analysis may help managers of the multi-national enterprise to obtain a more clear

view of the woods` rather than the trees`. Finally, placing international corporate

finance decision- making within the context of the strategic analysis may help

counteract some of the limitations of financial theory in the key area of integrated

financial planning.
Step in Financial planning



STEPS IN FINANCIAL PLANNING

Establishing Objectives

Policy Formulation

Fore Casting

Formulation of Procedures



According to Ernest W. Walker and William H. Baughn, there are four

steps in financial planning:



Establishing Objectives:



The financial objectives of any business enterprise is to employ capital in

whatever proportion necessary to increase the productivity of the remaining

factors of production over the long run. Although the extent to which capital is

employed varies from firm to firma, the objective is identical in all firms.

Business enterprises operate in a dynamic society, and in order to take advantages

of changing economic conditions., financial planners should establish both short-

term and long-run objectives. The long-run goal of any firm is to use capital in the

correct proportion.

Policy Formulation



Financial policies are guides to all actions which deal with procuring,

administering and disbursing the funds of business firms. These policies may be

classified into several broad categories.

i.

Policies; governing the amount of capital required for firms to

achieve their financial objectives.

ii.

Policies which determine the control by the parties who furnish the

capital
iii.

Policies which act as a guide in the use of debt or equity capital

iv.

Policies which guide management in the selection of sources of

funds.

v.

Policies which govern credit and collection activities of the

enterprise.

Forecasting



A fundamental requisite of financial planning is the collection of facts`

however, where financial plans concern the future, facts are not available.

Therefore, financial management is required to forecast the future in order to

predict variability of factors influencing the type of policies the enterprise

formulates.

Formulation of Procedures



Financial policies are broad guides which, to be executed property, must

be translated into detailed procedures. This helps the financial manger to put

planned activities into practice.

CHARACTERISTICS OF FINANCIAL PLANNING



Simplicity of purpose



Extensive use



Financial Contingency



Objectivity



Comparison



Uniformity



Flexibility



Exceptions



Conservative



Solvency



Profitability

CHARACTERISTICS OF

Varying risk

FINANCIAL PLANNING

Planning Foresight
Practical
Availability
Timing
Maneuverability
Suitability
Planning
Communication
Implementation
Control
Cost
Risks



Simplicity of Purpose:

Henry Hoagland is of the view that a financial plan should be drafted in terms of

the purpose for which the enterprise is organized.

No corporation, however, liberal its charter, should shoot at the horizon. It

should be free from complexity.

Intensive Use: A wasteful use of capital is almost as bad as inadequate capital. A

financial plan should be such that it will provide for an intensive use of funds.

Funds should not remain idle, nor should there be any paucity of funds.

Moreover, they should be made available for the optimal utilization of projects.

Financial contingency

In fact, planning, as it is commonly practiced today, tends to build in rigidities

which work against a quick and effective response to the unexpected event.

Contingency planning or a strategy for financial mobility should be brought into

the open for a careful review. Every business has objectives, the guide policy in

their most basic form and include survival, profitability and growth. Growth

objectives that are central to our philosophy of successful management may be

expressed in a variety of ways-sales, profits, market share, geographical coverage,
and product line; but they are all contingent on a continuous flow of funds which

make it possible for the management to implement decisions. Financial

contingency planning is a strategy which a firm adopts in situations of adversity.

By proper planning, a number of financial difficulties can be minimized. The

essential elements of a contingency plan are:

i.

To establish appropriate means to identify financial difficulties. In

other words, do not wait for financial difficulties to arise or until

they arise;

ii.

To assess measures that can be adopted if a financial emergency

materials.

iii.

To indicate measures to be taken, by whom, when, in what

sequence, and with what priority.

iv.

To attempt an effective sensitivity analysis to isolate variables

which can trigger off a financial crisis.

v.

To study past occurrences;

vi.

To take such management control action as may be necessary. This

action may be;

a. Time related Action: It encourages cash inflows and delays

cash outflows;

b. Volume-Related Action: It makes for the flexibility of

operations so that they may be increased or decreased as and

when necessary.

c. Scale-Related Action: This action enables a firm to change or

modify the extent of its commitment to a specific course of

action.

d. To maintain financial resources which can be immediately

utilized.
A business is operated under conditions of risk and uncertainty. Some

contingencies, therefore, are bound to materialize. A sound financial plan should

provide for some future contingencies. In this connection, Henry Hoagland

observes; No business management can assume that it will always have smooth

sailing.

Objectivity

The figures and reports to be used for a financial plan should be free from

partiality, prejudice and personal bias. A lapse from objectivity is undesirable; for

it may mislead and make it difficult if not impossible for a firm to prepare a fact-

finding plan.

Comparison

Figures and reports should be expressed in terms of standards of performance.

Financial executives often take intuitive decisions based upon their personal

opinions. These decisions are subjective. If standards of performance, including

those of past performance, are expressed, the subjective element which is likely to

creep into a financial plan, can be eliminated.

Uniformity

Figures and reports should be expressed in a manner which is consistent with

structure of the organization. All the costs incurred on or for a given department

may be included.

Flexibility

The financial plan should be such that it can be made flexible, so that it may be

modified or changed, if it is expedient or necessary to do so. This can be done by

making a provision for valuable or convertible securities. It would be better to

avoid restrictive or binding provisions in debentures and preferred stock. Flexible

sinking fund provisions may be introduced in debenture financing. There should

be provision for substituting long-term lease contracts. The use of debt financing
may be minimized so that a + may be maintained. It would be desirable, on the

contrary, to resort to equity financing. The environment or organizational

structure of a firm may; change from time to time. It is, therefore desirable to

have a more flexible. Flexibility is an obvious necessity for the establishment of

meaningful standards for guiding operations and judging performance. The

economy in which the business firm operates is highly volatile. Therefore,

management should be ready to revise or completely change the firm`s short-run

objectives, policies, and procedures in order to take advantages of changing

conditions. Firms which fail to provide flexibility often find that their share of the

market has diminished and instead of increasing their return, they find they have

become marginal firms or are experiencing financial difficulty.

Exceptions

It should be desirable to indicate areas of diversion from the normal established

standards. Sometimes it is useful for financial executives to know the areas and

the extent of deviations from actual performance. If deviations are thrown up,

they may be able to readily accept one of the exceptions under abnormal

circumstances.

Conservative

A financial plan should be conservative in the sense that the debt capacity of the

company should not be exceeded. Proper balance between debt to equity trust be

maintained.

Solvency:

The plan should take proper care of solvency because most of the companies

have failed by reason of insolvency. Henry Hoagland hold the view that adequate

liquidity will give to an organization that degree of flexibility which is necessary

for absorbing the stocks of its normal operations.
Profitability

A financial plan should maintain the required proportion between fixed charges

obligations and the liabilities in such a manner that the profitability of the

organization is not adversely affected. The most crucial factor in financial

planning is the forecast of sales, for sales almost invariably represent the primary

source of income and cash receipts. Besides, the operations of a business are

geared to the anticipated volume of sales. The management should recognize the

likely margins of error inherent in forecasts; the this recognition would enable it

to avoid the hazards involved in attaching a false accuracy to forecast data based

on tenuous assumptions. Moreover, the institutions in which different

assumptions of key variable can be reasonable made, it may be helpful to prepare

several different forecasts, each employing a different basic assumption of key

variables.

Varying Risks

A financial plan should provide for ventures with varying degrees of risks so that

it might enables a corporation to achieve substantial earnings from risky

adventures.

Planning Foresight

Foresight is essential for any plan of business operations so that capital

requirements may be assessed as accurately as possible.

Practical

A plan should be such that it should serve a practical purpose. It should be

realistic and capable of being put to intensive use. But a proper balance between

fixed and working capital should be maintained.

Availability

The source of finance which a corporation may select should be available at a

given point of time. If certain sources are not available, the corporation may even
prefer to violate the principles of suitability. Availability sometimes bears no

relation to cost. A corporation cannot always choose its source of founds.

Availability of different kinds of funds often plays an important part in a firm`s

decision to use a debt or equity. This aspect should be considered while

formulating a plan.

Timing

A sound financial policy involves effective timing in the acquisition of funds. The

key to effective timing is correct forecasting. Experience provides a fell of what is

in the offing. Sometimes, it provides a sort of a hindsight. A sound financial

policy implies not only a wise selection of sources but also an effective timing

thereof. But this would depend upon the understanding of the management of how

business cycles behave during different phases of business operations.

Maneuverability

Besides these considerations, a firm has to have maneuverability. Maneuverability

is the direct result of a management`s adherence to the financial structure which is

acceptable to the business community; that is, to creditors, stockholders, bankers,

etc., Christy and Roden observe that a firm`s ability to choose its source of

finance, at its own discretion is termed maneuverability. This maneuverability

may have to be temporarily compromised, when the financial structure diverges

from the prescribed norms in situations of economic changes. It is necessary to

choose a financial plan which may control the crises that may develop from time

to time. It is well known that any financial plan should aim at a proper balance

between debt and equity. This is essential to ensure that the stake of the

entrepreneur in an industry or a concern is substantial, so his handling of the

affairs, financial and others may be in its best interest. For an appraisal of the

debt-equity ratio, a clear definition of debt is necessary. The present practice of

excluding borrowings from core working capital is not sound. Further, it is

necessary to set up certain norms for the purpose of comparison whenever a
proposal comes up. The norms need not be rigid for all industries for the pattern

of financing by financial institutions substantially influences the debt-equity ratio.

This is obvious, for most of the new ventures are floated with a substantial

assistance from financial institutions.

Suitability

This refers to distinguishing financing permanent financing permanent asset

requirements for long-term or equity sources from financing asset needs from

short-term sources. Suitability is a principle of symmetry. It is time balancing

between sources and uses of funds. Any violation of suitability may expose a

company to illiquidity one side and low profitability on the other.

Planning

The development of a financial plan calls for good planning, i.e., making

decisions in advance about what is to be done in future. Programmes and budgets

have to be developed in production, marketing, personnel and other functional

areas of an organization. In formulating the financial plan of a corporation,

several relationship which are fundamental to the success of the plan must be

observed. The following elements are fundamental to the success of a plan.

1. Financial Pattern and conditions

2. Market conditions

3. Asset values

4. Earning capacity

5. Control

A good financial planning is the best health insurance a corporation may acquire.

Communication



Communication with outside parties, including investors and other suppliers of

funds, is an essential pre-requisite. The outside parties would then know that
management is trying to control its business effectively and what it is doing. This,

too, is of some psychological advantage to the firm.

Implementation

A firm should see to it that plans are actually carried out. The data should be

available with the plans at any level in detail and in a certain frequency. This

would enable a firm to take a timely and corrective action, whenever necessary.



Control

The capital structure of a firm should be such as to ensure that control does not

pass into the hands of outsiders. For this purpose, the use of debt financing may

be encouraged. Moreover, stock should be broadly distributed to facilitate the

maintenance of control. Protective restrictions on debt preferred stock, etc.,

should be reduced as far as possible.

Cost

The cost of capital is an important element in the formulation of financial plan.

There should be a plan for the payment of old debentures when finances are

available at a cheaper rate. A firm`s average cost of capital should be minimized.

An excessive burden of fixed charges on its earnings might inflate its cost of

capital. It should, moreover, ensure that its solvency is intact, so that its image in

financial circles improves, and funds become available to it on very reasonable

terms.

Risks

There are different types of risks, but the financial manger is more concerned

about the financial risk which is created by a high debt-equity ratio than about any

other risk. If earnings are high, the financial risk may not have much of an impact.

In other words, if the economic risks of business activities are reduced to the

minimum, a firm may not be exposed to financial risks. Its refinancing should be
planned in such a manner that the impact of risks is not seriously felt. For this

purpose, the financial manager may employ several types of securities each with

different restrictions and benefits. Future changes in their relative positions may

occur to the advantages or disadvantages of the security-holders. This situation is

called risk of dilution. The financial manager should tailor his firm`s financial

plan to the various risks that may be inherent in it.

ESTIMATING FINANCIAL REQUIREMENTS

A forecast of financial requirements is the core of accounting and financial

decisions in a firm. There are three methods of projecting financial requirements.

1. The simple traditional method of approach to forecasting financial

requirements indicates a firm`s needs in terms of the number of days for

which its sales are tied up in an individual balance sheet item. It is a tie-in

between forecasting sales and forecasting financial requirements.

2. The second method involves an engineering analysis, which is a

combination of technical know-how and judgement.

3. The third method involves an operation analysis which is not necessarily

technical in nature and which relies mainly on judgement and on an

understanding of the kinds of operations in which a firm is engaged.

The following factors be considered while estimating financial requirements.

1.

Cost : The cost of finance is an obvious consideration. It should be the

minimum.
2.

Repayment Date: Due regard should be given to the period time for

which finance is required. A scheme should be drawn up which fixes the

repayment date of the debt.

3.

Liquidity : Liquidity is an important consideration, as liquidity may lead

to insolvency
4.

Interest Payment: Heavy interest charges are embarrassing and should be

kept at the desired level.

5.

Claim on Assets : Borrowings may result in a charge on the assets and

thus restrict their use. This may seriously impair the maneuverability of the

enterprise.

6.

Control : Control is an important consideration for interference is likely

to be increased if many people are allowed to control the company.

7.

Risk: It is better not to launch risky projects, particularly if equity finance

is not available to the desired extent.

8.

Availability: Financial planning can be affected only when finance is

available.

9.

Seasonality: Financial requirements, influenced by seasonality or growth,

cannot be easily anticipated. There are, moreover, unpredictable events strikes,

product failure, changes in the supply price, changes in technology or consumer

tastes- which significantly affect financial requirements.

10.

Requirements : The financial manager should estimate the financial

requirements of his firm before he decides whether adequate finance is available.

For this purpose, he should consider marketing, production and accounting

estimates of reserve and costs, as these are the starting point for financial

planning for purposes of promotion.

11.

Cost Initial Promotional Outlays: These include the cost of the

development of a product or a process, the cost of market surveys, legal and

incorporation expenditure, outlays on preliminary contract, if any, and

compensation for promotion.

12.

Fixed Asset Needs: Fixed Assets need should be based on estimates

supplied by the production and engineering departments.
13.

Current Assets: Current asset needs should be assessed on the basis of

estimated sales and production schedules or projections. Cost budgets and

inventory estimates should be prepared and customer trade terms should be

fixed.

14.

Distribution Outlays: Distribution outlays should be estimated on the

basis of the distribution system to be adopted by an enterprise. For this purpose,

the advertising commission of the intermediaries, etc., should be taken in to

account.

15.

Gestation Period: Funds are needed to absorb initial operating losses

during the gestation period of an enterprise. It may be some time before it

reaches the break-even or pay its own way.

16.

Margin of Safety: Contingent funds should be provided for a margin of

safety to take care of inaccurate projections or unforeseen events.

17.

Need for Additional Funds: Financial forecasting involves the relation of

sales to assets and liabilities. The financial manager should be able to anticipate

the need for additional funds on the basis of projected income statements,

projected balance sheet, cash budgets, statements of sources and uses of funds

and such other tools of financial forecasting.

Summary

Plans are decisions and decisions require facts. Facts about the future are non ?

existent. Consequently assumption concerning the future must be substituted.

Working capital is all the more important for a small concern. The policy of the

lending banker has always been to supplement the borrowers needs and not to

meet the entire needs.

Review Questions.

1. State the importance of financial Planning?

2. What are the four steps in financial planning?
3. List out the characteristics of financial planning?

Key words

Maneuverability
Solvency
Flexibility
Financial contingency.

LESSON IV

FINANCIAL PLANNING

LESSON OUTLINE

Importance of Financial Planning

Steps in Financial Planning

Characteristics of Financial Planning

Estimating Financial Requirement

LEARNING OBJECTIVE

After reading this chapter you should be able to :



Understand the need for financial planning



Arrange the steps needed for planning



Narrate the essentials of a sound planning policy

LESSON V

CORPORATE PLANNING

LESSON OUTLINE

Financial Structure
Thesis of Capitalization
Over Capitalization
Over Trading
Under Trading
LEARNING OBJECTIVE
After reading this chapter you should be able to :



Define Capital Structure



Understand the theories of Capitalization
Distinguish between Over-Capitalization and Under Capitalization
Conceptualize the cause and effect of over capitalization and under
capitalization.

CAPITALISATION

The capital structure or the capitalization of an undertaking refers to the way in

which is long-term obligations are distributed between different classes of owners

and creditors. The capitalization of an enterprise depends on its expected average

net income. From the view point of investors, the yield on the securities which

have been issued should be comparable to the yields of other securities which are

subject to the same kinds of risk. The rate at which prospective earnings are

capitalized will vary, for it is a subjective measure of risk and would, therefore, be

different for firms in different fields of business activity. If the income is expected

to be regular, the rate would be lower than that for a highly speculative venture. It

would be higher for a new venture than for one which is well established. It

would be different for the same firm under different conditions of trade. It would

be low then business conditions are brisk, and high when they are slack, for then a

greater risk is involved in capitalization.

The need for capitalization arises in all the phases business cycle. Estimation of

total funds of capital arises in the initial stages to start the business unit. The

requirement, Land & Building etc. Funds are also needed to meet the working

capital through which raw materials, cash, components and stocks are provided.

At the time of growth stage, finance in needed for expansion, introducing

technology, modernization programmes. Hence arrangement of capital in made

through proper planning.

Thought the firm enjoys highest reputation, goodwill and credit worthiness at the

saturation stage, it has to diversify its products to stay on in the market. Product
diversification , improvement in the existing products requires huge sums of

money. this can be arranged through reorganizing the capital structure.

Now, the existing period in identified Era of mergers, acquisitions and Joint

venture. The economy has influenced mergers of big giants in the country. Ex:

Hindustan Levers with Brooke Bond India Ltd. and many others. the success of

Mergers of the companies in European Countries encouraged the Indian

Corporate to have same type of business policies. This increases the potentiality

of business establishment to economies their scale of operation. Even at this

stage, the concept of Capitalization in extensively used. This provides an

acceptable formula for exchange their business terms and restructure the capital

for its effective and efficient usage.

Theories of Capitalization

Identifying the requirement of capitalization, it is referred as determination of the

value through which a company has to be capitalized. This helps the management

in deciding number of securities that are to be offered, the appropriate mix that

has To be designed between the debt and Equity. The final decision on this matter

will be made by considering two popular Capitalisation Theories: They are

1. Cost Theory: Under this theory, the total value of the Capitalisation in

calculated by taking the total cost of acquiring fixed assets and the current assets.

In a real life situation, the amount of capitalization for a new business is arrived

at, by adding up the cost of fixed assets, the amount of working capital and the

cost of establishing the business (Plant & machinery, land and building, cost &

raw materials, Preliminary expenses, floatation cost of shares & debentures etc

........)

Cost theory helps promoters to find the total amount of capital needed for

establishing the business. According to Husband and Dockeray, cost principle

may appear to give an assurance that capitalization would, at the best be

representative of the value of the enterprise.
However, the cost theory has not been considered efficient base on the following

grounds:

i)

It takes into consideration only the cost of assets and not the early
capacity of investments.

ii)

Earnings of the company fluctuates when the asset becomes absolete
or idle. This will not be detected, if capitalization is made on the basis
of cost.

iii)

It is not suitable for such companies where its earnings are varying.

Earnings Theory:

Earnings theory stresses more on the earnings capacity of a business unit. The

worth of the company is not measured by capitalization but by its earning

capacity. Profit in the base capitalization. According to this theory, the value of

the company (capitalization) is equal to the value of its earnings, Earnings are

capitalised at a representative rate of return. In case of a new company, it will

have to estimate the average annual future earnings and the normal earnings rate

prevalent in the same industry. The approach of Earnings theory is the best

method of capitalization for the existing companies. It may not be suitable for

new companies, as the estimation of earnings is fairly a risky and difficult task.

For Example: If a new company estimates that its annual average earnings will

amount to a sum of the Rs. 1,00,000, white the companies in the Same industry

are earnings a return of 20% on their capital employed, the amount of

capitalization for the company would be.

Advantages: This method correlates the value of a company directly with its

earning capacity. Earnings theory acts a check on the costs of establishing new

companies .

Disadvantages: The process of estimating earnings for a new company is very

difficult. A mistake committed at the time of estimation the earnings will be

directly influencing the amount of capitalization.
OVER-CAPITALISATION
Meaning: A business is said to be over-capitalised when:

Capitalisation exceeds the real economic value of its assets:

A fair return is not realized on capitalization; and

Business has more net assets than it needs.

Example of overcapitalized situation

Balance Sheet

Liabilities

Amount (Rs.)

Assets

Amount (Rs)

Equity capital

10

Fixed Assets

22

Debentures

15

Currents Liabilities

13

Current Liabilities

10



35



35

In the above example, the component of equity capital is more in relation debt;

equity ratio. The long term funds are not optimally deployed on fixed assets. A

porting of long term fends is allocated to current assets. The current liabilities are

not sufficient to meet the requirement of current assets. Hence, it is inferred that,

the available funds are not judiciously utilized.

Over- capitalization may be considered to be in the nature of redundant capital. It

is generally found in companies which have depleted assets such as oil and

mining concerns. This condition is commonly known as water stock. a

company is said to be over-capitalised when the aggregate of the par value of its

shares and debentures exceeds the true value of its fixed assets, in other words,

over-capitalization takes place when the stock is watered or diluted. It is wrong

to identify over-capitalization with excess of capital, for there is every possibility

that an over-capitalized concern may be confronted with problems of illiquidity.

The correct indicator of over -capitalization is the earnings of the company. Over-

capitalization does not imply a surplus of funds any more than under-

capitalization indicates a shortage of funds. It is quite possible that the company
may have more funds and yet have low earnings. Often, funds may be inadequate,

and capitalization. The average distributable income of a company may be

insufficient to pay the contract rate of return on fixed income securities elsewhere.

Over-capitalization may take place when:



Prospective income is over-estimated at the start;

Unpredictable circumstances reduce down the income;

The total funds requires have been over-estimated;

Excess funds are not efficiently employed;

The low yield makes it difficult for a firm to raise new capital, particularly

equity capital;

The market value of the securities falls below the issue price;

Arbitrary occasions are taken on the charges against income arising form

depreciation, obsolescence, repairs and maintenance;

The low yield may discourage competition and this limited competition

becomes a social disadvantage.

Over-capitalization may go unnoticed during the period a business

flourishers and may be encouraged by prosperity. However , it may be productive

of ill-consequences when the distributable income diminishes under the pressure

of declining demand and falling prices.

Causes



The causes of Over-capitalization are:

1. Different between Book Value and Real Worth of Assets: It is possible

that a company may have purchased its assets at a value which is higher

than their real worth. This gap between the book value and the real worth

of assets may account for over-capitalization .
2. Promotional Expenses: There is a possibility that promoters may have

charged exorbitant promotional expenses for their services in creating the

corporation. This excessive charge may be a cause of over-capitalization.

3. Inflation: Due to inflationary conditions a corporation might have

acquired assets at high prices. Inflationary conditions precipitate over-

capitalization which affects new as well as established corporations.

4. Shortage of Capital: when faced with a shortage of funds, a company

may borrow at unremunerative rates of interests which is bound to result

in excessive or unjustified fixed charges.

5. Depreciation Policy: Inadequate provision for depreciation,

obsolescence or maintenance of assets may lead to over-capitalization, and

this is bound to adversely affect the profit-earning capacity of a

corporation.

6. Taxation Policy: High corporate tax may discourage corporation from

implementing programmes of replenishment, renewals and renovations, as

a result of which their profitability may suffer.

7. Dividend Policy: Some corporations adopt a lenient dvidend policy in

order to gain popularity with their stockholders. However, such cash-down

payments in the form of dividends weakens their liquidity position. Their

valuable resources are likely to be frittered away and, as a result, they

may find themselves in a state of over-capitalization.

8. Market Sentiment: Company may be tempted to raise security floatations

in the market in order to create a favourable market sentiment on the stock

exchange . While doing so, it may be saddled with the issue of

unwarranted securities which are of no practical value to it. As a result, it

becomes over-capitalised and the burden of its liabilities is unnecessarily

inflated.
9. Under-estimation of Capital Rate: If the actual rate at which a

company`s earnings are capitalised, the capitalization rate is under-

estimated, and this results into over-capitalization.

Advantages

1. The management is assured of adequate capital for present operations.

2. If conserved, an Excess of capital may preclude the necessity of financing

some time in the future when capital is needed and can be obtained only

with difficulty.

3. Ample capital has a beneficial effect on an organisation`s morale.

4. ample capitalization gives added flexibility and latitude to the

corporation`s operation.

5. Allegedly, losses can be more easily observed without endangering the

future of the corporations.

6. The rate of profits tends to discourages possible competitors.

7. For public utility companies, when the price of service is based upon a

fair return to capital, a high captitalisation may be advantageous.

Disadvantages

1. When Stock is issued in excess of the value of the assets received, a

company`s stock is said to be watered. Watered stock may arise by the

issued of stock in any of the following ways.

a) For over-valued property or services;

b) As a bonus;

c) For cash at less than the par or stated value of the stock;

d) As a stock dividend when the surplus of the corporation is not

offset by actual assets of at least an equal amount. If known to be

watered, stock has a market value which is lower than it would
enjoy if it were not wantered ? until the water has been

squeezed out (until sufficient assets have been acquired from

earnings to offset the excess of stock.

2. There is the possibility of stockholders` liability to creditors in case a

court should conclude that the stock was heavily watered, that the

corporation did not receive reasonable or proper value for the stock.

This liability would attach only to such stock as was received as a result of

an unreasonably excessive valuation of properties or services given in

exchange for such stock.

3. There may be a possible difficulty of raising new capital funds. This may

be obviated. However, by the use of no-par stock.

4. In some States, the rate of the annual franchise tax depends on the amount

of outstanding stock. Large capitalization`s in such states may attract

correspondingly large franchise taxes.

5. There is a tendency to raise the prices of a company`s products and/or to

lower their quality. This may be partly or wholly forestalled, however, by

competition and would apply more to public utility services than to others,

for public utility rates are based, in part, upon a reasonable return on

capital.

6. Over-capitalization may include a failure, and the failure of a corporation

may bring about an unhealthy economic situation.

7. The ethical atmosphere of a business is not improved by over-

capitalization.

8. The almost necessary rigging of the market for the securities which first

offered to the public usually results in market value losses to the investors

after this support is removed. (This is not to condemn the legitimate

support of the market in the above-board floatation of a security issue).
9. There may be an inability to pay interest on bonds (when bonds constitute

a large portion of the capitalization of an over-capitalised company).

10. Injury to creditworthiness.

11. Decline in the value of securities.

12. Possible loss of orders because of inability to expand.

13. Temptation for the management to juggle with depreciation, obsolescence,

maintenance, and reserve accounts in order to appear to be making a profit

and possible in order to pay a dividend.

14. Possible injury to goodwill in case a necessary reorganization.

15. The holders of securities may be dissatisfied.

16. The business may give way to its competitors through its inability to

obtain funds for expansion.

Effects

Over-capitalization has some effect on the corporation, its owners, consumers

and the society at large.

1. On Corporation: The market value of the corporation`s stock falls and it

may find it difficult to raise new capital. Quite often, artificial devices

such as the reduction in depreciation, curtailment in maintenance, etc., are

made use of to cover over-capitalization. But this only aggravates the evil

of over-capitalization. The credit of the company is adversely affected.

The company may appear to be in a robust, healthy condition, even though

it may have lost its vigor and vitality and may collapse at any time

because of the uneconomic financial condition from which it suffers.

2. On Owners: Owners who have a real stake in the corporation are the

biggest losers. Because of a fall in the market value of its shares,

shareholders are not is a position to dispose of their holdings profitably.
Moreover, because of a fall in dividends, shareholders lose heavily. They

develop the feeling that the corporation is funded on shifting sands.

3. On Consumers: A corporation cannot resist the temptation of increasing

the prices of its products to inflate its profits. At the same time, there is

every possibility that the quality of the product would go down. The

Consumer may thus suffer doubly.

4. On Society: over-capitalized concerns often come to gr5ief in the course

of time. They lose the backing of owners, customers and society at large.

They suffer multi-pronged attacks from various sections of society. They

are not in a position to face competition. No wonder, therefore, that they

gradually draw closer to a situation ordering liquidation. While the

existence of such corporation cannot be justified, their extinction would

cause irreparable damage to society.

Remedies



Over-capitalization is not easily rectified, chiefly because the factors

which lead to it in the first place do not entirely disappear.



In many cases, over-capitalization and excessive debts co-exist and an

attack on one often involves the other. Indeed, a correction of the former usually

involves the latter. With this co-relationship in mind, it may be said that

correction of over-capitalization may involve one or more of the following

procedures:

1. Reduction in Funded Debt: This is generally impossible unless the

company goes through re-organization. Funds have to be raised for the

redemption of bonds; and the Sale of large quantities of stock, presumably

at low prices, would probably do more damage than good. Moreover, the

creation of as much stock as the bonds retired would not reduce the total

captilisation. A true reduction in capitalization can be effected only if the

debts are retired from earnings.
2. Reduction in Interest Rate on Bonds: Here again, without a through re-

organisation, it would probably not be practicable to effect a reduction in

the interest rate on bonds. A refunding operation, however, might be

performed; but the saving in interest payments on the lower-rate refunding

bonds would hardly offset the premium the company would be forced to

allow the bond-holders in order to induce them to accept the refunding

bonds; and, moreover, this procedure would not really reduce

capitalization. However, it would alleviate the situation.

3. Redemption of Preferred Stock, if it carries a High Dividend Rate:

Funds for redemption would probably have to come from the sale of

common stock sufficient to increase somewhat the earnings from the

Common stock, even if this common stock is increased substantially. If,

however, the preferred stock is cumulative, and if dividends on such stock

are in arrears, this avenue of escape would appear to be a dead-end

street

4. Reduction in par value of Stock: This is a good method but is sometimes

impossible because of the stockholders` tenacious belief in the importance

of par value. If the stockholders are convinced of the desirability of the

move, it might be somewhat effective, though not nearly as much as the

reduction in high fixed.

5. Reduction in Number of Shares of common Stock: This likewise is a

good method but, again, is difficult of implementation because of the

average stockholders` unwillingness to turn in several shares in order to

receive one, thought it does happen occasionally. Since this procedure

does not Decrease the stockholder`s proportionate interest in the equity, it

is sometimes used.
In some cases, several of these methods may be used, but unless a company goes

through re-organisation (a rather complicated an legally involved affair), the

consent of the Security-holders should be obtained.

UNDER-CAPITALISATION



Under ? captialisation is the reverse of over-captitalisation. It should not

be confused with a condition implying a lack of funds. It merely refers to the

amount of outstanding stock. It does not pose an Economical problem in adjusting

the capital structure. The condition is not as serious as that of over-captitalisation

and its remedies Are much easily applied.

Under-capitalisation comes about as a result of:

Under-estimation of future earnings at the time of promotion; and / or

An unforeseeable increase in earnings resulting From later developments;

Under-capitalisation exists when A company earns sufficient income to

meet its fixed interest and fixed dividend charges, and is able to pay A

considerably better rate on its equity shares than the prevelling on similar

shares in similar businesses.

Example of under capitalised situation

Balance Sheet

Liabilities

Amount (Rs.)

Assets

Amount (Rs)

Equity capital

10

Fixed Assets

40

Debentures

25

Currents Liabilities

10

Current Liabilities

15



50



50





In the above example, the component of equity is substantially lesser than

in relation to debt: equity ratio. The size of debt is more. Total long term funds

are enough to meet the capital Expenditure requirement. The management has
used short term funds for long Term purposes and assuming huge amount of risk,

as a result, profitability of the firm would be more. Hence it is inferred that, the

available funds are put to use more aggressive to earn substantial profit.

At this stage, the real worth of the assets exceeds their book value, and the rate of

earnings is higher than corporation is ordinarily able to afford. Bonneville and

Dewey observe that when a corporation is earning an extraordinarily large return

on its outstanding stock, it is said to be under capitalised. Husband and Dockeray

express the view that, in a quantitative sense, on the most productive basis;

qualitative under-capitalisation exists when in sufficient provision is made for

funds to operate on the most productive basis; qualitative under-capitalisation

exists when insufficient provision is made for funds to operate on the most

productive basis; qualitative under-capitalisation, however, is found whenever

values are deliberately carried on the books of accounts in an amount that is less

than the value of the assets.

Causes

The causes of under-capitalisation are:

1. under-estimation of Earnings: It is possible that earnings may be under-

estimated, as a result of which the actual earnings may be much higher

than those expected.

2. Efficiency: A Corporation may have optimally utilized its assets and

enhanced its efficiency by exploiting Every possibility of modrnisation

and by taking the maximum advantage of market opportunities.

3. Under-estimation of Funds: It may take place when the total Funds

required have been under-estimated.

4. Retained Earnings: Because of its conservative dividend policy a

corporation may retain the earnings which might have accumulated into a

mass of savings. This is bound to improve its financial health.
5. Windfall Gains: Companies which can afford to continue to operate

during the period of depreciation may find their earnings are unusually

high when they enter the boom period. This shift from an adverse business

cycle to a prosperous one may under-capitalise the corporation.

6. Indulgence in Rivalries: Under indulgence in rivalries flowing from

unusually high earnings may tempt an organization to embark upon

speculative activities in the hope that it can easily survive its ill effects; for

if speculative activities turn out to be unfavourable, its earlier earnings are

likely to be washed away.

7. Taxation: Because of excessive earnings, corporation are exposed to a

heavy burden of taxation.

Effects



The effects of under-capitalisation are:

1. Labour Unrest: Employees are often organized and become conscious of

the fact that the corporation is making enormous profits. they feel that they

have a legitimate right to share in these profits. In other words, they

develop the feeling that the y are not adequately paid and that the

corporation is reluctant to pay what is their legitimate due. This generates

a feeling of hostility on the part of he employees, and leads to labour

unrest.

2. Consumer Dissatisfaction: Consumers feel that the unusual earnings of

the corporation could have been utilized by effecting a price reduction or

by improving the quality of he product.

3. Government Interference: The Government generally keeps a watchful

eye on under-capitalised concerns which earn abnormal profits. It may, at

the instance of dissatisfied consumers, employees and investors,
intervence in the affairs of such corporations and may even nationalize

them.

4. Need for short term funds: A corporation may have to resort frequently

to short-term credit and may even seek additional long-term funds without

much notices.

5. Slow down of expansion programmes: Adaptability to charged

circumstances may be impaired and expansion programmes may slow

down.

6. Temptation to raise Fresh equity: Enormous earnings on equity Shares

may result in an increase in market price, and the company will be

tempted To raise new Capital.

7. Competition: The prospect of enormous earnings may generate

competition which may adversely affect the profitability of a corporation.

8. Share Prices: Higher prices of shares may restrict the market and shares

may be traded at prices below those justified by the usually high earnings.

Disadvantages

1. The Stock would enjoy a high market value, but would limit its

marketability and may cause wide (though not necessarily relatively wide)

fluctuations in market prices In many cases, this may not be considered a

disadvantages.

2. Owing to its limited marketability, the stock may not enjoy as high a

market price As its earnings justify.

3. A high rate of earnings per share may encourage potential competitions to

enter the market.

4. In view of the high rate of earnings, employees may become dissatisfied.

Dissatisfaction would probably reduce their efficiency and have other

undesirable effects.
5. In view of the high rate of earnings, customers may Feel they have been

overcharged. Except possibly in public utility undertakings, this is not an

entirely justifiable point, for competitors might easily enter the field And

force reductions in price.

6. If a company is an extremely large one and virtually controls the industry,

its enormous earnings per share may encourage competitors or the

Government to bring suit against it under the Anti-trust laws.

7. Depending on the nature of excess profit taxes, if any, the company may

lose by under-captiralisation.

Remedies



Under-capitalisation is easily remedied. It may be done by one or more of

the following methods.

1. Stock Split ? up : The corporation may offer the stockholders several

shares of new stock for Every share of the old. If there is a par value, the

pare must be reduced to correspond with the increase in the number of

shares, for by this method the capital stock account is not affected. With

this increase in shares and reduction in par value per share the rate of

earnings will not be changed, but the earnings per share will be very

substantially decreased. The effect is much more apparent than real, for

the capitalization is not increased, though the earnings per share are

reduced.

2. Increase in par Value of Stock: If the surplus is large or Can be made

larger (by revaluing assets upward, or otherwise), the corporation might

offer the stockholders new stock for the old, the new stock to carry a

higher par value. This would not reduce the earnings per share, but it

would reduce the rate of earnings per share. This method, however, is

seldom used, partly because it would not improve the marketability factor.
If it were desired to go further, the corporation could offer the

stockholders a stock split-up and an increase in parvalue. This would

reduce both the earnings and the rate of earnings per share Value

enormously. This method, however, is very radical and is almost never

used.

3. Stock Dividend; If the surplus is large or can be made larger, the

corporation might declare a dividned payable in stock. This would not

affect par value per share, but would increase the capitalization and the

number of shares. Both the earnings per share and the Rate of earnings

per share would reduced. This is probably the most used method and the

most easily effected.

OVERTRADING



According to Leslie R. Howard, the term overtrading means expansion of

production and sakes without adequate financial support. If a company finds itself

on an Easy market. it may increase its production and sales to meet a ready

demand. Reasonable and even comparatively large profits are made. In order to

take full advantage of the favourable conditions, profits and ploughed back into

the purchase of new plant and machinery, Storage facilities or otherwise, so

depleting liquid resources. Creditors are made to await settlement as further raw

materials are purchased or fininshed goods are procured for direct re-sale.

Meanwhile production costs increase, particularly wages, and these make further

demands on cash resources while settlement is awaited for debtors. The time lag

between the purchase of raw materials, the period required for work in progress,

the ultimate sale of the finished product and the final settlement by debtors, are

often under-estimated and a company consequently can find itself in a difficult

position with Regard to liquid resources. Sometimes further capital may be raised,

but where such action is resorted to, in a period of overtrading, funds may not

easily be forthcoming due to the unhealthy appearance of the balance sheet.
Furthermore, it is not so easy for small companies to raise additional capital,

Likewise where overtrading has taken place, in all probability, the bank may

already have arranged foroverdraft facilities and may be unwilling to oblige

without adequate security. In any case it is not the custom of the bands to grant

financial assistance to companies For any protracted length of time. They

consider that more permanent means of financing should be resorted to.

Overtrading is not a firm is forced, though lack of adequate liquid resources, to

extend the period of credit taken from its suppliers beyond the terms agreed,

which can be explicitly defined or implied for allowed payment patterns.

Although a narrow definition, it does serve to highlight the combination of

circumstances that can lead to overtrading. The most common feature of a firm

overtrading is too narrow a capital base from which a rapid expansion of sales

takes place. While the firm remains at normal growth rates, the owners can

exercise tight control over the collection of trade debts, any increase in liquidity

being met by retained profits. If, however changes in demand occur and the firm`s

product becomes sought after, the owners will often try to meet the increased

market without arranging additional capital resources, either of a short-or long-

term nature. In the words of Thomas Budd, Overtrading results from an attempt to

do a greater amount of business than The capital investment warrants.

Overtrading takes place when a corporation business than The capital investment

warrants. Overtrading takes place when a corporation expands beyond its

legitimate scale of operations and does not have sufficient cash resources to meet

the level of activity. The corporation may plunge into the disaster of trading into

expansion programmes in an untimely fashion. Like too much of air in the

balloon it is likely to be overblown,. The size is unduly increased, the margin of

safety is excessively inflated, a sense of strain is created and the corporation is

likely to collapse suddenly like an overblown balloon whose capacity to blow

further is exhausted.
Causes

1. Inflation: Inflation raises the hope for the corporation to flourish further.

In the anxiety to earn more profits, it may buy assets and properties at

exorbitant prices and trade in heavily. Heavy funds may get locked up into

the business and the corporation may get sandwiched for paucity of funds.

Further, in order to keep the on-going operations, heavy renewals and

replacements are undertaken. The corporation thus finds it very difficult to

come out of the trap unscathed.

2. Excess Inventory: As the level of activity grows, large stocks of

inventories have to be piled up to facilitate a smooth flow of materials or

to help proper production planning and control. Stocks gradually get

swollen and neither the corporation can use stocks profitably in its

production nor can it release them for sale. The work-in-progress also gets

accumulated and large funds are once again tiedup in them.

3. Taxation: A corporation may distribute fabulous dividends to appease the

stockholders and to give way to the profits earned by it. It should be

remembered that high earnings do not necessarily mean greater

availability of cash resources. With the distribution of dividends in cash,

cash resources may get depleted. Coupled with this is the additional

burden of heavy taxes that the corporation is required to pay on account of

unusually high earnings. A corporation thus suffers doubly and its cash

resources come to an end sooner or later.

4. Depletion of Working Capital: The working capital may be depleted as a

result of untimely repayment of long-term loans, excessive dividend

payments, purchase of fixed assets or even as a result net trading losses.

The depletion of working capital is the cause that leads to overtrading of

activity. The corporation does not realize that its legs are not long enough

to reach the ground.
Effects

1. Creditors increase more rapidly than debtors as the corporation may find it

difficult to pay creditors on due dates and reduce the amount of

outstanding Creditors.

2. There may be an increase in bank loans and other borrowings due to the

excessive locking up of funds in current assets.

3. Fixed assets may be purchased out of short-term borrowings. The current

ratio may be two and the turnover rations may be very high. Similarly,

there may be a fall in the working capital ratio.

4. There may be a progressive fall in liquid resources and in the overall

ability of the corporation to raise funds.

5. A corporation may find it difficult to pay its wage and salary bills and tax

payments may fall in arrears on account of its poor bargaining capacity in

the market.

6. Due to excessive holding of stocks, the corporation may prefer to sell its

products at throw-away prices. this may result into trading losses.

7. The corporation will lose credit with the creditors and suppliers may

encourage them to draw bills. Often it may not be able to honour 2them

which may result into loss of goodwill.

8. The corporation may go out of the way to collect the payment from the

debtors. It may offer them heavy discounts and sustain loss by prompt

payment . Debtors may feel embarrassed by this overt attitude of the

corporation to pressure up collection of payments from the.

9. A corporation amy defer the projects of assets or replacement of

equipment due to shortage of funds. This may affect efficiency of the

corporation adversely.

Remedies


It is advisable for the corporation to move into the reverse gear. The

corporation should realize that it has stretched its legs too far and should be

willing to trace its steps backward. It should reduce the level of activity an curtail

unnecessary remifications. If there is no scope for the corporation to retrace its

steps backward, it may do well to sell the concern so long as it is in a working

condition, as prevention is better than cure.



The commercial banks may be called on to help by granting of an

overdraft Sometimes, further capital may be raised, but where such action is

resorted to in a period of overtrading, funds may not easily be forthcoming due to

the unhealthy appearance of the balance sheet. Likewise, where overtrading has

taken place, in all probability, the banks may have Earlier arranged for overdraft

facilities an may therefore, be unwilling to oblige without adequate security.

The banker detects signs of overtrading with the following symptoms:

a) Longer credit and/or shorter credit than in customary in that

particular trade.

b) Longer credit and/or shorter credit than is customary for the

borrower.

c) Hand-to-mouth operation of bank account.

d) High inventory turnover ratio.

e) Low current ratio.

f) High short-term profits inciting business to grow fast.

g) Profits-and not real profits.

h) Frequent cash shortages.

i) Heavy bad debts.

j) Mounting pressures from creditors.

UNTERTRDING
Undertrading is the reverse of overtrading. It means inappropriate utilization of

resources. It takes place when Funds of the corporation remain idle and are not

being productively. In the words to Thomas Budd, When an enterprise is

undertrading, its stakes are rarely large. Undertrading is not as Serious as

overtrading. Undertrading means trading at a level which is far below the level

ratio and high current ratio. If an organization underrtrades, its installed capacity

remains under-utilised. The fixed overheads will be largely unrecovered and so

the unit cost of fixed expenses will be high inventory Carrying cost. A general

climate of lethargy an inertia clouds the organization, which is most dangerous to

its survival and future growth.

SUMMARY

Plans are decisions and decisions require facts,. Facts about the future are non-

existent; consequently, assumptions concerning the future must be substituted.

Since future conditions cannot be forecast accurately, the adaptability of plans is

seriously, limited. This is particularly true of plans which cover several years in

advance since reliability of forecasting decreases with time. On the other hand

plans which cover a relatively short period are highly reliable since both internal

and external factors like wage rates, prices, interest rates, and general business to

offset the limitations imposed by managements inability to forecast future

conditions is to improve their forecasting techniques. Another way to overcome

this limitation is to revise plans periodically, say, every six months. The

development of variable plans which take changing conditions into consideration

will go a long way in eliminating this limitation. Variable budgets are examples

of management to chagnge a plan once it has been made. There are several

reasons for this. First, plans relating to capital expenditures often involve colossal

expenditure, and commitments for funds are made months in advance and cannot

readily be changed. Second, in addition to advance arrangements regarding

capital, management often makes commitments for raw material and equipment
prior to the time when the plan is to be initiated. These commitments, if broken,

may result in serious problems. Third, management personnel are psychologically

is lack of co-ordination or indecision among personnel. Financial planning affects

each function in the organization, and to be effective, each function should be co-

ordinated in order to ensure consistency in action

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. plans must feed the financial capabilities of the corporation Comment.

2. How is financial planning considered to be the most important aspect of

the financial manager`s job?

3. State the important characteristics of financial planning.

4. How are financial requirements estimated?

5. What do you mean by capitalization? State briefly the theories

determining the amount of capitalization.

6. What do you mean by the terms over-capitalisation andunder-

capitalisation? How do they take place?

7. State the advantages and disadvantages of Over-capitalisation and under

capitalization.

8. Explain the effects of over-capitalisation and under capitalization.

9. What are the remedical measures against.

(a) Over-capitalisation and

(b) Under- capitalization?

10. What do you mean by overtrading? How does it take place? State the

effects of Overtrading.

11. Undertrading is the reverse of overtrading. Comment

OBJECTIVE TYPE
12. Write proper word/words in the blank. If there are statements, state

whether the same are true or false?

i. Financial planning should achieve the total ...............of all the plans or

other functions of the firm

ii. Financial plan of a corporation should be formulated in the light of not only

present development but also......................

iii. The objectivity of a financial plan means that it should be free

from............. and ........................

iv. The financial plan should be such as can be modified or changed,

whenever necessary. This is the characteristics of .....................

v. A firm`s ability to choose its sources of finance at its own discretion is

often termed ........................of financial plan.

vi. It is very difficult for one to have an accurate or even the useful definition

of capital and capitalization.

vii. The two theories generally made use of in determining amount of

capitalization are .............. and .....................

viii. When a fair return is not realized on capitalization, under capitalization is

said to take place.



ix. Under trading is reverse of over trading.

Ans: (i) Integration and Coordination (ii) Future development (iii) Partially

prejudice bias (iv) Flexibility (v) Maneuverability (vi) True (vii) Historical

Theory (viii) False (ix) True

13. Indicate if each of the following is true or false and modify the same

a. Financial planning should attempt to minimize risk

b. The primary aim of planning is to obtain better forecasts of future cash flows

and earnings.
c. Financial planning is necessary because financing and investment decisions

interact and should not be made independently.

d. Firms planning horizons rarely exceed 3 years

e. Individual capital investment projects are not considered in a financial plan

unless they are very large.

f. Financial planning requires accurate and consistence forecasting

g. Financial planning models should include as much as detail as possible.

Ans: (a) False (It is a process of deciding which risks to take)

(b) False (Financial planning is concerned with possible surprises as well as

expected outcomes)

? True (Financial planning considers both investment and financial decisions)

(d) False (a typical horizon for long-term planning is 5 years)

(e) True ( investments are usually broken down by category)

(f) True( Perfect accuracy is unlikely to be obtainable, but the firm needs to

produce the best possible consistence forecast)

(g) False (excessive detailed distracts attention from the crucial decision)


Unit - II

Investments Decisions under Risk and Uncertainty

Objectives

The objectives of this unit are to:

Discuss the concept of risk in investment decisions.

Understand some commonly used techniques of risk analysis.

Discuss Total Risk for Multiple Investments

Structure

1.Investment decisions under Risk and Uncertainty

2. Sources of Risk

3.What measure of risk is relevant in capital budgeting?

4.Methods of incorporating Risk in Capital Budgeting

4.1. Certainty Equivalent Approach

4.2. Risk-Adjusted Discount Rates

4.2.1 Formal method.

4.2.2. Informal method.

4.3. Statistical Distribution Approach

4.3.1 Independent net cash flows

4.3.2 Perfectly correlated cash flows

4.3.3 Mixed case

4.4 Simulation Approach

4.5. Sensitivity Analysis

4.6. Scenario Analysis

4.7 Decision-Tree Approach

5. Total Risk for Multiple Investments
6. Summary

7. Key Words

8. Self-Assessment Questions/Exercises



1. INVESTMENTS DECISIONS UNDER

RISK AND UNCERTAINTY

Risk is inherent in almost every business decision. More so, in Capital Budgeting

decisions as they involve costs and benefits extending over a long period of time

during which many things can change in unanticipated ways. For the sake of

expository convenience, we assumed so far that all investments being considered

for inclusion in the capital budget had the same risk as those of the existing

investments of the firm. Hence the average cost of capital was used for evaluating

every project. Investment proposals, however, differ in risk. A research and

development project may be more risky than an expansion project and the latter

tends to be more risky than a replacement project. In view of such differences,

variations in risk need to be evaluated explicitly in capital investment appraisal.

Risk analysis is one of the most complex and slippery aspects of capital

budgeting. Many different techniques have been suggested and no single

technique can be deemed as best in all situations.

2. SOURCES OF RISK

The first step in risk analysis is to uncover the major factors that contribute to the

risk of the investment. Four main factors that contribute to the variability of

results of a particular investment are cost of project, reinvestment of cash flows,

variability of cash flows and the life of the project.





(a) Size of the Investment
A large project involving greater investments entails more risk than the small

project because in case of failure of the large project the company will have to

suffer considerably greater loss and it may be forced to liquidation. Furthermore,

cost of a project in many cases is known in advance. There is always the chance

that the actual cost will vary from the original estimate. One can never foresee

exactly what the construction, debugging, design and developmental costs will be.

Rather than being satisfied with a single estimate it seems more realistic to

specify a range of costs and the probability of occurrence of each value within the

range. The less confidence the decision-maker has in his estimates, the wider will

be the range.

(b) Re-investment of Cash Flows

Whether a company should accept a project that offers a 20 per cent return for 2

years or one that offers 16 per cent return for 3 years would depend upon the rate

of return available for reinvesting the proceeds from the 20 per cent 2-year period.

The danger that the company will not be able to return funds as they become

available is a continuing risk in managing fixed assets and cash flows.

(c ) Variability of Cash Flows

It may not be an easy job to forecast the likely returns from a project. Instead of

basing investment decision on a single estimate of cash flow it would be desirable

to have range of estimates.

(d) Life of the Project

Life of a project can never be determined precisely. The production manager

should base the investment decision on the range of life of the project.

3.WHAT MEASURE OF RISK IS RELEVANT IN CAPITAL BUDGETING



Chart 1.




Prospective:









Measures of Risk

Project Standing Alone: Ignores
Diversification within the firm and
within the shareholder's portfolio.
















Project



Standing
Alone Risk













Risk Diversified away





firm as this project is

Project's



combined with firm's

Contribution

other projects and



-

assets

To-Risk



















Risk Diversified



away by

Before we began our discussion of how to adjust for risk, it is important to

Systematic Risk

shareholders as

determine just what type of risk we are to adjust for. In

secu capital budge

rities are ting, a

combined to form
diversified
portfolio
project`s risk can be looked at three levels. First, there is the project standing

alone risk, which is a project`s risk ignoring the fact that much of this risk will

diversified away as the project is combined with the firm`s other projects and

assets.

Second, we have the Project's contribution-to-firm risk, which is the amount of

risk that the project contributes the firm as a whole: this measure considers the

fact that some of the project`s risk will be diversified away as the project is

combined with the firm`s other projects and assets, but ignores the effects of

diversification of the firm`s shareholders. Finally, there is systematic, which is

the risk of project from the viewpoint of a well-diversified shareholder, this

measure considers the fact that some of a project`s risk will be diversified away as

the project is combined with the firm`s other projects, and, in addition, some of

the remaining risk will be diversified away by shareholders as they combine this

stock with other stocks in their portfolios. This is shown graphically in figure 1.

Should we be interested in the project standing alone risk? The answer is no.

Perhaps the easiest way to understand why not is to look at an example. Let`s take

the case of research and development projects at Johnson&Jonson. Each year,

Johnson&Jonson takes on hundreds of new R&D projects, knowing that they only

have about a 10 percent probability of being successful. If they are successful, the

profits can be enormous; if they fail, the investment is lost. If the company has

only one project, and it is an R&D project, the company would have a 90 percent

chance of failure. Thus, if we look at these R&D projects individually and

measure their project standing risk, we would have to judge them to be

enormously risky. However, if we consider the effect of the diversification that

comes about from taking several hundred independent R&D projects a year, all

with a 10 percent chance of success, we can see that each R&D project does not

add much in the way of risk to Jonson & Jonson. In short, because much of a
project`s risk is diversified away within the firm, project standing alone risk is an

inappropriate measure of the level of risk of a capital-budgeting project.

Should we be interested in the project`s contribution-to-firm risk? Once again, the

answer is no, provided investors are well diversified, and there is no chance of

bankruptcy. From our earlier discussion, we saw that, as shareholder, if we

combined our stocks with other stocks to form a diversified portfolio, much of the

risk of our security would be diversified away. Thus, all that affects the

shareholders is the systematic risk of the project and, as such, it is all that is

theoretically relevant for capital budgeting.

4. METHODS OF INCORPORATING RISK INTO CAPITAL

BUDGETING

The application of capital budgeting techniques has been assumed that the

financial manager makes investment decisions under conditions of certainty and

hence they are risk-free. This assumption implies that the NPV of an investment

proposal is considered to be a fixed quantity and not a random variable, capable

of assuming values other than the one specified. It is for this reason that once a

positive value of the NPV of an investment proposal is obtained, it can be

unequivocally stated that it is an acceptable proposal. Reality, however, is far

from this, for the World is one of change and uncertainty. Thus, when we

calculate that an investment would yield a particular rate of return per annum, we

are aware that unforeseen events, like new and better technology, changes in the

raw materials and so on may invalidate our estimates. Thus, some risk would

usually be associated with a project so that variations in the cash may be

observed, and that the degree of risk would vary with the different projects.

There are many ways in which risk can be taken into account while investment

decision-making. Basically, there are two approaches to risk adjustment. First,

there is the certainty equivalent method, which involves adjusting the numerator

of the equation of the present value. In this method, we reduce the value of the
expected cash inflows to adjust for the risk- the riskier the cash flow, the greater

the reduction and, consequently, the lower the present value of the asset.

Alternatively, the risk could be accounted for by adjusting the denominator of the

present value equation- greater the riskiness of the cash flows, higher the discount

rate and, therefore, the lower the present value of the asset.

Besides, there are three interrelated methods of analyzing the investment

proposals involving risk. They are: statistical distribution method (also called as

mean-standard deviation approach), decision-tree method, and simulation

technique. These methods are different from both, the certainty equivalent and

risk-adjusted discount rate methods, because they allow the statistical

distributions of the net present value to be explicitly estimated. Using these

techniques, an interval rather than a point estimate of the expected NPV is

presented and, thus, they are more general and objective. In addition to these

methods, sensitive analysis is yet another method of analyzing risky proposals.

4.1 CERTAINTY EQUIVALENT APPROACH

Under this method, adjusting cash inflows rather than adjusting the discount rate

compensates risk element. The expected uncertain cash flow of each year are

modified by multiplying them with what is known as certainty equivalent

coefficient` (CEO) to remove the element of uncertainty. This coefficient is

determined by management`s preferences with respect to risk. For example,

assume that the expected cash flow from an investment at the end of the first year

is Rs.10,000 and that the management ranked this investment on par with another

alternative investment with a certain cash flow of Rs.7,000, then Rs.7,000 is

certainty equivalent of the risky cash flows of Rs.10,000. the ratio 7,000/10,000 =

0.7 is called the certainty equivalent coefficient for the period, and is represented

by . In general terms:



Certain cash flowt

t = ------------------------


Risky cash flowt

The `s which lies between 0 and 1 are inversely related to the degree of risk

involved. For a given problem, the certainty equivalent coefficients `s are

determined for each of the time periods and then the given risky cash flows are

multiplied by the irrespective coefficient values to obtain an equivalent certain

cash flow stream. Once the risk is eliminated from the cash flows of the project,

the NPV is obtained by using the risk-free rate of discount, to take an appropriate

decision regarding its acceptance. Symbolically,





1C1 2C2





nCn

NPV = C0 + -------- + ---------- + ..............+ ------------, C0 = - C




(1+I) (1+I)2





(1+I)n

Where t stands for period; C1 ,C2. ........ are the future cash flows without risk

adjustment, C is the initial capital outlay and t is the certainty equivalent
coefficient for period t and i is the discount rate.

As earlier said that the value of certainty equivalent coefficient usually ranges

between 0 and 1. A value of 1 implies that the cash flow is certain or the

management is risk-neutral. In industrial situations, however, cash flows are

generally uncertain and managements usually risk-averse. Hence, the certainty

equivalent coefficients are typically less than 1. An illustrative table 1 of certainty

equivalent coefficients for different types of investments is shown here.

The certainty equivalent method is conceptually superior to the risk-adjusted

discount rate method because it does not assume that risk increase with time at a

constant rate. Each year`s certainty equivalent coefficient is based on the level or

risk characterizing its cash flow. Despite its conceptual soundness it is not as

popular as the risk-adjusted rate method. This is perhaps because it is

inconvenient and difficult to specify a series of certainty equivalent coefficients

but seemingly simple to adjust the discount rate. Notwithstanding this practical

difficulty, the merits of the certainty equivalent method must not be ignored.

The certainty equivalent approach can be summarized as follows:
Table No.1



Certainty Equivalent Coefficients



Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

Replace Investments

0.92

0.87

0.84

0.80

Expansion Investments

0.89

0.85

0.80

0.75

New Product Investments

0.85

0.80

0.74

0.68

R&D Investments

0.75

0.70

0.64

0.58

Step 1: Risk is removed from the cash flows by substituting certainty equivalent

cash flow for the risky cash flows. If the equivalent coefficient (t) is given, this
is done by multiplying each risky cash flow by the appropriate t value.

Step 2: The risk-less cash flows are then discounted back to the present at the

risk-less rate of interest.

Step 3: The normal capital budgeting criteria are then applied, except in the case

of the internal rate of return criterion, where the project`s internal rate of return is

compared with the risk-free rate of interest rather than the firm`s required rate of

return.

Example 1:

A firm with a 10 percent required rate of return is considering building new

research facilities with an expected life of 5 years. The initial outlay associated

with this project involves a certain cash outflow of Rs.120,000. The expected cash

inflows and certainty equivalent coefficients, t are as follows:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Year

Expected



Certainty Equivalent





Cash Flow(Rs)

Coefficient t

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1



10,000





0.95

2



20,000





0.90

3



40,000





0.85

4



80,000





0.75

5



80,000





0.65

------------------------------------------------------------------------
The risk-free rate of interest is 6 per cent. What is the project`s net present value?

To determine the net present value of this project using the certainty equivalent

approach, we must first remove the risk from the future cash flows. We do so by

multiplying each expected cash flow by the corresponding certainty equivalent

coefficient, t, as shown below:

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Expected



Certainty Equivalent

t(Expected Cash Flow) =

Cash Flow(Rs)

Coefficient t



Equivalent Risk-less Flow

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10,000





0.95

Rs 9,500

20,000





0.90





18,000

40,000





0.85





34,000

80,000





0.75





60,000

80,000





0.65





52,000

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The equivalent risk-less cash flows are then discounted back to the present at the

risk-less interest rate, not the firm`s required rate of return. The required rate of

return would be used if this project had the same level of risk as a typical project

for this firm. However, these equivalent cash flows have no risk at all; hence the

appropriate discount rate is the risk-less rate of interest. The equivalent risk-less

cash flows can be discounted back to the present at the risk-less rate of interest, 6

percent, as follows:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Year

Expected



Certainty Equivalent Present Value





Cash Flow(Rs)

at 6 percent

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1



Rs.9,500





0.943

Rs.8,958.50

2



18,000





0.890



16,020.00

3



34,000





0.840



28,560.00

4



60,000





0.792



47,520.00

5



52,000





0.747



38,844.00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NPV = -Rs.120,000 + Rs.8,9568.50 + Rs.16,020 + Rs.28,560 + Rs.47,520 +
Rs.38,844 = Rs.19,902.5.


Applying the normal capital-budgeting decision criteria, we find that the

project should be accepted, as its net present value is greater than zero.

Example 2: GVK&GPK Limited is examining two mutually exclusive proposals.

The management of the company uses certainty equivalents (t) approach to
evaluate new investment proposals. From the following information pertaining to

these projects, advice the company as to which project should be taken up by it.



Proposal X

Proposal Y

Year

Cash Flow

t

Cash Flow

t

0

(40,000)

1.00

(30,000)

1.00

1

20,000

0.90

15,000

0.95

2

18,000

0.80

12,000

0.80

3

12,000

0.80

10,000

0.75

4

10,000

0.60

5,000

0.70

The risk-free borrowing rate is 8 per cent.





Solution:
Year

Cash Flow

C.E

Adjusted

PV



t

C

Cash Flow

factor

t

t

Total PV







t Ct

@8%



(1)

2)

(3)

(2) X (3) =(4)



(4) X (5) = (6)

(5)

0

(40,000)

1.00

(40,000)

1.000

(40,000)

1

20,000

0.90

18,000

0.9260

16,668.00

2

18,000

0.80

14,400

0.8573

12,345.12

3

12,000

0.80

9,600

0.7938

7,620.48

4

10,000

0.60

6,000

0.7350

4,410.00

Total NPV (Proposal X) =
1,043.60

0

(30,000)

1.00

(30,000)

1.000

(30,000)

1

15,000

0.95

14,250

0.9260

13,195.50

2

12,000

0.80

9,600

0.8573

8,230.08

3

10,000

0.75

7,500

0.7938

5,953.50

4

8,000

0.70

5,600

0.7350

4,116.00

Total NPV (Proposal Y) =
1,495.08
NPV being higher for Proposal Y, this should be preferred and accepted.

Problem 1.

A company is considering two mutually exclusive projects. The company uses a

certainty equivalent approach. The estimated cash flow and certainty equivalents

for each project are as follows:



Project 1

Project 2

Year

Cash Flow

Certainty

Cash Flow

Certainty

Rs.

Equivalents

Rs.

Equivalents

0

-30,000

1.00

-40,000

1.00

1

15,000

0.95

25,000

0.90

2

15,000

0.85

20,000

0.80

3

10,000

0.70

15,000

0.70

4

10,000

0.65

10,000

0.60

Which project should be accepted, if the risk-free discount rate is 15 per cent.
Solution:

Project 1.



0.95 (15,000) 0.85 (15,000) 0.70(10,000) 0.65(10,000)

NPV = 1.0 (-30,000) + ---------------- + ----------------- + ------------- + -------------






(1.05) (1.05)2

(1.05)3 (1.05)4



= Rs.6,658.

Project 2.



0.90 (25,000) 0.80 (20,000) 0.70(15,000) 0.60(10,000)

NPV = 1.0 (-40,000) + ---------------- + ----------------- + ------------- + -------------






(1.05) (1.05)2

(1.05)3 (1.05)4



= Rs.9,942.

Project 2 should be preferred since it has higher NPV.



Problem 2:

GVL Manufacturing and Spinning is considering two mutually exclusive projects.

The company uses a certainty equivalent approach. The estimated cash flow and

certainty equivalents for each project as follows:



Project 1

Project 2

Year

Cash Flow

Certainty

Cash Flow

Certainty

Rs.

Equivalents

Rs.

Equivalents

0

-15,000

1.00

-20,000

1.00

1

7,500

0.95

12,500

0.90

2

7,500

0.85

10,000

0.80

3

5,000

0.70

7,500

0.70

4

5,000

0.65

5,000

0.60



Which project should be accepted, if the risk-free discount rate is 5 per cent.

Solution:



Project 1.
0.95 (7,500) 0.85 (7,500) 0.70( 5,000) (0.65(5,000)
NPV = 1.0 (-15,000) + --------------- + ---------------- + ---------------- + -----------




(1.05) (1.05)2

(1.05)3 (1.05)4



= Rs.3,764.

Project 2.



0.90 (12,500) 0.80 (10,000) 0.70( 7,500) 0.60( 5,000)

NPV = 1.0 (-40,000) + ---------------- + ----------------- + ------------ + --------------






(1.05) (1.05)2

(1.05)3 (1.05)4



= Rs.4,956.

Project 2 should be preferred since it has higher NPV.

Problem: 3

GVK Ltd.is considering two mutually exclusive projects. The initial cost of both

projects is Rs.5,000, and cash has an expected life of four years. Under three

possible states of economy, their annual cash flows and associated probabilities

are as follows:





NCF (Rs)

Economic State

Probability

Project A

Project B

Good

0.3

6,000

5,000

Normal

0.4

4,000

4,000

Bad

0.3

2,000

3,000

If the discount rate is 7 percent, which project should the company accept?

Solution:

ENCF = Estimated Net Cash Flows

ENPV = Estimated Net Present Values.





Project A:
ENCF = (0.3 x 6,000) + (0.4 x 4,000) + (0.3 x 2,000) ? Rs.4,000.

2 = (6,000 ? 4,000)2 (0.3) + (4,000 ? 4,000)2 (0.4) + (2,000 ? 4,000)2 (0.3)

=24,00,000

o = 24,00,000 = Rs.1,549.2

ENPV = -5,000 + 4,000 x PVAF0.075 = -5,000 + 4,000 x 4.1000 = Rs.11,400

Project B:

ENCF = (0.3 x 5,000) + (0.4 x 4,000) + (0.3 x 3,000) ? Rs.4,000.

2 = (5,000 ? 4,000)2 (0.3) + (4,000 ? 4,000)2 (0.4) + (3,000 ? 4,000)2 (0.3)

=6 ,00,000

o = 6 ,00,000 = Rs.774.6



ENPV = -5,000 + 4,000 x PVAF0.075 = -5,000 + 4,000 x 4.1000 = Rs.11,400

Projects A and B have equal expected net present value of Rs.11,400 but the

standard deviation of Project A`s cash flow is higher than that of Project B.

Therefore, GVK Ltd. should choose Project B.

4.2. RISK-ADJUSTED DISCOUNT RATES.

A finance manager being risk averter when given choice between two projects

promising the same rate of return but different in risk would prefer the one with

the least perceived risk. He will require compensation for bearing risk so that

overall value of the company remains unaffected by assumption of the risky

project. There are several methods of adjusting risk in investment decisions,

which can be classified broadly in two groups, viz., formal and informal methods.





4.2.1 Formal Method
Among the formal methods of adjusting risk in capital budgeting decisions, the

most popular ones are: Risk adjusted discount rate and certainty equivalent

approach.

4.2.2 Informal Method

This is the most common method of adjusting risk. The finance manager

recognizes that some projects are more riskier than others. He also finds that

riskier projects would yield more than what risk free or less risky projects

promise. To choose a project carrying greater risk as against the less risky one,

the finance manager decides on subjective basis (by using his discretion), the

margin of difference in rate of return of both types of projects. The manner of

fixing the standard is strictly internal known to the finance manager himself and is

not specified.

The use of the risk-adjusted discount rates is on the notion that the investors

expect higher returns for more risky projects. In this method of incorporating risk,

the risk-free rate of return, i, is adjusted upward by adding a suitable risk

premium, , representing compensation, the risk-averse investors in the market

would require before they will consent to the risk of the investment.

Thus, if k is the required rate of return, we have









k = 1 +

The relationship between risk and return is shown in the following figure.

Chart 2

Risk and Return relationship









R*
R Compensation for
R











taking risk-







k

risk premium

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -




























































Risk (%)

*RRRk = Required rate of return k

The risk-free rate compensates the investors for deferring the consumption of

goods and services to make investments. In effect, it is a reward only for waiting

and applies only to those investments on which there is no chance that the

realized rate of return will be different from the rate expected. If, however, risk is

also to borne, the risk premium adds the necessary compensation for bearing that

risk.

In a given situation, the manager determines the required rate of return by

adjusting the risk-free rate of return, by adding the necessary risk premium in

keeping the risk that the proposal carries. Once the appropriate required rate of

return for a project with a given level of risk is determined, the cash flows are

discounted to present values using this risk-adjusted rate is obtained as:

n Ct
NPV = -------------------
i=0 (1 + k)t
Example 3: The management of the Prathiba Limited, a manufacturer of toys in

New Delhi, is considering the introduction of a new type of a toy-remote control

motorbike. In the past, the management has been quite conservative in making

investments in new products and considers this project quite a risky one. The

management feels that the normally used required rate of return of 10% is not

proper in this case and, instead, a return of 16% is expected on this project.

The project, a requiring an outlay of Rs.1,50,000 has the following expected

returns over its estimated life of 6 years.



Year



:

1

2

3

4

5

6
Ca flow (000 Rs.) :

30

30

50

60

40

25



Should the project be undertaken?

Solution:

The net present value, using the 16% discount rate as follows:

Year Cash Flow

PV factor @ 16%

Present Value

1

30000

0.8621



28563

2

30000

0.7432



22296

3

50000

0.6407



32035

4

60000

0.5523



33138

5

40000

0.4761



19044

6

25000

0.4104



10260











---------------------











142636





Less: Cash outflow 150000













---------------------











NPV =



(7364)











----------------------

Since the NPV is negative the proposal is not an acceptable one. Note, however,

that if the usual rate of discount of 10% were used, the project would have NPV

equal to Rs.20,158, and therefore, be acceptable.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.3. STATISTICAL DISTRIBUTION APPROACH
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
While using the certainty equivalent approach, the risk-free discount rate may be

easily approximated (may be, for instance, by the interest rate on government

bonds) but difficulties may arise in determining the trade-off between risk and

return for the purpose of converting a particular distribution of NPV into its

certainty equivalent. In a similar manner, in using the risk-adjusted discount rate

method, the determination of the risk-premium to be added to the risk-free rate of

return would pose difficulty. In using either of these approaches it is important
that we should be able to measure the degree of risk associated with the project(s)

in question. In the statistical distribution approach, the degree of risk associated

with a project is sought to be measured in terms of the variance (or standard

deviation) of the NPV distribution, and the investment decisions are taken

considering the expected (mean) value, and its standard deviation, of the net

present value distribution. This information about the project risk may also be

usefully employed for calculating certainty-equivalent for the uncertain returns

form the investment proposal, as also it is a major factor in calculating the size of

the risk-adjusted discount rate to use. The derivation of the probabilistic

information about investment proposals owes its origin to the work of Frederick

Hillier.

In this method of considering risky investment proposals, the net cash flow from

an investment in each period is viewed as a random variable which can assume

any one of the possible values. The method requires that probability distribution

of cash flows for each of the years be obtained and considered. Using the cash-

flow distribution, the expected value of the NPV distribution and its variance are

calculated in the first instance. These are calculated as discussed here.

4.3.1 Expected value of NPV supposes that there is an investment proposal

with cash flow whose probability distributions are given for each of the n

years of the project life. The cash flows have means equal to C1, C2 . . . . . . .

Cn , with standard deviations equal to 1, 2,. . . . . n respectively. For

calculating the expected value of the NPV distribution, we shall add the

discounted mean value of the cash flows for each of the n time periods.

This is gives:

C1 C2 C n
E(NPV) = C0 + ------- + -------- + . . .. . . . . . . . . + -----------
(1+I)1 (1+I)2 (1+I)n

E(NPV) is also know as the expected monetary value (EMV) of the project. As

before, if this NPV exceeds zero, the proposal becomes acceptable while if it is

lower than zero, the proposal becomes rejectable.

EXAMPLE 4:

The Prathiba Company is considering to make investment in a proposal which

requires an outlay of Rs.1,20,000. The project has a life of three years over which

the following cash inflows are likely to be generated.

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Cash

Probability

Cash

Probability Cash Flow Probability

Flow

Flow

30000

0.2

30000

0.1

40000

0.3

40000

0.4

50000

0.4

60000

0.3

50000

0.3

80000

0.4

80000

0.2

60000

0.1

90000

0.1

100000

0.2



The management feels that the expected cash flows in the various periods may be

considered to base its decision about acceptance or rejection of the project. If the

discount rate is 10%, should the proposal be accepted?

Solution:

We shall obtain the expected cash inflow for each of the years. This is calculated

as follows:

Calculation of Expected Cash Flows

Year

Cash Flow

Probability

Expected

Expected

T

C

Cash Flow

ti

Pti

Value

C = Cti Pti

1

30000

0.2

6000



40000

0.4

16000



50000

0.3

15000



60000

0.1

6000

43000
2

30000

0.1

3000





50000

0.4

20000





80000

0.4

32000



90000

0.1

9000

64000

3

40000

0.3

12000



60000

0.3

18000



80000

0.2

16000



100000

0.2

20000

66000

Now the expected NPV can be calculated as:

Year

Expected Cash Flow

PV Factor @ 10 %

Present Value

0

-120000

1.0000

-120000

1

43000

0.9091

39091.3

2

64000

0.8264

52889.6

3

66000

0.7513

46585.8













Expected NPV =

21566.8

Since the expected NPV of the proposal is greater than zero, it is an acceptable

one.

4.3.2 Variance of NPV

In the discussion on the variance of the NPV distribution, Hillier has given an

analysis of three cases. In the first case, the cash flows between different periods

are assumed to be independent of one another. This is to say; the cash flows of

one period are not related to the cash flows of another period. In the second case,

the cash flows between different periods are assumed to be perfectly correlated.

The third case deals with the mixed situation in which a part of the flows are

perfectly correlated and part are independent. Obviously, when we consider more

than two periods of time, the cash flows cannot all be perfectly negatively

correlated with each other. This explains why Hillier`s analysis is restricted to the

case of positive correlation.



Now, we consider the three cases in turn:
(a) Independent net cash flows: When net cash flows for the various years are

independent of each other, then the calculation of the variance of the distribution

of cash flow becomes a difficult tasks. This is because independence

substantially increases the number of possible outcomes. To illustrate, suppose a

project has a life of 3 years and in each of the years, there are four cash flow

values possible with some given probabilities. Under the assumption of

independence, a total of 4 X 4 X 4 = 64 combinations are possible. The

probability of occurrence of each of the combinations is given by the product of

the probabilities of the particular cash flow values of different years entering into

that combination. For this probability distribution, we can find the present values

of each of the possible cash flow streams (64 in our example) and determine the

expected value and the variance of present values in the usual way.

However, the complications in calculations can be avoided and instead the

variance can be obtained directly using the following formulation:











21

22





2n



V(NPV) = 2 = 20 + ------------ + ------------ + ........+ ------------









(1 + i)2 (1 + i)4 (1 + i)2n



n 21





= ---------------





t = o (1 + i)2t

Unless otherwise stated, the cash flows of a given project may be taken to be

independent.

(b) Perfectly Correlated Cash Flows: The assumption of perfect correlation

between the cash flows of the successive years implies, technically, that if random

factors cause a cash flow Cj (for the jth year) to deviate from its mean value by a

standard deviations, the same factors will cause the cash flow Ck (for the kth year)

to deviate from its own mean in the same direction by a standard deviations. In
the situation in which the periodic net cash flows are given to be perfectly

correlated, the variance of NPV distribution can be computed as follows:



21

22





2n



V(NPV) = 20 + ------------ + ------------ + ........+ -------------









(1 + i)2 (1 + i)4 (1 + i)2n





n 1

or

2

= ---------------





t = o (1 + i)t



It may be noted that the standard deviation value when the cash flows are

perfectly correlated would be higher than when they are independent.

(c ) Mixed Case:

There are very few investments for which the net cash flows are either completely

independent or perfectly correlated. Closer to the reality is the mixed` case in

cash flows is partially dependent and partially independent. To understand this

situation, consider a very simple case where a company is contemplating to

introduce a new product, whose life is expected to be only three years. The

market acceptance of the product may be unsatisfactory, satisfactory, or excellent.

How the product will be accepted in the first year will determine how it will be

accepted in the second years. In this respect, it is case of dependence. Also, the

product sales are influenced by general economic conditions, which may be poor,

good, or excellent. However, economic conditions in one year do not affect the

economic conditions in the next year. From this standpoint, it is a case of

independence.

For the mixed case as well, all possible combinations of the cash flows are

obtained and their joint probabilities calculated. The present value of each of the
cash flow streams is then calculated and we can get the mean and the standard

deviation as usual. In the simple case, however, where the cash flows Cj`s can be

broken down into two components: Cj` and Cj*, where Cj` is the part of Cj which

varies independently and Cj* is the part of Cj that is perfectly correlated with C*

in any other period, the variance can be obtained using the formula given above

jointly get the following:







V(1) V(2) V(n)

V(NPV) = 2 = V(o) + ------------- + ----------------- +. . . . . . . + --------------






(1 + i)2 (1 + i)4 (1 + i)n






V(C*1) V(C*2)

V(C*n)



+ V(C*0) + ------------ + --------------- + . . . . . . +------------

(1 + i) (1 + i)2 (1 + i)n

Once the expected net present value and its standard deviation (from variance)

value are obtained, the riskiness of the project can be measured. The standard

deviation is a measure of absolute amount of risk associated with a given project.

While it is a useful measure for the purpose of risk evaluation, it is not suitable

when comparative riskiness of the projects is to be considered. In order to

compare the various projects, we should compute their respective coefficients of

variation. We have,











Standard deviation



Coefficient of variation = ---------------------------------------- X 100

Expected (mean) value of NPV
A higher coefficient value points to a higher risk associated with a project.


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.4. SIMULATION APPROACH
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In considering risky investments, we can also use simulation to approximate the

expected value of net present value, the expected value of internal rate of return,

or the expected value of profitability index and the dispersion about the expected

value. By simulation we mean testing the possible results of an investment

proposal before it is accepted. The testing itself is based on a model coupled with

probabilistic information. Making use of a simulation model first proposed by

David Hertz, we might consider, for example, the following factors in deriving a

project`s cash-flow stream.

Market Analysis

Market size
Selling price
Market growth rate
Share of market (which controls physical sales volume)

Investment Cost Analysis

Investment required
Useful life of facilities
Residual Value of investment

Operating and Fixed Costs

Operating costs
Fixed costs

Risk analysis based on simulation approach involves the following steps:

1. List all the basic economic variables that will affect the outcome of the

decision.

2. Estimate the range of variables for each of these variables that are subject

to uncertainty.

3. State in equation from the economic or accounting relationships that

connect the basic variables to the final outcome on which the decision will

be based.
4. With the aid of computer randomly select a specific value for each basic

variable according to the chances this value has of actually turning up in

the future. Given these specific values, use the equation in step 3 to

calculate the resulting outcome.

5. Repeat this process to define and evaluate the probability of the

occurrence of each possible rate of return. Since there are literally millions

of possible combinations of values, we need to test the likelihood that

various specific returns on the investment will occur.

Probability distributions are assigned to each of these factors based on

management`s assessment of the probable outcomes. Thus, the possible outcomes

are charted for each factor according to their probability of occurrence. Once the

probability distributions are determined, the next step is to determine the internal

rate of return (or net present value calculated at the risk-free rate) that will result

from a random combination of the nine factors just listed.

To illustrate the simulation process, assume that the market-size factor has the

following probability distribution:



Market size (in thousands of units) 450 500

550

600

650

700 750


Probability occurrence



.05

.10

.20

.30

.20

.10 .05



Now suppose that we have a roulette wheel with 100 numbered slots, on which

numbers 1 through 5 represent a market size of 450,000 units, 6 through 15

represent a market size of 500,000 units, 16 through 35 represent a market size of

550,000 units and so on through 100. As in roulette, we spin the wheel, and the

ball falls in one of the 100 numbered slots. Assume that the ball lands on number

26. For this trail, then, we simulate a market size of 550,000. Fortunately, we do
not need a roulette wheel to undertake a simulation. The same type of operation

can be carried out on a computer in a much more efficient manner.

Simulation trials are undertaken for each of the other eight factors. Jointly, the

first four factors (market analysis) give us the annual sales per year. Factors 8 and

9 give us the operating and fixed costs per year. Together, these six factors enable

us to calculate the annual incremental revenues. When trial values for these six

factors enable us to calculate the annual incremental revenues. When trial values

of these six factors are combined with trail values for the required investment, the

useful life and the residual values of project, we have sufficient information to

calculate the internal rate of return (or net present value) for that trial run. Thus,

the computer simulates trial values for each of the nine factors and then calculates

the internal rate of return based on the values simulated. The process is repeated

many times. Each time we obtain a combination of values for the nine factors and

the internal rate of return can be plotted in a frequency distribution. From this

frequency distribution we are able to identify the expected value of internal rate of

return and the dispersion about this expected return.

Practical Test:

David B.Hertz was the first authority that proposed the use of the simulation

approach to secure the expected return and dispersion on this expected return for

an investment proposal. He took an example of medium size industrial chemical

company, which was contemplating a $ 10 million extension to its processing

plant. The estimated service life of the facility was 10 years, the engineers

expected to be able to utilize 2,50,000 tons of proceed material worth $510 per

ton at an average processing cost of 435 per ton. The company was interested to

know the return likely to be fetched by the project and the risks involved in it.

In order to undertake risk analysis Hertz isolated nine basic economic values, viz.,

market size, selling price, market growth rate, share of market, initial cost of

investment residual value of investment after taxes, useful life of facilities,
operating costs and fixed costs. The first four variables were categorized under

the heading of market analysis, the next two were grouped under the category

investment cost analysis and the last three variables were regarded as part of

operating costs.

After identifying the nine factors, probability distribution were assigned to each

of these factors on the basis of the management`s assessment of the probable

outcomes so as to know the possible range of values for each factor, the average

and some ideas as to the likelihood that the variable possible values will be

repeated.

The next step followed by Hertz was to determine the returns that will result from

random combination of factors involved. For this purpose, simulation trials were

undertaken with the help of computer. To show how this trial was made, he took

the following example.

Suppose we have a wheel, as in roulette, with the numbers from 0-15 representing

one price for the product or material, the numbers 16 to 30 representing a second

price, the numbers 31 to 45 a third price, and so on. For each of these segments

one would have a different range of expected market volumes: e.g., $150,000 -

$200,000 for the first, $100,000 - $150,000 for the second, $75,000 ? 100,000 for

the third and so forth. Now suppose that we spin the wheel and the ball falls in 37.

This would mean that we pick a sales volume in the $75,000 ? 100,000 range. If

the ball goes in 11, we have a different price and we turn to the $ 150,000 ?

$200,000 range for a sales volume. Fortunately, this type of operation can be

carried out on computer in a much more efficient manner.

Simulation trials will have to be undertaken for the other eight variables. When

trial values for market variables and operating and fixed costs are combined, we

shall be able to calculate the annual earnings. If these trail values are combined

with trial values for the required investment, the useful life and the residual value

of the project, we shall have sufficient information to compute the return on
investment for that trial run. In this way the computer simulates trial values for

each of the nine factors and then computes the return on investment based upon

the values simulated. The above process is repeated a number of times and each

time we shall get a combination of values for the nine factors and the returns on

investment for the combination. When the trial is repeated times without number,

the rates of return can be presented in the form of frequency distribution, on the

basis of which an expected return, standard deviation and coefficient of variation

can be calculated. By comparing the probability distribution of rates of return for

one proposed with that of the other, the management can evaluate the respective

merits of different risky investments.

Thus, simulation method allows the management to discriminate between

measures of expected return based on weighted probabilities of all possible

returns, variability of return and risks.

4.5. SENSIVITY ANALYSIS

In the evaluation of an investment project, we work with the forecasts of cash

flows. Forecasted cash flow depends on the expected revenue and costs. Further,

expected revenue is a function of sales volume and unit selling price. Similarly,

sales volume depends on the market size and the firm`s market share. Costs

include variable costs, which depend on sales volume and unit variable cost and

fixed costs. Costs include variable costs, which depend on sale volume, and unit

variable cost and fixed cost. The net present value or the internal rate of return of

a project is determined by analyzing the after-tax cash flows arrived at by

combining forecasts of various variables. It is difficult to arrive at an accurate and

unbiased forecast of each variable. We can`t be certain about the outcome of any

of these variables. The reliability of the NPV or Internal Rate of Return (IRR), we

can work out how much difference it makes if any of these forecasts goes wrong.

We can change each of the forecast, on at a time, to atleast three values:

Pessimistic, Expected, and Optimistic. The NPV of the project is recalculated
under these different assumptions. This method of recalculating NPV or IRR by

changing each forecast is call sensitivity analysis.

Sensitivity analysis is a way of analyzing change in the project`s NPV (or IRR)

for a given change in one of the variables. It indicates how sensitive a project`s

NPV (or IRR) is to changes in particular variables. The more sensitive the NPV,

the more critical is the variable. The following three steps are involved in the use

of sensitivity analysis:

Identification of all those variables, which have an influence on the

project`s NPV (or IRR).

Definition of the underlying (mathematical) relationship between the

variables.

Analysis of the impact of the change in each of the variables on the

project`s NPV.

The decision-maker, while performing sensitivity analysis, computes the

project`s NPV (or IRR) for each forecast under three assumptions: (a)

pessimistic; (b) expected, and (c) optimistic. It allows him to ask what if

questions. For example, what (is the NPV) if the volume increases or

decreases? What (is the NPV) if variable cost or fixed cost increases or

decreases? What (is the NPV) if the selling price increases or decreases? What

(is the NPV) if the project is delayed or outlay escalates or the project`s life is

more or less than anticipated? A whole range of question can be answered

with the help of sensitivity analysis. It examines the sensitivity of the

variables underlying the computation of NPV or IRR, rather than attempting

to quantify risk. It can be applied to any variable, which is an input for the

after-tax cash flows. Let us consider an example.




Example.

The financial manager of a Food processing company is considering the

installation of a plant costing Rs.1 crore to increase its processing capacity. The

expected values of the underlying variables are given in the following tables

provides the project`s after-tax cash flows over its expected life of 7 years.

1

Investment (Rs.`000)

10,000

2

Sales Volume (units 000)

1,000

3

Unit selling price (Rs.)

15

4

Unit variable cost (Rs)

6.75

5

Annual fixed costs (Rs.`000)

4,000

6

Depreciation (%) WDV

25%

7

Corporate tax rate (%)

35%

8

Discount rate (%)

12%

Net Cash Flows of the Project



Cash Flows (Rs `000)



0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Investment

-















10,000

Revenue



15000 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000

Variable



6750

6750

6750

6750

6750

6750

6750

cost
Fixed Cost



4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

4000

Depreciation

2500

1875

1406

1055

791

593

445

EBIT(2-3-4-

1750

2375

2844

3195

3459

3657

3805

5)
Tax



613

831

995

1118

1211

1280

1332

PAT (6-7)



1138

1544

1848

2077

2248

2377

2473

NCF

-

3638

3419

3255

3132

3039

2970

2918

(1+5+8)

10000



The project`s NPV at 12 per cent discount rate and IRR are as follows:







NPV = +4,829







IRR = 26.8%

Since NPV is positive (or IRR> discount rate), the project can be undertaken.
How confident is the financial manger about his forecasts of various variables?

Before he takes a decision, he may like to know whether the NPV changes, if any,

of the forecast goes wrong. A sensitivity analysis can be conducted with regard to

volume, price costs etc. In order to do so, we must obtain pessimistic and

optimistic estimates of the underlying variables. Let us assume the following

pessimistic and optimistic values for volume, price and costs.

FORECASTS UNDER DIFFERENT ASSUMPTIONS

S.No. Variable

Pessimistic Expected Optimistic

1

Volume (Units 000)

750

1000

1250

2

Units selling price (Rs)

12.750

15.00

16.50

3

Units variable cost (Rs)

7.425

6.75

6.075

4

Annual fixed cost (Rs 000)

4800

4000

3200

If we change each variable (others holding constant), the project`s NPV are

recalculated in the following Table (detailed calculations are not shown)

SENSIVITY ANALYSIS UNDER DIFFERENT ASSUMPTINS

S.No. Variable

Pessimistic Expected Optimistic

1

Volume

(1289)

4,829

10,948

2

Units selling price

(1,845)

4,829

9,279

3

Units variable cost

2,827

4,829`

6,832

4

Annual fixed cost

2,456

4,829

7,203

The above Table shows that the project`s NPV when each variable is set to its

pessimistic and optimistic values. The project does not seem to be that attractive

with change in assumptions. The most critical variables is sales volume, followed

by the units selling price. If the volume declines by 25 per cent (to 7,50,000

units), NPV of the project becomes negative (-Rs.12,89,000). Similarly, if the unit

selling price falls by 15 per cent (to Rs.12.75), NPV IS ?Rs.1,84,500.

Sensitivity Analysis: Pros and Cons

Sensitivity analysis has the following advantages:
It compels the decision maker to identify the variables, which affect the

cash flow forecasts. This helps him in understanding the investment

project in totality.

It indicates the critical variables for which additional information may be

obtained. The decision maker can consider actions, which may help in

strengthening the weak spots` in the project.

It helps to expose inappropriate forecasts, and thus guides the decision

maker to concentrate on relevant variables.

Let us emphasize that sensitivity analysis is not a panacea for a project`s all

uncertainties. It helps a decision maker to understand the project better. It has the

flowing limitations:

It does not provide clear-cut results. The terms optimistic` and

pessimistic` could mean different things to different persons in an

organization. Thus, the rage of values suggested may be inconsistent.

It fails to focus on the interrelationship between variables. For example, sale

volume may be related to price and cost. A price cut may lead to high sales and

low operating cost.

Example:

Assume that the financial manager made pessimistic, most likely, and optimistic

estimates of the cash flows for each project. The cash inflow estimates and

resulting, NPVs in each case are summarized in the following table. Comparing

the rages of cash inflows ($1,000 for project A and $4,000 for B0 and, more

important, the ranges of NPVs ($7,606 for project A and $30,424 for B) makes it

clear that project A is less risky than Project B. Given that both projects have the

same most likely NPV of $5,212, the assumed risk-averse decision maker will

take project A because it has less risk and no possibility of loss.


Sensitivity Analysis of the Company



Project A

Project B

Initial Investment

$10,000

$10,000



Annual Cash Inflows

Outcome:





Pessimistic

$1,500

$0

Most likely

2,000

2,000

Optimistic

2,500

4,000

Range

$1,000

$4,000

Net Present Values*
Outcome:





Pessimistic

$1,409

-$10,000

Most likely

5,212

5,212

Optimistic

9,015

20,424

Range

$7,606

$30,424



*These values were calculated by using the corresponding annual cash inflows. A

10% cost of capital and a 15-year life for the annual cash inflows were used.

4.6. SCENARIO ANALYSIS The simple sensitivity analysis assumes that the

variables are independent. In practice, the variables will be interrelated. One way

out is to analyze the impact of alternative combinations of variables. The

decision-maker can develop some plausible scenarios. For instance, in our

example, it may be possible to increase volume to 12,50,000 units (25 per cent

increase) if the company reduces unit selling price to Rs.13.50 (10 per cent

reduction), resorts to aggressive advertisement campaign, thereby increasing unit

variable cost to Rs.7.10 (5 per cent increase) and fixed cost to Rs.44,00,000 (10

per cent increase). The following Table shows that this scenario generates a

positive NPV of Rs.27,01,000. More plausible scenarios could be thought out and

analyzed to arrive at a final judgment about the project.


Scenario Analysis
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Variables









Expected

Scenario

Assumptions
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Volume (units 000)





1,000



1,250

2. Price (Rs)







15.0



13.5

3. Unit variable cost (Rs)





6.75



7.1

4. Fixed cost (Rs 000)





4,000



4,400

5. NPV (Rs 000)







4,829



2,901

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

NPV calculation for scenario:



NPV = ((1250 (13.5-7.1) ? 4400) 0.65 x 4.5638 + 2,222) ? 10,000



= 10,679 + 2,222 ? 10,000 = 2,901

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.7 DECISION-TREE APPROACH

The Decision-tree Approach (DT) is another useful alternative for evaluating

investment proposals. The outstanding feature of this method is that it takes into

account the impact of all probabilistic estimates of potential outcomes. In other

words, every possible outcome is weighted in probabilities terms and then

evaluated. The DT approach is especially useful for situations in which decisions

at one point of time also affect the decisions of the firm at some later date.

Another useful application of the DT approach is for projects, which require

decisions to be made in sequential parts.

A decision tree is a pictorial representation in tree from which indicates the

magnitude, probability and inter-relationship of all possible outcomes. The format

of the exercise of the investment decisions has an appearance of a tree with

branches and, therefore, this method is referred to as the decision-tree method. A

decision tree shows the sequential cash flows and the NPV of the proposed

project under different circumstances.


To illustrate, suppose that a firm has a two-year project that requires an initial

investment of Rs.100,000. The cash flows expected in each of the years along

with their probabilities are given in following figure. It may be noted that in this

example both the cash flows and the probabilities are conditional (a case where

the cash flows are not independent) on what happen in the first year.

It is evident from this figure that the decision tree show nine different

combinations of outcomes as possible. One possibility is that the first year will

have an inflow of Rs.40,000 which shall be followed by a Rs.60,000 cash flow in

the second year. As shown in the figure, the net present value associated with this

set of cash flows, discounted using a rate of 8%, is 40000 X (1.08)-1 + 60000 X

(1.08)-2 ? 100,000 = -11,526. In a similar manner, the net present value of each of

the other eight combinations is given. The (joint) probability of each combination

is obtained by multiplying the probabilities of occurrences. For example, for the

first combination, the probability is 0.08 (=0.2 X 0.4)

By multiplying the joint probability for each of the nine combinations times their

associated NPVs and summing, we obtain the project`s expected net present

value, E(NPV). The standard deviation of the project equals Rs.18,684

approximately, obtained as follows:

NPVJ = NPV of the jth combination

Pj = Probability of the jth combination

= ((-11526-20177) 2 x0.08 + (-2953 ? 20177) 2 x 0.08 +...)1/2 = Rs.18,684





Although useful for setting out all possible combinations of a proposed project,

the decision-tree approach suffers from a shortcoming that in situations involving

a large number of possible outcomes, it may be too complex to handle.














Year 2 NPV Prob.=

NPVxProb











Rs.60,000



(11526)x0.08=(922.08)













0.4





Year 1









Rs.40,000

70,000

(2953)x0.08=(236.24)













0.4









0.3

80,000

















5620x0.04=224.80













0.2












Rs.60,000

Year 0









0.3

6992x0.09= 629.28





(Rs.100,000)

Rs.60,000















70,000 15565x0.15=2334.75











0.3



0.5















80,000















0.2

24138x0.06=1448.28















Rs.50,000











7678x0.05=383.90









Rs.70,000

0.1





0.3



70,000 24824x0.25=6206.00











0.5























100,000 50543x0.20=10108.60











0.4





--------------











Expected NPV = 20177.29



















--------------
5.TOTAL RISK FOR MULTIPLE INVESTMENTS

We have been measuring risk for a single investment project. When multiple

investment projects are involved, the measurement may differ from that for a

single project, owning to the properties of diversification. It is noteworthy that

investment in capital assets differs from investment in securities. For one thing,

capital assets typically are not divisible, whereas securities are. Moreover, it

usually is much more costly, and sometimes impossible, to divest oneself of a

capital asset, whereas selling a marketable security is relatively easy. Finally,

there is the problem of mutual exclusion and contingency that does not occur with

securities. All of these factors make diversification with respect to capital assets

more lumpy than diversification with securities. Whether diversification of

capital assets is a thing of value for the firms is a subject of considerable

controversy. Our purpose here is only to show how to measure risk for

combinations of risky investments, not to ponder whether such measurements is

worthwhile, that comes later.

5.1 Standard Deviation

As was true earlier, the two pieces of information we seek are the mean and

standard deviation of the probability distribution of possible net present values for

the combination of projects being analyzed. The mean usually is simply a

weighted average for the projects making up the combination. From the above

observations, we know that the total variance, or risk, of a combination of risky

investments depends to a large extent on the degree of correlation between the

investments. The standard deviation of the probability distribution of possible net

present values for a portfolio of capital investments can be expressed as



m m





= r



jk j k





j=1 k=1




Where m is the total number of assets in the portfolio, rjk is the expected

correlation between the net present values for investments j and k, j is the

standard deviation for investment j, and k is the standard deviation for investment

k.

The above equation indicates that the standard deviation, or risk, of a portfolio of

projects depends on (1) the degree of correlation between various projects and (2)

the standard deviation of possible net present values for each project. We note

that the higher the degree of positive correlation, the greater the standard

deviation of the portfolio of projects, all other things remaining constant.

Moreover, the greater the standard deviation of the projects, the higher the

standard deviation of the portfolio, if the correlation is positive.

5.2.Correlation between Projects

The correlation between expected net present values of two projects may be

positive, negative, or zero depending on the nature of the association. A

correlation coefficient of 1.00 indicates that the net present values of two

investment proposals vary directly in the same proportional manner; a correlation

coefficient of ?1.00 indicates that they vary inversely in the same proportional

manner; and a zero correlation coefficient usually indicates that they are

independent.

5.3.Range of Correlation

For most pairs of investment projects, the correlation coefficient lies between 0

and 1.00. The lack of negatively correlated projects is due to most investments

being correlated positively with the economy. Still it is possible to find projects

having low or moderate degrees of correlation. Projects in the same general line

of business tend to be highly correlated with each other, whereas projects in

essentially unrelated lines of business tend to have low degrees of correlation.
Illustration 5.: Suppose a firm has a single exiting investment project, 1 and it is

considering an additional project, 2. The projects have the following expected net

present values, standard deviations, and correlation coefficients:

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Project

Expected





Standard



Correlation





Net Present Value



Deviation



Coefficient

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1



$12,000





$14,000



1.00

2



8,000





6,000



1.00

1 and 2













0.40

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The expected net present value of the combination of projects is simply the sum

of the two separate values:





NPV = $12,000 + $8,000 = $20,000

The standard deviation for the combination,





= r

2

2

111 + 2r12 12 + r222



= (1.00) (14,000) 2 + (2) (0.40) (14,000) (6,000) + (1.00) (6,000) 2



= $ 17,297

Thus, the expected net present value of the firm increases from $12,000 to

$20,000, and the standard deviation of possible net present values from $14,000

to $17,297 with the acceptance of project 2. As the number of projects increases,

the calculations become more cumbersome. Fortunately, computer programs exist

that can readily solve for the standard deviation.

5.4.Feasible Combinations and Dominance

With the foregoing procedures, you can determine the mean and the standard

deviation of the probability distribution of possible net present values for a

combination of investments. A combination includes all existing investment

projects and one or more proposals under consideration. We assume that a firm

has existing investment projects generating expected future cash flows and that

disinvestments with respect to these projects is not possible. Existing projects
comprise a subset that is included in all combinations. Proposals under

consideration are assumed to represent all future proposals on the investment

horizon.

6. SUMMARY

Risk arises in the investment evaluation because the forecasts of cash flows can

go wrong. Risk can be defined as variability of returns (NPV or IRR) of an

investment project. Standard deviation is a commonly used measure of variability.

Decision makers in practice may handle risk in conventional ways. For example,

they may use a shorter payback period, or use conservative forecasts of cash

flows, or discount net cash flows at the risk-adjusted discount rates. A more

useful technique is the sensitivity analysis. It is a method of analyzing change in

the project`s NPV for a given change in one of the variables. It helps in asking

what if questions and calculates NPV under different assumptions.

Risk may be incorporated into capital budgeting decisions mainly by certainty

equivalent approach, risk adjusted discount rates or through statistical distribution

approach, which considers mean and standard deviation of the NPV distribtion.

7. KEY TERMS AND CONCEPTS:

Average Rate of Return ? Also known as the accounting rate of return (ARR),

return on investment (ROI) or return on assets (ROA), is obtained by dividing

average annual post-tax profit by the average investment.

Break-even-Analysis ? It indicates the level of output/sales at which cost and

revenue are in equilibrium.

Break-even-Point ? It is a point of zero profit, i.e., the sales volume where total

revenue = total expenses.

Business Risk ? The potential variability in firm`s earnings before interest and

taxes resulting from the nature of the firm`s business endeavours.
Capital Budgeting ? It is decision-making process concerned with whether or

not (i) the firm should invest funds in an attempt to make profit? and (ii) how to

choose among competing projects.

Capital Rationing ? When availability of capital to a firm is limited, the firm is

constrained in its choice of projects. Capital rationing is restricting capital

expenditure to certain amount, even when projects with positive NPV need be

rejected (which would be accepted in unlimited funds case).

Capital Structure ? The mix of long-term sources of funds used by the firm.

Capital Structure Proportions ? The mix of financing sources that the firm

plans to maintain through time.

Certainty Equivalent ? A ratio of certain cash flow and the expected value of a

risky cash flow between which the decision-maker is indifferent.

Contribution Margin ? Difference between receipts and variable expenses.

Discount Rate ? The rate at which cash flows are discounted. This rate may be

taken as the required rate of return on capital, or the cost of capital.

Financial Risk ? The added variability in earnings available to a firm`s

shareholders and the additional risk of insolvency caused by the use of financing

sources that require a fixed return.

Mutually Exclusive Projects ? A situation in which the acceptance of one

investment proposal leaves out the acceptance of another proposal.

Margin of Safety ? The excess of budgeted or actual sales over the break-even

sales.

Net Present Value ? A method of evaluation consisting of comparing the present

value of all net cash flows (discounted by cost of capital as the interest rate) to the

initial investment cost.
Payback Period ? A method of evaluating investment proposal which determines

the time a project`s cash inflows will take to repay the original investment of the

project.

Profit Contribution ? Difference between P/V income and specific programmed

costs`.

Profit Standard ? A profit yardstick to measure firm`s performance, like

competitor`s profits, historical rate of profit, etc.

Risk ? Refers to a situation in which there are several possible outcomes, each

outcome occurring with a probability that is known to the decision-maker.

Risk-adjusted Discount Rate ? Sum of risk-free interest rate and a risk premium.

The former is often taken as the interest rate on government securities. The risk

premium is what the decision-maker subjectively considers as the additional

return necessary to compensate for additional risk.

Standard Deviation ? The degree of dispersion of possible outcomes around the

expected value. It is the square root of the weighted average of the squared

deviations of all possible outcomes from the expected value.

Uncertainty ? Refers to situations in which there are several possible outcomes

of an action whose probabilities are either not known or are not meaningful.

8. SELF-ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS & TEST PROBLEMS

1. What do you mean by risk in investment proposals? How can it be

measured?

2. Discuss the certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted discount rate methods of

incorporating risk into capital budgeting process.

3. Explain the statistical distribution approach to evaluate risky proposals.

How would the variance be obtained when the cash flows of the

successive time periods are (a) perfectly correlated, and (b) independent in

nature?
4. What is the sensitivity analysis in the context of investment decisions?

Explain.

5. Norohna and Co. is considering two mutually exclusive projects. The

expected values for each project`s cash flows are as follows:

-----------------------------------------------
Year

Project A

Project B

----------------------------------------------
0

-$300,000

-$300,000

1

100,000

200,000

2

200,000

200,000

3

200,000

200,000

4

300,000

300,000

5

300,000

400,000

---------------------------------------------
The company has decided to evaluate these projects using the certainty

equivalent method. The certainty equivalent coefficients for each project`s

cash flows are as follows:

-----------------------------------------------
Year

Project A

Project B

----------------------------------------------
0

1.00

1.00

1

0.95

0.90

2

0.90

0.80

3

0.85

0.70

4

0.80

0.60

5

0.75

0.50

---------------------------------------------
Given that this company`s normal required rate of return is 15 percent and the

after-tax risk-free rate is 8 percent, which project should be selected?

6. (Risk-adjusted NPV) The Hokie Corporation is considering two mutually

exclusive projects. Both require an initial outlay of $10,000 and will operate for 5
years. The probability distributions associated with each project for years 1

through 5 are given as follows:

Probability Distribution for Cash Flow Years 1-5 (the same cash flow each year)

Project A

Project B

Probability

Cash Flow

Probability

Cash Flow

0.15

$4,000

0.15

$2,000

0.70

5,000

0.70

6,000

0.15

6,000

0.15

10,000

Because project B is the riskier of the two projects, the management of Hokie

Corporation has decided to apply a required rate of return of 15 percent to its

evaluation but only a 12 percent required rate of return project A.

a. Determine the expected value of each project`s annual cash flows.

b. Determine each project`s risk-adjusted net present value.

c. What other factors might be considered in deciding between these two

projects?

7.(Certainty Equivalents) The V.Coles Corporation is considering two mutually

exclusive projects. The expected values for each project`s cash flows are as

follows:

-----------------------------------------------
Year

Project A

Project B

----------------------------------------------
0

-$100,000

-$100,000

1

500,000

500,000

2

700,000

600,000

3

600,000

700,000

4

500,000

800,000

---------------------------------------------
Management has decided to evaluate these projects using the certainty

equivalent method. The certainty equivalent coefficients for each project`s

cash flows are as follows:

-----------------------------------------------

Year

Project A

Project B

----------------------------------------------
0

1.00

1.00

1

0.95

0.90

2

0.90

0.70

3

0.80

0.60

4

0.70

0.50

---------------------------------------------
Given that this company`s normal required rate of return is 15 percent and the

after-tax risk-free rate is 5 percent, which project should be selected?

8.(Risk-adjusted discount rates and risk classes) The G.Wolfe Corporation is

examining two capital budgeting projects with 5-years lives. The first, project A,

is a replacement project; the second, project B, is a project unrelated to current

operations. The G.Wolfe Corporation uses the risk-adjusted discount rate method

and groups projects according to purpose and then uses a required rate of return or

discount rate that has been pre-assigned to that purpose of risk class. The

expected cash flows for these projects are as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------






Project A

Project B

Initial investment:

$250,000

$400,000

Cash inflows:
Year 1



$30,000

135,000

Year 2



40,000

135,000

Year 3



50,000

135,000

Year 4



90,000

135,000

Year 5

130,000 135,000

------------------------------------------------------------------------
The purpose of risk classes and pre-assigned required rates of return are as

follows:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Purpose









Required Rate of Return

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Replacement decision







12%

Modification or expansion of existing product line 15
Project unrelated to current operations



18

Research and development operations



20

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Determine the project`s risk-adjusted net present value.

UNIT III

INTRODUCTION TO CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

After reading this lesion, you should be able to,

? Give the meaning of corporate restructuring.

? List out the reasons for corporate restructuring.

? Discuss the different forms or types of corporate restructuring.

? Understand the terms used in corporate restructuring.

? Understand the major categories of corporate restructuring,

STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT

3.1.1. Introduction to Corporate Restructuring

3.1.2. Meaning of Corporate Restructuring

3.1.3. Reasons for Corporate Restructuring

3.1.4. Types / Forms of Corporate Restructuring

3.1.5. Major Categories of Corporate Restructuring


Before knowing the meaning and forms of corporate restructuring it is better to

know the different forms of business organisation and how an entrepreneur

structures his/her organisation. Entrepreneur who is planning to start an

organisation either for manufacturing products or providing services need to

select the right form of business organisation. This is possible for those

entrepreneurs who are having knowledge about the advantages and disadvantages

of different forms of business organisations. There are four main forms of

business organisations, viz., sole proprietorship, partnership, cooperative society,

and company (public and private). Each of this form has its own advantages and

disadvantages. At the same time entrepreneur also determines the financial

structure also. But the same form of business organisation and financial structure

may not be suitable for changing business environment. Therefore, there is a need

to restructure their corporation.

3.1.1 INTRODUCTION TO CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

It is very difficult for any firm to survive without restructuring the firm in the

growing stages. It may be possible to run a firm successfully for a short period,

but in the long run it may not be possible without restructuring because business

environment changes. Scanning of business environment helps in identifying

business opportunities and threats. Corporate restructuring is necessary whenever

there is change in business environment. For example, with liberalization,

privatization, and globalisation (LPG) many firms felt that there are lots of

profitable investment opportunities, and it also means increasing competition. A

firm that feels globalisation is opportunity for the firm, then it need to leverage

the benefits, which require lot of funds and resources, and also need to go for

restructuring. On the other hand a firm that feels globalisation or liberalization or

privatization is as competition, it has to compete with the new competitors, by

manufacturing products at high quality and sell at reasonable prices, but it needs
more technological support and needs more funds. So firm need to go for

restructuring.

Today, restructuring is the latest buzzword in corporate circles. Companies are

vying with each other in search of excellence and competitive edge,

experimenting with various tools and ideas. Many firms try to turn the business

around by cutting jobs, buying companies, selling off or closing unprofitable

divisions or even splitting the company up. And the changing national and

international environment is radically changing the way business is conducted.

Moreover, with the pace of change so great, corporate restructuring assumes

paramount importance. It is because profitable growth is one of the objectives of

any business firm. Maximization of profit is possible either by internally, by

change of manufacturing process, development of new products, or by expanding

the existing products. On the other hand company would be able to maximize

profit by externally merging with other firm or acquiring another firm. The

external strategy of maximizing profit may be in the form of mergers,

acquisitions, amalgamations, takeovers, absorption, consolidation, and so on.

Put in simple words the concept of restructuring involves embracing new ways of

running an organization and abandoning the old ones. It requires organisations to

constantly reconsider their organisational design and structure, organisational

systems and procedures, formal statements on organisational philosophy and may

also include values, leader norms and reaction to critical incidences, criteria for

rewarding, recruitment, selection, promotion and transfer.

3.1.2 MEANING OF CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

Restructuring is the corporate management term for the act of partially

dismantling and reorganizing a company for the purpose of making it more

efficient and therefore more profitable. It generally involves selling off portions

of the company and making severe staff reductions. Restructuring is often done as

part of a bankruptcy or of a takeover by another firm, particularly a leveraged
buyout by a private equity firm. It may also be done by a new CEO hired

specifically to make the difficult and controversial decisions required to save or

reposition the company.

It indicates to a broad array of activities that expand or contract a firm`s

operations or substantially modify its financial structure or bring about a

significant change in its organisational structure and internal functioning. It

includes activities such as mergers, buyouts, takeovers, business alliances, slump

sales, demergers, equity carve outs, going private, leverage buyouts (LBOs),

organisational restructuring, and performance improvement initiatives.

3.1.3 REASONS FOR CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

There are a good number of reasons behind corporate restructuring. Corporate

restructure their firms with a view to:

1 Induce higher earnings

2 Leverage core competencies

3 Divestiture and make business alliances

4 Ensure clarity in vision, strategy and structure

5 Provide proactive leadership

6 Empowerment of employees, and

7 Reengineering Process

1. Induce Higher Earnings: The prime goal of financial management is to

maximize profit there by firm`s value. Firm may not be able to generate

constant profits throughout its life. When there is change in business

environment, and there is no change in firm`s strategies. The two basic goals

of corporate restructuring may include higher earnings and the creation of

corporate value. Creation of corporate value largely depends on the firm`s

ability to generate enough cash. Thus corporate restructuring helps to firms to

increase their profits.
2. Leverage Core Competence: Core competence was seen as a capability or

skill running through a firm`s business that once identified, nurtured, and

developed throughout the firm became the basis for lasting competitive

advantage. For example Dell Computer built its first 10-year of unprecedented

growth by creating an organisation capable of the speedy and in expensive

manufacture and delivery of custom-built PCs. With the concept of

organisational learning gaining momentum, companies are laying more

emphasis on exploiting the rise on the learning curve. This can happen only

when companies focus on their core competencies. This is seen as the best

way to provide shareholders with increased profits.

3. Divestiture and Business Alliances: Some times companies may not be able

to run all the companies, which are there in-group, and companies which are

not contributing may need to be divested and concentrate on core competitive

business. Companies, while keeping in view their core competencies, should

exit from peripherals. This can be realised through entering into joint

ventures, strategic alliances and agreements.

4. Ensure Clarity in Vision, Strategy and Structure: Corporate restructuring

should focus on vision, strategy and structure. Companies should be very clear

about their goals and the heights that they plan to scale. A major emphasis

should also be made on issues concerning the time frame and the means that

influence their success.

5. Provide Proactive Leadership: Management style greatly influences the

restructuring process. All successful companies have clearly displayed

leadership styles in which managers relate on a one-to-one basis with their

employees.

6. Empowerment of Employees: Empowerment is a major constituent of any

restructuring process. Delegation and decentralised decision making provides

companies with effective management information system.
7. Reengineering Process: Success in a restructuring process is only possible

through improving various processes and aligning resources of the company.

Redesigning a business process should be the highest priority in a corporate

restructuring exercise.

The above discussed are the prime reasons for corporate restructuring.

3.1.4 TYPES / FORMS OF CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

Business firms engage in a wide range of restructuring activities that include

expansion, diversification, collaboration, spinning off, hiving off, mergers and

acquisitions. Privatisation also forms an important part of the restructuring

process. The different forms of restructuring may include: (1) Expansion, (2).

Mergers (Amalgamation), (3) Purchasing of a Unit or Division or Plant, (4)

Takeover, (5) Business Alliances, (6) Sell-Off, (7) Hive-Off, (8) Demerger or

Corporate Splits or Division, (9) Equity Carveout, (10) Going Private, and (11)

Leveraged Buyout (LBO)

1.Expansion: It is the most common and convenient form of restructuring, which

involves only increasing the existing level of capacity and it does not involve

any technical expertise. Expansion of business needs more funds to be raised

either in the form of equity or debt or both and the funds are used to finance the

fixed assets required for manufacturing the expanded level of production. This

increase firm`s profitability, thereby value of the firm

2.Merger: The term merger refers to a combination of two or more companies

into a single company where one survives and the others lose their corporate

existence. The acquired company (survivor) acquires the assets as well as

liabilities of the merged company or companies. For example A Ltd., acquires

the business of B Ltd. and C Ltd. The Generally, the company, which survives,

is the buyer, which retains its identity, and the seller company is extinguished.

Merger is also defined as amalgamation. Merger is the fusion of two or more

existing companies. All assets, liabilities and stock of one company stand
transferred to Transferee Company in consideration of payment in the form of

equity shares of Transferee Company or debentures or cash or a mix of the two

or three modes. Mergers per se, may either be horizontal mergers, vertical

mergers or conglomerate mergers. In a tender offer, the acquiring firm seeks

controlling interest in the firm to be acquired and requests the shareholders of

the firm to be acquired, to tender their shares or stock to it.

Amalgamation: Ordinarily amalgamation means merger. Amalgamation refers

to a situation where two or more existing companies are combined into a new

company formed for the purpose. The old companies cease to exist and their

shareholders are paid by the new company in cash or in its shares or debentures

or combination of cash, shares, and debentures. Almost the same definition is

give by Halsburys Laws of England describe amalgamation as a blending of

two or more existing undertakings into one undertaking, the shareholders of

each blending company becoming substantially the shareholders in the

company, which is to carry on the blended undertaking.

But there is technical difference between merger and amalgamation. In case of

merger, one existing company takes over the business of another existing

company or companies, while in the case of amalgamation; a new company

takes over the business of two or more existing companies. The company or

companies merging are called amalgamating company or companies and the

company with which the amalgamating merge or the company, which is formed

as a result of the merger, is called amalgamated company. For example C Ltd.,

is formed to take over A Ltd. and B Ltd. However, in practice, no such

distinction is observed. As a matter of fact the term amalgamation includes

merger also.

In the case Andhra Pradesh High Court held in S.S Somayajulu v Hope

Prudhommee & Co. Ltd., the word amalgamation has no definite legal

meaning. It contemplates a state of things under which two companies are so
joined as to form a third entity, or one company is absorbed into and blended

with another company. Amalgamation does not involve a formation of a new

company to carry on the business of the old company.

3.Purchasing of a Unit: Purchasing a unit or plant or division is becoming

common practice in corporate restructuring activity. This is because purchasing

a unit reduces the time involved in setting up of new unit, which is generally a

lengthy period and also brings some tax benefits. When a firm purchases one

unit of the other firm then it becomes to divesture for the selling firm. For

example when Hindustan Co. purchases a unit of Bharath Co. from Bharath

company point of view it is divesture. Generally firms sell a unit or plant or

division, due to no performance, or low performance. At the same time the low

or no performance reduces the profits of consolidated results of the firm.

4.Takeover: A takeover` is acquisition and both the terms are used

interchangeably. Takeover differs from merger in approach to business

combinations i.e. the process of takeover, transaction involved in takeover,

determination of the share exchange or cash price and fulfillment of goals of

combination all are different in takeovers than in mergers. For example, process

of takeover is unilateral and the offeror company decides about the maximum

price. Time taken in completion of transaction is less in takeover than in

mergers, top management of the offeree company being more co-operative.

5.Business Alliances: The following are more commonly used forms of business

alliance:

Joint Ventures Occasionally two or more capable firms lack a necessary

component for success in a particular competitive environment. For example, no

single petroleum firm controlled sufficient resources to construct the Alaskan

pipeline. Nor was any single firm capable of processing and marketing all of the

oil that would flow through the pipeline. The solution was joint ventures. A joint

venture is set up an independent legal entity in, which two or more separate firms
participate. The joint venture agreement clearly indicates how the cooperating

members will share ownership, operational responsibilities, and financial risks

and rewards. Example of JV Fuji-Xerox, JV to produce photocopiers, for the

Japanese market.

Strategic Alliances A strategic alliance is cooperative relationship like JV, but is

does not create a separate legal entity. In other words companies involved do not

take an equity position in one another. In many instances, strategic alliances are

partnerships that exist for a defined period during which partners contribute their

skills (transfer technology, or provide R&D service, or grant marketing rights

etc.) and expertise to a cooperative project. For example, service and franchise

based firms like Coca-Cola, McDonald`s and Pepsi have long engaged in

licensing arrangements with foreign distributors as a way to enter new markets.

Franchising A special form of licensing is franchising, which allows the

franchisee to sell a highly publicsed product or service, using the parent`s brand

name or trademark, carefully developed procedures, and marketing strategies. In

exchange, a franchisee pays a fee to parent firm, typically based on the volume of

sales of the franchisor in its defined market area. Most attractive franchisees are

Coca-Cola, Kentucky Fried Ckicken, Pepsi.

Licensing / Contract Manufacturing License is an agreement whereby a foreign

licensee buys the right to produce a company`s product in the licensee`s country

for a negotiated fee (normally, royalty payments on the sales volume). There are

two popular types of licensing. First type involves granting license for product, or

process, or specific technology, the second type of licensing involves granting

licensing for trademark or copyright. RCA for instance, once licensed its color

television technology to a number of Japanese companies.

6.Sell-Off: Sell-Off may be either through a spin-off or divestiture. Spin-Off

creates a new entity with shares being distributed on a pro rata basis to existing
shareholders of the parent company. Split-Off is a variation of Sell-Off.

Divestiture involves sale of a portion of a firm/company to a third party.

7.Hive-Off: It refers to the sale of loss making division or product or product line,

by a company. Put it simple it is discontinuing manufacture of a product or

closing down a division. This is beneficial for both the buyer and the seller.

Saving the acquisition cost of acquiring an established product benefits the

buyer. On the other hand concentrating more on profitable segments or products

and consolidating its business benefit seller. The recent example is hiving off

Tata Chemicals share in Excel Industries.

8.Demerger or Corporate Splits or Division: Demerger or split or division of a

company are the synonymous terms signifying a movement in the company just

opposite to combination in any of the forms defined above. Such types of

demergers or divisions` have been occurring in developed nations particularly

in UK and USA.

In UK, the above terms carry the meaning as a division of a company takes place

when part of its undertaking is transferred to a newly-formed company or to an

existing company, some or all of whose shares are allotted to certain of the first

company`s shareholders. The remainder of the first company`s undertaking

continues to be vested in it and its shareholders are reduced to those who do not

take shares in the other company; in other words, the company`s undertaking and

shareholders are divided between the two companies. In USA, too, the corporate

splits carry the similar features excepting difference in accounting treatment in

post-demerger practices. In India, too, demergers and corporate splits have started

taking place in old industrial conglomerates and big groups.

9.Equity Carveout: Equity carveout is the sale of its equity by parent company

in a wholly owned subsidiary. The sale of equity may be to the general public or

strategic investors. Equity carve out differs from spin off in two ways. First, in

equity carveout the equity shares are sold to the new investor, whereas in the
spin off the equity shares are sold to the existing shareholders. Secondly, equity

carveout brings cash to the firm (since the shares are sold to the new investor),

whereas in the spin off there is no cash infusion to the company because the

shares value is broken into small and the same are distributed to the existing

shareholders. For example, A company has 10,000 equity shares each Rs.10

face value. The company is planning to spin off the shares, by dividing the face

value into two equal values. In this case firm divides share into two with face

value of Rs.5 per share and the same is distributed to the existing shareholders.

Here the number of shares increases to 20,000, but face value of the share is

Rs.5.

10. Going Private: Ownership of a company can be changed through an

exchange offer, share repurchase or going public. Therefore, going private is

one of the ways of ownership restructuring. Generally public company stock is

held with public. Going private means converting public company into private

company. Privatisation is done through buying shares from the public, which

increases the stake of a small group of investors, who have substantial stake.

The rationale behind privation is to the costs (cost of providing investors with

periodical reports, communicating with financial analysts, holding shareholders

meetings, fulfilling various statutory obligations, etc.,) associated with public

limited company form of organisation and to bring long-term value into sharper

focus. Castrol India and Philips India are the recent examples of going private.

11. Leveraged Buyout (LBO): Leveraged buyout means buying any thing with

borrowed funds. For example, Dream Well Co., interested in divesting one of its

division, for Rs.50 crores (whose value is Rs.80 crores). Five executives of the

same division are keen on buying the division but each executive is able to

contribute Rs.10 lakhs. Here they fall short of funds to buy the division, still

they want to buy the same with a borrowings Rs.30 lakhs from a bank. It is

known as leveraged buyout.
12. Other Terms Used in Corporate Restructuring: Apart from the above

discussed form of corporate restructuring the following are other terms used:

Acquisition, consolidation, absorption, combinations, holding company,

takeover, restructuring, reconstructing and diversification. The terms are

required to be understood in the sense these are used. In different circumstances

some of these terms carry different meanings and might not be construed as

mergers or takeover in application of the sense underlying the term for a

particular situation. In the following paragraphs, the meaning of these terms

have been explained in the light of the definitions and explanations given by

eminent scholars and practitioners in their works.

i. Acquisition: Acquisition in general sense is acquiring the ownership in the

property. In the context of business combinations, an acquisition is the

purchase of by one company of a controlling interest in the share capital of

another existing company. An acquisition may be affected by (a) agreement

with the persons holding majority interest in the company management like

members of the board or major shareholders commanding majority of voting

power; (b) purchase of shares in open market; (c) to make takeover offer to

the general body of shareholders; (d) purchase of new shares by private treaty;

(e) acquisition of share capital of one company may be by either all or any one

of the following form of considerations viz. means of cash, issuance of loan

capital, or insurance of share capital.

ii. Consolidation: Consolidation is known as the fusion of two existing

companies into a new company in which both the existing companies

extinguish. Thus, consolidation is mixing up of the two companies to make

them into a new one in which both the existing companies lose their identity

and cease to exist. The mix-up assets of the two companies are known by a

new name and the shareholders of two companies become the shareholders of

the new company. None of the consolidating firms legally survives. There is
no designation of buyer and seller. All consolidating companies are dissolved.

In other words, all the assets, liabilities and stocks of the consolidating

companies stand transferred to new company in consideration of payment in

terms of equity shares or bonds or cash or combination of the two or all modes

of payments in proper mix.

iii. Absorption: Absorption is a combination of two or more firms into an

existing corporation. All firms except one lose their identity in merger through

absorption. For example this type of absorption is absorption of Tata

Fertilisers Ltd. (TFL) by Tata Chemicals Ltd. (TCL). TCL, an acquiring firm.

Survived after merger, while TFL an acquired company, ceased to exist.

iv. Combination: Combination refers to mergers and consolidations as a

common term used interchangeably but carrying legally distinct interpretation.

All mergers, acquisitions, and amalgamations are business combinations.

v.Takeover: A takeover` or acquisition and both the terms are used

interchangeably. Takeover differs from merger in approach to business

combinations i.e. the process of takeover, transaction involved in takeover,

determination of the share exchange or cash price and fulfillment of goals of

combination all are different in takeovers than in mergers. For example,

process of takeover is unilateral and the offeror company decides about the

maximum price. Time taken in completion of transaction is less in takeover

than in mergers, top management of the offeree company being more co-

operative.

vi. Reconstruction: The term reconstruction` has been used in section 394

along with the term amalgamation`. The term has not been defined therein

but it has been used in the sense not synonymous with amalgamation. In the

Butter worth publication, the term has been explained as under:

By a reconstruction, a company transfers its undertaking and assets to a new

company in consideration if the issue of the new company`s shares to the first
company`s members and, if the first company`s debentures are not paid off, in

further consideration of the new company issuing shares or debentures to the

first company`s debentures holders in satisfaction of their claims. The result

of the transaction is that the new company has the same assets and members

and, if the new company issues debentures to the first company`s debenture

holders, the same debenture holders as the first company, the first company

has no undertaking to operate and is usually wound up or dissolved.

Reconstructions were far common at the end of the last century and the

beginning of this century than they are now. The purposes to be achieved by

them were usually one of the following: either to extend or alter of a company

by incorporating a new company with the wider or different objects desired;

or (ii) to alter the rights attached to the different classes of a company`s shares

or debentures by the new company issuing shares or debentures with those

different rights to the original company`s share or debenture holders; or to

compel the members of a company to contribute further capital by taking

shares in the new company on which a larger amount was unpaid than on the

shares of the original company. The first two of these purposes can now be

achieved without reconstruction and the third is now regarded as a species of

coercion, which is strongly disapproved of by the courts and is not pursued in

practice. Consequently, reconstructions for these reasons do not now occur. In

Indian context, the term would cover various types of arrangements or

comprises which may include merger as well as demerger.

vii. Restructuring: Restructuring is the corporate management term for the

act of partially dismantling and reorganizing a company for the purpose of

making it more efficient and therefore more profitable. It generally involves

selling off portions of the company and making severe staff reductions.

Restructuring is often done as part of a bankruptcy or of a takeover by another

firm, particularly a leveraged buyout by a private equity firm. It may also be
done by a new CEO hired specifically to make the difficult and controversial

decisions required to save or reposition the company. It indicates to a broad

array of activities that expand or contract a firm`s operations or substantially

modify its financial structure or bring about a significant change in its

organisational structure and internal functioning. It includes activities such as

mergers, buyouts, takeovers, business alliances, slump sales, demergers,

equity carve outs, going private, leverage buyouts (LBOs), organisational

restructuring, and performance improvement initiatives.

viii. Diversification: Diversification is the process of adding new business to

the company that is distinct its established operations. A diversified or

multibusiness company is thus one that is involved in two or more distinct

industries. Firms go for diversification for reducing non-systematic risk.

Diversification implies growth through the combination of firms in unrelated

business. Such mergers are called conglomerate mergers.

3.1.5 MAJOR CATEGORIES OF CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

As we read in the above that corporate restructuring entails any fundamental

change in a company's business or financial structure, designed to increase the

company's value to shareholders or creditor. Corporate restructuring is often

divided into two parts:

1. Operational restructuring, and

2. Financial restructuring.

1. Operational Restructuring: Operational restructuring is the process of

increasing the economic viability of the underlying business model. Examples

include mergers, the sale of divisions or abandonment of product lines, or cost-

cutting measures such as closing down unprofitable facilities. In most

turnarounds and bankruptcy situations, both financial and operational

restructuring must occur simultaneously to save the business.
2. Financial Restructuring: It relates to improvements in the capital structure of

the firm. Corporate financial restructuring involves restructuring the assets and

liabilities of corporations, including their debt-to-equity structures, in line with

their cash flow needs to promote efficiency, support growth, and maximize the

value to shareholders, creditors and other stakeholders. Otherwise viable firms

under stress it may mean debt rescheduling or equity-for-debt swaps based on

the strength of the firm. If the firm is in bankruptcy, this financial restructuring

is laid out in the plan of reorganization.

These objectives make it sound like restructuring is done pro-actively, that it is

initiated by management or the board of directors. While that is sometimes the

case examples include share buybacks and leveraged recapitalizations more often

the existing structure remains in place until a crisis emerges. Then the motives are

defensive as in defenses against a hostile takeover or distress-induced, where

creditors threaten to enforce their rights.

Financial restructuring may mean refinancing at every level of capital structure,

including:

a. Securing asset-based loans (accounts receivable, inventory, and

equipment)

b. Securing mezzanine and subordinated debt financing

c. Securing institutional private placements of equity

d. Achieving strategic partnering

e. Identifying potential merger candidates

SUMMARY

Restructuring is the corporate management term for the act of partially

dismantling and reorganizing a company for the purpose of making it more

efficient and therefore more profitable. It indicates to a broad array of activities

that expand or contract a firm`s operations or substantially modify its financial
structure or bring about a significant change in its organisational structure and

internal functioning. It includes activities such as mergers, buyouts, takeovers,

business alliances, slump sales, demergers, equity carve outs, going private,

leverage buyouts (LBOs), organisational restructuring, and performance

improvement initiatives.

There are a good number of reasons behind corporate restructuring. The prime

reasons are to: induce higher earnings, leverage core competencies, divestiture

and make business alliances, ensure clarity in vision, strategy and structure,

provide proactive leadership, empowerment of employees, and reengineering

Process.

Business firms engage in a wide range of restructuring activities that include:

expansion, mergers (Amalgamation), purchasing of a Unit or Division or Plant,

takeover, business alliances, sell-off, hive-off, demerger or corporate splits or

division, equity carveout, going private, and leveraged buyout. Apart form these

there are few other also: acquisition, consolidation, absorption, combination,

takeover, reconstruction, restructuring, and diversification.

Corporate restructuring entails any fundamental change in a company's business

or financial structure, designed to increase the company's value to shareholders or

creditor. Corporate restructuring is often divided into two parts: operational

restructuring, and financial restructuring.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1.

What is corporate restructuring? List the characteristics of corporate
restructuring?

2.

Define corporate restructuring? Explain the reasons for corporate
restructuring.

3.

Discuss the motives behind the corporate restructuring.

4.

Discuss in detail the different forms of corporate restructuring.




5.

Write a short notes on:



(a). Acquisition, (b). Reconstruction, (c). Takeover, (d). absorption.

6.

Write a short notes on:



(a). Merger, (b). LBO, (c). Equity carveout, (d). Hive-Off.

7.

In how many categories do you divide the forms of corporate

restructuring? And discuss the categories of corporate restructuring.

8.

What is financial restructuring? Discuss the activities involved in financial

restructuring.

9.

Write a short notes on:



(a). Takeover , (b). Name few forms of business alliances,





(c). Meger, (d). Demerger.

10. Write a short notes on:



(a). Spit-off, (b). Spin-off, (c). Operating Synergy , (d). Going private.

SUGGESTED READINGS

1.

Allen D, An Introduction to Strategic Financial Management, London:

CIMA / Kogan Page.

2.

Verma, J.C., Corporate Mergers, Amalgamations, & Takeovers, New

Delhi: Bhatrat Publishing House, 2002.

3.

Hampton, J.J., Financial Decision Making - Concepts, Problems, and

Cases, New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

4.

Chandra, P., Financial Management ? Theory and Practice, New Delhi:

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2004.

5.

Copeland, T.E., and Weston, J.F., Financial Theory and Corporate

Policy, New York: Addison-Wesley.
6.

Copeland, T., T.Koller, and Murrin, J., Valuation: Measuring and

Managing the Value of Companies, New York: John Wiley

(International Edition).

7.

Sudarsanam, P.S., Essence of Mergers & Acquisitions, New Delhi:

Prentice Hall of India.

Lesson 3.2

MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

After reading this lesion, you should be able to,

? Give the meaning of Mergers and Acquisition.

? Discuss the types of Takeovers.

? Trace out the evolution of Mergers and Acquisitions in India.

? Explain the different types or Forms of Mergers.

? List out and discuss the Reasons for Mergers.

? Discuss the benefits of Mergers.

? Know the motives for Mergers and Acquisitions.

? Understand the impact of Mergers and Acquisitions on Society.

? Compute the costs and Benefits of mergers.

? Determine the forms of Compensation.

? Compute Swap Ratio.

? Discuss the basis for determining Exchange Ratio.

? Know hot to evaluate Merger Proposal (steps involved in mergers).

? Know the tax aspects of Mergers and Amalgamations.

? Know evaluation of Merger as a Capital Budgeting Decision.


STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT

3.2.1

Meaning of Mergers and Acquisition

3.2.2

Evolution Mergers and Acquisitions in India

3.2.3

Forms / types of Mergers

3.2.4

Reasons for Mergers

3.2.5

Benefits of Mergers

3.2.6

Motivators of Mergers

3.2.7

Impact of Mergers on General Public

3.2.8

Costs and Benefits of a Merger

3.2.9

Determination of Forms of Compensation (Cash vs Stock)

3.2.10

Determination of Swap (Exchange Ratio)

3.2.11

Basis for determining the Exchange Ratio

3.2.12

Evaluation of Merger Proposal

3.2.13

Steps for Merger and Amalgamation

3.2.14

Tax aspects of Mergers / Amalgamations

3.2.15

Accounting for Mergers and Acquisitions

3.2.16 Evaluation of a Merger as a Capital Budgeting Decision



A business may grow over time as the utility of its products and services is

recognized. It may also grow through an inorganic process, symbolized by an

instantaneous expansion in work force, customers, infrastructure resources and

thereby an overall increase in the revenues and profits of the entity. Mergers and

acquisitions are manifestations of an inorganic growth process. While mergers
can be defined to mean unification of two players into a single entity, acquisitions

are situations where one player buys out the other to combine the bought entity

with itself. It may be in form of a purchase, where one business buys another or a

management buys out, where the management buys the business from its owners.

Mergers and acquisitions are used as instruments of momentous growth and are

increasingly getting accepted by Indian businesses as critical tool of business

strategy. They are widely used in a wide array of fields such as information

technology, telecommunications, and business process outsourcing as well as in

traditional business to gain strength, expand the customer base, cut competition or

enter into a new market or product segment. Mergers and acquisitions may be

undertaken to access the market through an established brand, to get a market

share, to eliminate competition, to reduce tax liabilities or to acquire competence

or to set off accumulated losses of one entity against the profits of other entity.

Mergers and acquisitions have become a symbol of the new economic world.

Almost every day one reads of a new merger or acquisition doing the rounds of

the corporate circles. It also brings with it complex issues relating to laws and

regulations impacting such M & A decisions.

In today's business scenario, all companies are possible targets for acquisitions or

mergers. As a result knowledge of the laws relating to them is extremely useful.

At the same time they are critical to the health of the businesses and thereby the

shareholders.

3.2.1 MEANING OF MERGERS AND ACQUISITION

The term merger refers to a combination of two or more companies into a single

company where one survives and the others lose their corporate existence. The

acquired company (survivor) acquires the assets as well as liabilities of the

merged company or companies. For example A Ltd. acquires the business of B

Ltd. and C Ltd. The Generally, the company, which survives, is the buyer, which
retains its identity, and the seller company is extinguished. Merger is also defined

as amalgamation. Merger is the fusion of two or more existing companies. All

assets, liabilities and stock of one company stand transferred to Transferee

Company in consideration of payment in the form of equity shares of Transferee

Company or debentures or cash or a mix of the two or three modes.

Acquisition in general sense is acquiring the ownership in the property. In the

context of business combinations, an acquisition is the purchase of by one

company (called the acquiring firm) of a controlling interest in the share capital of

another existing company (called the target). An acquisition may be affected by

(a) agreement with the persons holding majority interest in the company

management like members of the board or major shareholders commanding

majority of voting power; (b) purchase of shares in open market; (c) to make

takeover offer to the general body of shareholders; (d) purchase of new shares by

private treaty; (e) acquisition of share capital of one company may be by either all

or any one of the following form of considerations viz. means of cash, issuance of

loan capital, or insurance of share capital. The effort to control may be a prelude

To a subsequent merger or

To establish a parent-subsidiary relationship or

To break-up the target firm, and dispose off its assets or

To take the target firm private by a small group of investors.

Types of Takeovers There are broadly two kinds of takeover bids or strategies

that can be employed in corporate acquisitions. These include:

(1) Friendly Takeover, and (2) Hostile Takeover.

1. Friendly Takeover: Friendly takeovers are those takeovers that could be

through negotiations, i.e., acquiring company negotiates with the Executives

or BoDs of target firm, and gets their consent for takeover. The acquiring firm

makes a financial proposal to the target firm`s management and board. This
proposal might involve the merger of the two firms, the consolidation of two

firms, or the creation of parent/subsidiary relationship. If both the parties do

not reach to an agreement during negotiation process the proposal of

acquisition stands terminated and dropped out.

2. Hostile Takeover: Hostile takeover is the takeover in which acquiring

company may not offer to target company the proposal to acquire its

undertaking but silently and unilaterally may pursue efforts to gain controlling

interest in it against the wishes of the management. Put in simple, a hostile

takeover may not follow a preliminary attempt at a friendly takeover. For

example, it is not uncommon for an acquiring firm to embrace the target

firm`s management in what is colloquially called a bear hug. There are

various ways in which an acquirer company may pursue the matter to acquire

the controlling interest in a target firm. The various ways of acquirer are

known as "raids" or "takeover raids in the corporate world. The raids when

organized in systematic ways are called "takeover bids".

3.2.2 EVOLUTION MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS IN INDIA

Compelled by the present economic scenario and market trends, corporate

restructuring through mergers, amalgamations, takeovers and acquisitions, has

emerged as the best form of survival and growth. The opening up of the Indian

economy and the government's decision to disinvest has made corporate

restructuring more relevant today.

In the last few years, India has followed the worldwide trends in consolidation

amongst companies through mergers and acquisitions. Companies are being taken

over, units are being hived off, joint ventures tantamount to acquisitions are being

made and so on. It may be reasonably be stated that the quantum of mergers and

acquisitions in the last few years must be more than the corresponding quantum in

the four and a half decades post independence.
Supreme Court of India in the landmark judgment of HLL-TOMCO merger has

said, "in this era of hyper competitive capitalism and technological change,

industrialists have realized that mergers/acquisitions are perhaps the best route to

reach a size comparable to global companies so as to effectively compete with

them. The harsh reality of globalisation has dawned that companies which cannot

compete globally must sell out as an inevitable alternative".

Economic reforms and deregulation of the Indian economy has brought in more

domestic as well as international players in Indian industries. For India economic

reforms and deregulations means increase in competition, which demanded

structural changes of Indian industries. The main restructuring strategy in India is

mergers & acquisition. The first merger and acquisition wave took place in India

towards the end of 1990s. Table 1 shows the number and percentage change in the

number of merger and takeover activities in India from 1988 to 2003. These

mergers and takeover include the realized as well as abortive bids. Table 1 exhibit

Table 1 Number of Merger and Takeover in India from 1988 to 2003

Years

Number

Change in %

1988

15

-

1989

18

20.00

1990

25

38.90

1991

71

184.00

1992

135

90.10

1993

288

113.30

1994

363

26.00

1995

430

18.50

1996

541

25.80

1997

636

17.60

1998

730

14.80

1999

765

04.79

2000

1,177

53.86
2001

1,045

- 11.21

2002

838

- 19.81

2003

834

- 0.48

Source: Collated from various newspapers including business dailies,

various issues and also Monthly Review of the Indian Economy,

CMIE, various issues.

a sharp rise in the overall merger and acquisition activity in the Indian corporate

sector. While there were 58 mergers and takeover from 1988 to 1990, the number

rose to 71 in 1991 and 730 in 1998. There was a jump in the number of merger

and takeover activities in India from 1988 to 1993, the average rate of increase

being around 89 per cent for the five-year period. Since then the rate of rise had

maintained an average of 20.5 per cent. After 2001 year the M&A trend has

shown declining. But there was substantial growth in the year 2000-01, with the

total number of M&As deals 1,177, which is 54 percent higher than the previous

year total deals.

3.2.3 FORMS / TYPES OF MERGERS

Mergers or acquisition types depend upon the offeror company`s objectives,

profiles, combinations which it wants to achieve. What ever may be the technical

differences between mergers, acquisitions, and amalgamations, mergers can

usually distinguished into the following three types: (1) Horizontal Mergers, (2)

Vertical Mergers, and (3) Conglomerate Mergers.

1. Horizontal Mergers: This type of merger involves when two or more

competitive firms that operate and compete in a similar kind of business and

same stage of industrial process. The merger is based on the assumption that it

will provide economies of scale from the larger combined unit, it eliminates

competition, thereby putting an end to price cutting wars, possibility of starting

R&D, effective marketing and management. For example in the Aerospace

industry, Boeing merged with McDonald Douglass to create the World`s largest
aerospace company. Another Compaq acquired Digital Equipment and then

itself was acquired by Hewlett Packard. Glaxo Wellcome Plc. and SmithKline

Beecham Plc. Mega merger. The two British pharmaceutical heavy weights

Glaxo Wellcome PLC and SmithKline Beecham PLC early this year announced

plans to merge resulting in the largest drug manufacturing company globally.

The merger created a company valued at $182.4 billion and with a 7.3 per cent

share of the global pharmaceutical market. The merged company expected $1.6

billion in pretax cost savings after three years. The two companies have

complementary drug portfolios, and a merger would let them pool their research

and development funds and would give the merged company a bigger sales and

marketing force.

2. Vertical Mergers: Vertical mergers take place between firms in different

stages of production/operation, either as forward or backward integration. It

occurs when a firm acquires upstream` from it and or firms downstream` from

it. Upstream stream merger extends to the firms supplying raw materials and to

those firms that sell eventually to the customers in the event of a downstream

merger. The basic reason is to eliminate costs of searching for prices,

contracting, lower distribution cost, payment collection and advertising and may

also reduce the cost of communicating and coordinating production and also

have assured supplies and market, increasing or creating barriers to entry for

potential competitors.

Unlike horizontal mergers, which have no specific timing, vertical mergers take

place when both firms plan to integrate the production process and capitalise on

the demand for the product. Forward integration take place when a raw material

supplier finds a regular procurer of its products while backward integration

takes place when a manufacturer finds a cheap source of raw material supplier.

For example Merger of Usha Martin and Usha Beltron. Usha Martin and Usha

Beltron merged their businesses to enhance shareholder value, through business
synergies. The merger will also enable both the companies to pool resources

and streamline business and finance with operational efficiencies and cost

reduction and also help in development of new products that require synergies.

3. Conglomerate Mergers: Conglomerate mergers are affected among firms that

are in different or unrelated business activity. In other words, firms engaged in

two different / unrelated business activities combine together. Firms opting for

conglomerate merger control a range of activities in various industries that

require different skills in the specific managerial functions of research, applied

engineering, production, marketing and so on. This type of diversification can

be achieved mainly by external acquisition and mergers and is not generally

possible through internal development. The basic purpose of such merger is to

effective utilization of unutilized financial resources and enlarge debt capacity

through re-organising their financial structure so as to maximize shareholders

earnings per share (EPS), lowering the cost of capital and thereby raising

maximizing value of the firm and the share price. Mergers enhance the overall

stability of the acquirer company and create balance in the company`s total

portfolio of diverse products and production processes. These types of mergers

are also called concentric mergers. Firms operating in different geographic

locations also proceed with these types of mergers. Conglomerate mergers have

been further sub-divided into: (a) Financial Conglomerates, (b) Managerial

Conglomerates, and (c) Concentric Companies

a. Financial Conglomerates: These conglomerates provide a flow of funds to

every segment of their operations, exercise control and are the ultimate

financial risk takers. They not only assume financial responsibility and control

but also play a chief role in operating decisions. They also improve risk-return

ratio; reduce risk; improve the quality of general and functional managerial

performance; provide effective competitive process; provide distinction
between performance based on underlying potentials in the product market

area and results related to managerial performance.

b. Managerial Conglomerates: Managerial conglomerates provide managerial

counsel and interaction on decisions thereby, increasing potential for

improving performance. When two firms of unequal managerial competence

combine, the performance of the combined firm will be greater than the sum

of equal parts that provide large economic benefits.

c.Concentric Conglomerates: The primary difference between managerial

conglomerate and concentric company is its distinction between respective

general and specific management functions. The merger is termed as

concentric when there is a carry-over of specific management functions or any

complementarities in relative strengths between management functions.

4. Other types: Apart form the above-discussed three (Horizontal, vertical, and

conglomerate) types of mergers the following are the few others forms of

mergers:

a. Within Stream Mergers: This type of mergers take place when subsidiary

company merges with parent company or parent company merges with

subsidiary company. The former type of merger is known as ,,Down stream

merger, whereas the latter is known as Up stream merger. For example,

recently, ICICI Ltd., a parent company has merged with its subsidiary ICICI

Bank signifying down stream merger. Instance of up stream merger is the

merger of Bhadrachelam Paper Board, subsidiary company with the parent

ITC Ltd., and like.

b.Circular Combination: Companies producing distinct products seek

amalgamation to share common distribution and R&D facilities to obtain

economies by elimination of cost on duplication and promoting market

enlargement. The acquiring company obtains benefits in the form of

economies of resource sharing and diversification.
c. Cross Boarder Merger: It takes place between or among companies

belonging to different countries of the world. In the globalized era this type of

merger or acquisitions become common. The business houses from France

Germany, Holland, and Japan have been very active in acquisitions of

companies in different parts of the world. This Type of mergers takes place

due to the benefits like globalisation of markets for many products, away from

competition in the home market, explosion of technology, and massive

investments in R&D.

3.2.4 REASONS FOR MERGERS

Why do mergers take place? It is believed that mergers and acquisitions are

strategic decisions or corporate level decisions that are leading to maximization of

a company`s growth by enhancing its production capacity and marketing

operations. In other words, the basic purpose of merger is to achieve faster growth

of the corporate business. Faster growth may be had through product

improvement and competitive position i.e. enhanced profitability through

enhanced production and efficient distribution of goods and services or by

expanding the scope of the enterprise through empire building through

acquisition of other corporate units.

They have become popular in the recent times because of increased competition,

breaking of trade barriers, free flow of capital across countries and liberalization,

globalisation, and privatization of business as a number of economies are being

deregulated and integrated with other economies.

There are a good number of reasons attributed for the occurrence of mergers and

acquisitions. Corporate mergers and acquisitions take place with a view to:

1. Leverage the benefit of synergetic operating economies,

2. Diversification of business risk and maintain stability in earnings,

3. Get the benefit of tax shield,
4. Have faster growth of business and income,

5. Have the benefits of effective managerial,

6. Acquire specific assets,

7. Limit or elimination of competition,

8. Effective utilization of under-utilised assets,

9. Utilise surplus financial resources,

10. Displace existing management,

11. Circumvent government regulations,

12. Reap speculative gains attendant upon new security issue or change P/E

Ratio,

13. Create an image of aggressiveness and strategic opportunity, empire

building and to amass vast economic powers of the economy.

The above listed are few of the reasons for a merger.

3.2.5 BENEFITS OF MERGERS

As we have read in the above that there are three main types of mergers. Why do

corporations merge? It is believed that mergers and acquisitions are taking place

with the objective of maximization of company`s growth by enhancing its

production and marketing operations. The major benefits of a merger or

acquisition are:

1. Synergy

Synergy means working together. Synergy results from complementary activities.

Increase in effective value is one of the prime reasons for mergers or acquisitions.

For example, one company may have more profitable investment opportunities,

while the other may have huge financial resources. Here synergy benefits are

arrived only when these two companies with more investment opportunities and

huge financial resources are merged. Other wise the two firms may be able earn
low profit, because of lack of investment opportunities or lack of financial

resources. When the two firms with different complementary skills they can

create more value which is higher than the sum of individual firms profits without

merger. Generally synergy value in positive and this is the reason for mergers. For

example, Merger of Hindustan Computers, Hindustan Reprographics, Hindustan

Telecommunications, and Indian Computer Software Company into HCL Limited

exhibited synergy in transfer of technology and resources to enable the company

to cut down imports of components at a fabulous duty of 198 per cent.

Illustration: There are two firms Bharat Ltd and Hindustan Ltd are planning to

merge, whose per-merger values are Rs.420 lakhs, and Rs. 200 lakhs. They are

merging with the objective of savings with present value of Rs.50 lakhs. For

acquiring Hindustan Ltd. Firm Bharat Ltd will be required to pay Rs.220 lakhs

(consisting of Rs. 180 lakhs in the form of equity shares and Rs.40 lakhs in the

form of cash). Besides the purchase consideration the Bharath Ltd. need to incur

acquisition cost of Rs. 10 lakhs. Determine the value of the gain, costs, and net

gain from merger.

Solution: Gain is Rs. 40 lakhs

Cost = Purchase Value + Acquisition cost ? Pre-merger value of Hindustan Ltd.

Cost = Rs. 220 lakhs + Rs.10 lakhs ? Rs.200 lakhs.

= Rs. 30 lakhs.

Net Gain = Expected savings ? Cost;

= Rs.40 lakhs ? Rs.30 lakhs; = Rs.10 lakhs.

2. Increase in Effective Value

Value of the firm increases when a firm acquires the assets of another firm. For

example, P Ltd and Q Ltd merge and form a new company R Ltd, then the

effective value of the R Ltd is expected to be greater than the sum of the P Ltd.
and Q Ltd. This is because of the synergy benefits. Reliance Industries has highest

value of assets, which is possible after acquiring Larsen and Tubro.

3. Economies of Scale

Economies of scale are unit cost reductions associated with a large scale of

output. Manufacturing in large scale is possible when two or more companies

combine. The economies of scale is possible because of intensive utilization of

production capacities, distribution network, engineering services, research &

development facilities, etc. economies of scale of generally possible in the case of

horizontal mergers with the objective of intensive utilization of resources. There

are no economies of scale in case of vertical mergers, but they take place with the

objective of improved coordination of activities, lower inventory levels, and

higher market power of the combined company. On the other hand conglomerate

mergers helps in reducing or elimination of certain overhead expenses. But the

benefits of economies of scale are available up to a certain level of operations

beyond which the per unit average cost increases. Put in simple the economies of

scale are available only at optimal level of operations, at which the average cost

per unit is minimum.

4.Economies of Scope

When two or more business units in different industries share resources such as

manufacturing facilities, distribution channels, advertising campaigns, R&D cost,

they may be able to realize economies of scope: the cost reductions associated

with sharing resources across businesses. For example Procter & Gamble can

enjoy economies of scope if it acquire a consumer product company that benefits

from its highly regarded marketing skills and also helps in obtaining the benefits

of economies of scale.

5. Fast Growth

A merger often enables the amalgamating firm to grow at a faster rate than is

possible thorough internal expansion, because acquiring company enters into a
new market quickly, avoids the time required to build new plant, and establishing

new product lines. In other words, internal growth requires quite lengthy period it

need to establish R&D, develop new product, market penetration and setting up a

totally new administration.

6. Tax Benefits

Certain mergers take place just to get the benefit of tax shields. Tax benefits are

available for a firm, which acquires a firm that is running with cumulative losses

or unabsorbed depreciation. The firm with accumulated losses or unabsorbed

depreciation may not be able to get the benefit of tax shield. Section 72A of

Income Tax Act, 1961 provides tax shield incentive for reverse mergers for the

survival of sick units. However, when it merges with a profit-making firm, its

accumulated losses can be set off against the profits of the profit-making firm and

tax benefits can be quickly realized. An example of a merger to reduce tax

liability is the absorption of Ahmedabad Cotton Mills Limited (ACML) by

Arbind Mills in 1979. ACML was closed in August 1977 due to labor problem.

At the time of merger in April 1979, saved about Rs.2 crore in tax liability for the

next two years after the merger because it could set-off ACML`s accumulated

loss against its profits.

Illustration: Dream well Company acquires Well Do Company. At the date of

acquisition the accumulated losses of Well Do Company are Rs.500 lakhs. Dream

Well Company is running with a profit record due to the well-experienced

management. The expected earnings before tax of Dream Well Company over

three year period are Rs.150 lakhs, Rs.250 lakhs, and Rs.350 lakhs for the years

1,2, and 3 respectively. Determine the present value of tax gains to accrue on

account of merger to Dream Well Company, if the company is in the tax bracket

of 35 per cent and 12 per cent discount rate.




Solution: Present Value of Tax Gain

Years (Rs. In lakhs)

Particulars

1

2

3

Earnings Before Tax

150

250

350

Less: Recovery of Loss

150

250

100*

Tax Benefit (Recovery of Loss x Tax Rate)

52.5

87.5

35.0

Present Value Factor at 12 per cent

0.893

0.797

0.712

Present Value of Tax Shield

46.8825

69.7375

24.92

Total Present Value of Tax benefit to Dream Well Company

144.54



* (Rs.500 lakhs accumulated loss of firm Well Do Company ? Rs.150

lakhs, Rs.250 lakhs loss adjusted in the year 1 and 2 respectively).

7. Limiting or Elimination of Competition

Some times elimination or limiting of competition may be the prime motive for

merger or acquisition. Competition may lead to cut thought competition, which

will benefit the consumer. Any two or more firms that are competing in the

market with similar product, by price-cutting strategy can opt for merger or

acquiring, there by making monopoly or limiting competition they can be better

off. For example, now there is price war going on among Arial, Excel and Tide

detergent soap and powers, and consumers are getting the benefits reducing

prices. The firms that are manufacturing these products can go for merger or

acquisition, by which they definitely avoid competition among them and they can

limit the competition in the industry.

8. Stabilisation through Diversification

Diversification is another major reason or advantage in the case of conglomerate

mergers. Merger between two companies, which are unrelated businesses, would

be able to reduce the risk, increase rate of return on investment, and thereby

increase market value of the firm. In other words, conglomerate mergers helps in

stabilizing or smoothen overall corporate income, which would otherwise
fluctuate due to seasonal or economic cycles or product life cycle stages. In

operational terms, the greater the combination of statistically independent, or

negatively correlated businesses or income streams of the merged companies, the

higher will be the reduction in the business risk and greater will be the benefit of

diversification or vice versa.

An example of diversification through mergers to reduce total risk and improve

profitability is that RPG Enterprises of Goenka Group. The group started its

takeover activity in 1979. It comprises of a large number of companies, most of

which have been takeover. The strategy has been to look out for any foreign

disinvestments, or any cases of sick companies, which could prove right targets at

low takeover prices. In 1988, RPG took over ICIM and Harrison`s Malayalam

Limited. Acquiring ICIM has provided an easy access to the electronics industry.

9. Utilisation of Surplus Funds

There are four product lifecycles such as introduction, growth, maturity, and

decline. A firm may need more funds in the initial stage for managing the cycle

that is less profitable or not profitable, and growth stage also need funds for

acquiring resources assets for managing the growth. But firm may have lot of

funds in the maturity stage, and may not have profitable investment opportunities.

Such a firm generally distributes dividends generously and even buys back its

shares, if it is possible. However, most managements` of corporate have the

practice of investing the surplus funds on investments, even though they are not

profitable. In such a case, a merger with another firm involving cash

compensation often represents a more efficient utilization of surplus funds.

10.Managerial Effectiveness

There are cases where firms interested to merge with another company with the

idea of getting benefit through managerial effectiveness. This is one of the

potential gains of mergers is an increase in managerial effectiveness. This may
happen if a more effective management team replaces the existing management

team, which is performing poorly. Often, a company, with managerial

inadequacies, can gain immensely from the superior management that is likely to

emerge as a sequel to the merger. Having greater congruence between the

interests of managers and the shareholders is another benefit of merger.

11.Lowring the Finance Cost

Merger helps in larger size operations and greater earnings capacity. This will

help in reducing the cost of borrowing for merged firm. Because creditors are

merged with merged firm and they enjoy better protection than the creditors of the

merging firms independently. Generally when there is high and additional

protection reduces the cost of debt, and imposes the cost of equity, by imposing

additional burden on equity shareholders. There is benefit in the form of finance

cost only when the reduction in cost of debt is higher than the increase in equity

cost. Another aspect of the financing costs is issue cost. A merged firm is able to

realize the economies of scale in flotation and transaction costs related to an issue

of capital. Issue costs are saved when the merged firm makes a larger security

issue.

3.2.6 MOTIVATORS OF MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS

Corporate restructuring in the form of merges or acquisitions are generally

motivated by equity shareholders, managers, and the promoters of the combining

companies. The following paragraphs make us clear about the factors that

motivate the shareholders, managers, and promoters to lend support to these

mergers and acquisitions:

1. Equity Shareholders

As you might have observed that the share price of a company goes up in the

secondary market, when there is news about the company`s future plans on

mergers or acquisitions. Generally investors invest their surplus funds on a
company`s equity, with the expectation of increase in share price thereby

maximizing their value. Sometimes investors move from one company to another

company, which is planning to restructure in the form of merger or acquisition.

Shareholders may gain from mergers in different ways viz. from the gains and

achievement of the company through maximization of profits by creating

monopoly, economies of scale, minimizing risk by diversification of product line,

acquisition of intellectual assets (human capital) which are not available

otherwise, and better investment opportunity in combinations. These are the few

factors that motivate shareholders to support mergers or acquisitions, but they

may not be completely generalised for all mergers or acquisitions. However, one

or more factors would generally available in each merger or acquisition, which

will motivate the shareholders to support mergers or acquisitions,

2. Managers

Managers here we mean all the people who are working at middle level and at

higher level. In other they include BoDs, managers at all functional levels. BoDs

have been elected by equity shareholders of the company, and assigned the

responsibility of managing the company, who in turn appoint other employees

whose support is need for managing the company. Managers are concerned with

improving of the operations of the company, managing the affairs of the company

effectively for all round gains and growth of the company. Effective management

of the company`s operations and all round growth provides the managers better

deals through raising their status, raising their perks and fringe benefits, placing

their relatives in the organization, and by proving them as talented managers.

Some times before getting support from managers to mergers or acquisitions there

is a need to assure guaranteed benefits to them. But sometimes they may not

support the restructuring activity when they think that they are going to be

displaced at the hands of new management in amalgamated company and

resultant depreciation from merger or acquisition.
3.Promoters

Promoters are those people who have stated or promoted an organization.

Generally promoters of private companies are benefited with the mergers of a

public company. Managers do offer to company promoters the advantage of

increasing the size of their company as well as financial structure and strength.

Managers help the promoters in converting their closely held and private limited

company into a public company without contributing much wealth and without

losing control over the company. Take a merger of Jaiprakash Industries, which

was formed out of merger of Jaiprakash Associates and Jay Pee Rawa Cement.

Jayaprakash Associates was a closely held company. The merger enabled the

promoters of Jaiprakash Associates to have a stake at 60 per cent worth Rs.39.85

crores, in Jaiprakash Industries Limited against an investment of just Rs.4.5 crore

in Jaiprakash Associates. Thus the merger invariably results into monetary gains

for the promoters and their associates in the surviving company.

Another example, take the Merger of Hindustan Computers, Hindustan

Reprographics, Hindustan Telecommunications, and Indian Computer Software

Company into HCL Limited exhibited synergy in transfer of technology and

resources to enable the company to cut down imports of components at a fabulous

duty of 198 per cent. In this merger Hindustan Reprographics was the only one

public company and the remaining three merging organisations were private

limited companies. The promoters of Hindustan Computers were allotted equity

shares worth Rs. 1.27 crores on merger in a new company called HCL Limited.

This gave the promoters of Hindustan Computers an 86 per cent stake in HCL`s

equity worth of Rs.1.48 crores. This gain was against the original investment of

meager Rs.40 lakhs in Hindustan Computers and they did not invest any extra

money in getting shares worth Rs 1.48 crores.


3.2.7 IMPACT OF MERGERS ON GENERAL PUBLIC

The word restructure particularly merger has been symbolic with conflict,

dislocation and economic and financial pain or gain. It is largely perceived in

terms of its external consequences for investors, employees, competitors,

suppliers, and host communities. The impact of mergers on general public could

be viewed as aspects of benefits and costs to, (1) Consumers, (2) Workers or

Employees, and (3) General Public.

1. Consumers

Mergers are beneficial to the consumers of products or services, only when the

merger realized economic (i.e., enhanced economies, and diversification which

lead to manufacture better quality products at lower prices) gains. These

economic benefits are transferred to the consumers in the form of lowers prices,

and better quality products or services, which directly raise their standard of

living and quality of life. While mergers are going to be costly when they create

monopoly or minimize competition among companies. Creating monopoly or

limiting competition leads to produce low quality products or provides low

quality services like after sales services at reasonably high prices.

2. Workers

Workers or employees community would be benefited from merger or acquisition

only when the restructuring helps in satisfying their demands, in the form of

employment, increased wages, improved working environment, better living

conditions and amenities. But the merger or acquisition of a company by a

conglomerate or other acquiring company may have the effect on both sides of

increasing welfare in the form of enhanced quality of life or it also decrease the

welfare in the form of retrenchment of some employees, which would result

purchasing power and makes their life miserable one.


3. General Public

As we have read in the above that mergers or acquisitions create monopoly or

limit the competition. This will ultimately lead to centralized concentration of

power in small number of corporate leaders, which results in the concentration of

an economic aggregation of economic power in their hands. Here economic

power means, the ability to control products` prices and industries output as

monopolists. Generally such monopoly affects social and political environment to

lean everything in their favor with objective of maintaining power and expand

their business empire. This advances lead to economic exploitation.

But in a free economy a monopolist does not stay for a long period as other

corporate enter into this field to reap the benefits of high prices set in by the

monopolist. Entry of new companies in this business enforces competition in the

market, which will help to consumers to substitute the alternative products.

Therefore mergers or acquisitions costly to the public only when creation of

monopoly and possibility of entry of new companies in that business area.

Put in simple mergers are dangerous, when they elimination of healthy

competition; concentration of economic power; and adverse effects on national

economy. However, mergers are essential for the fast growth of the organisations.

At the same time the dangers of mergers are more than off-set by advantages of

mergers. This is possible only when every merger or acquisition proposal must

be examined keeping in view the advantages and dangers, there by allowing

mergers or acquisitions that help to a group of stakeholders.

3.2.8 COSTS AND BENEFITS OF A MERGER

When a company A` acquires another company say B`, then it is a capital

investment decision for company A` and it is a capital disinvestment decision for

company B. Thus, both the companies need to calculate the Net Present Value

(NPV) of their decisions.
To calculate the NPV to company A` there is a need to calculate the benefit and

cost of the merger. The benefit of the merger is equal to the difference between

the value of the combined identity (PVAB) and the sum of the value of both firms
as a separate entity. It can be expressed as Benefit = (PVAB) ? (PVA+ PVB)

Basis for Computation of NPV of Acquirer and Acquiree

(A). Cash compensation, or (B) Compensation in Stock.

But there is important difference between cash and stock compensation. If the

compensation is pain in the form of cash, the cost of the acquisition is

independent of the gains of the acquisition. On the other hand, if the

compensation paid in the form of stock, the cost of the acquisition is dependent on

the gains of the acquisition. This can be seen in the following illustrations.

(A) NPV of A and B in case the Compensation is in Cash:

Assuming that compensation to firm B is paid in cash, the cost of the merger from

the point of view of firm A can be calculated as: Cost = Cash - PVB

The net present value of the merger for the firm A is the difference between the

benefit and the cost as defined above. So

NPV for A Company = Benefit ? Cost

= [(PVAB ? (PVA + PVB)] ? [(Cash ? PVB)]


= PVAB ? PVA ? Cash

The net present value of the merger from the point of view of firm B is the same

as the cost of the merger for A`. Hence,

NPV to B = (Cash - PVB)

Illustration: Firm A has a value of Rs. 1,00,00,000 and Firm B has a value of

Rs.25, 00,000. If the two firms merge, cost savings with a present value of Rs.25,

00,000 would occur. Firm A proposes to offer Rs. 30,00,000 cash compensation

to acquire Firm B. Calculate the net present value (NPV) of the merger to the two

firms.
Solution: Given Values are: PVA: Rs.1, 00,00,000; PVB: Rs.25, 00,000;

PVAB: Rs.1, 50,00,000 (i.e., PVA+ PVB + PV of cost savings); Cash: Rs.30,

00,000.

i. Cost of Acquiring Firm B = Cash - PVB

= Rs.30, 00,000 ? Rs.25, 00,000 = Rs.5, 00,000

ii . Benefit of Acquiring Firm B = PVAB ? (PVA + PVB)]

= Rs.1, 50,00,000 ? (Rs.1, 00,00,000 + Rs.25, 00,000) = Rs.25, 00,000

iii. NPV for A Firm = Benefit ? Cost





= Rs.25, 00,000 ? Rs.5, 00,000 = Rs.20, 00,000

iv. NPV for B Firm = Cash ? PVB





= Rs.30, 00,000 ? Rs.25, 00,000 = Rs.5, 00,000

(B) NPV of A and B in case the Compensation is in Stock:

In the above scenario we assumed that compensation is paid in cash, however in

real life compensation is usually paid in terms of stock. In that case, cost of the

merger needs to be calculated carefully. It is explained with the help of an

illustration

Illustration: Firm A plans to acquire firm B. Following are the statistics of firms

before the merger ?

Particulars

A

B

Market price per share (Rs.)

50

20

Number of Shares

2,50,000

1,25,000

Market value of the firm (Rs.)

1, 25,00,000

25, 00,000

The merger is expected to bring gains, which have a PV of Rs.25, 00,000. Firm A

offers 62,500 shares in exchange for 1,25,000 shares to the shareholders of firm

B. Calculate the net present value (NPV) of the merger to the two firms.




Solution: i. Cost of acquiring Firm B in this case is defined as

Cost = Offered Shares x Market Price of Firm A`s Share x Market Value of Firm
B

= 62,500 Shares x Rs.50 per Shares ? Rs, 25,00,000
= Rs. 6,25,000

The true cost, however, is higher than Rs..6,25,000. While calculating the true
cost evaluator must recognize that Firm B`s shareholders end up owning a
fraction of the share capital of the combined Firm. The cost in this case is defined
as ?

Cost = PVAB - PVB

Where:

Represents the fraction of the combined entity received by shareholders of B.

In the above example, the share of B in the combined entity is ?

= 62,500 / (2,50,000 + 62,500) = 0.2

Assuming that the market value of the combined entity will be equal to the sum of

present value of the separate entities and the benefit of merger. Then,

PVAB = PVA+PVB+Benefit =1,25,00,000+ 25,00,000 + 25,00,000 =
Rs.1, 75,00,000

Cost = PVAB - PVB

= 0.2 x Rs.1, 75,00,000 ? 25,00,000 = Rs.10, 00,000

Thus NPV to A = Benefit ? Cost

= 25,00,000 ? Rs. 10,00,000 = Rs.15, 00,000

NPV to B = Cost to A = Rs.10, 00,000.
3.2.9 DETERMINATION OF FORM OF COMPENSATION (CSAH Vs

STOCK)

When a firm is planning to acquire another firm it is very important to determine

the form of compensation. The compensation may be paid in the form of cash or

stock. Determination of the form of compensation depends on the following four

factors. (1) Overvaluation, (2) Taxes, (3) Sharing of Risks and Rewards, and (4)

Discipline.
1. Overvaluation: Cash form of compensation is less costly and it is preferable

when the acquiring firm`s stock is overvalued relative to the target or acquired

firm`s stock. On the other hand stock form of compensation is less costly and

it is preferable when the acquiring firm`s stock is under valued relative to the

target or acquired firm`s stock.

2. Taxes: Acquired firm`s shareholders are required to pay tax if they receive

compensation in the form of cash. On the other hand payment of tax is not

necessary if the acquired frim`s pays compensation in the form of stock. Here

generally acquiring firm need to find the acquired or target firm`s majority

shareholders` preferred form of compensation.

3. Sharing of Risks and Rewards: Payment of compensation in the form of cash

does not allow the target firm`s shareholders to share risk and return of the

merger, because they are not the owners of the combined firm. On the other

hand, payment of compensation in the form of cash allows the target firm`s

shareholders to share the risk and return of the merger, since they are

becoming the owners in the combined firm.

4. Discipline: Empirical evidence suggests that acquiring another firm by paying

compensation in the form of cash tend to succeed more compared to the

acquiring another firm by paying compensation in the form of stock. This is

because acquiring firm perceives that acquiring firm by paying cash

compensation is more risky compared to stock compensation. In the corporate

language this is called discipline, in such case the buyers are more disciplined,

circumspect, and rigorous in their evaluation.

3.2.10 DETERMINATION OF SWAP (EXCHANGE RATIO)

Calculation of Exchange Ratio from the perspective of the acquired and the

acquiring firm
Whenever a Firm A` acquires another Firm B`, the compensation to the

shareholders of the acquired firm is usually paid in the form of shares of the

acquiring firm. In other words, shares of Firm A will be given in exchange for

shares of Firm B. Thus, the exchange ratio is a very important factor in any kind

of merger. Firm A will want to keep this ratio as low as possible, while Firm B

will want it to be as high as possible. Larson and Gonedes developed a model for

exchange ratio determination. Their model holds that both firms would ensure

that post merger; their equivalent price per share will at least equal their pre-

merger price per share. Their model has been presented in somewhat simpler

terms by Conn and Nielson for determining the exchange ratio. The symbols used

in this model are:

ER = Exchange ratio

P = Price per share

EPS = Earning per share

PE = Price earning multiple

E = Earnings



S = Number of outstanding equity

shares

AER = Actual exchange ratio

In addition, the acquiring, acquired and combined firms will be referred to by

subscripts A, B and AB respectively.

Firm A would ensure that the wealth of its shareholders is preserved. This implies

that the price per share of the combined firm is at least equal to the price per share

of firm A before merger:

PAB >= PA

For the sake of simplicity consider that P AB =P A

The market price per share of the combined firm is expressed as the product of

Price earnings ratio of the combined firm and Earnings per share of the combined

firm: P AB = (PE AB ) (EPS AB ) = P A



------- (1)

Earnings per share of the combined firm can be expressed as:
EPS AB = (E A + EB ) / [S A + S B (ER A )]

------- (2)

In equation 2 ER A represents number of shares of Firm A given in lieu of one

share of Firm B.

Substituting formula of EPS AB in equation 1 we get ?

P A = (PE AB ) (E A +EB) / [S A +S B (ER A)]

From the above equation, we may solve for the value of ER A as follows:

ER A = (- S A / S B ) + [(E A +E B) PE AB] / P A S B

Illustration: The following relevant information for Firm A and Firm B.

Determine the maxi. change ratio if PE ratio for combined firm is 3, 9, 10, 11, 12,

15, and 20.

Particulars

Firm A (Rs.)

Firm B (Rs.)

Market price per share ? P

12

4

Earnings per share ? EPS

1

0.5

Price / earnings ratio ? PE (Times)

6

4

Total earnings ? E

90,00,000

30,00,000

Number of outstanding equity shares - S

45,00,000

30,00,000

Solution: Maximum Exchange Ratio for Firm A:

ER A = (- S A / S B ) + [(E A +E B) PE AB] / P A S B

= (- 45,00,000 / 30,00,000 ) + [(Rs.90,00,000+Rs. 30,00,000)PE AB] /

12(30,00,000)

= (- 1.5) + [(Rs.1,20,00,000)PE AB] / 3,60,00,000

= - 1.5 + 0.333(PE AB)

ER AB

3

9

10

11

12

15

20

Max. ER A

0.5

1.497

1.83

2.16

2.496

3.495

5.16

After discussing the maximum exchange ratio acceptable to the shareholders of

Firm A above, we will now calculate the minimum exchange ratio acceptable to

the Firm B (ER B)
The basic condition is: P AB (ER B) P B ---------- (3)

Using the equality form of above equation and substituting P AB from equation 1

in equation 3 we get (PE AB) (EPSAB ) (ERB) = P B

Substituting the value of EPS AB from equation 2 in the above equation, and

solving the equation for ER B we get:

ER B = (P B S A ) / [(PE AB) (E A + E B) ? P B S B]

Illustration: The following relevant information for Firm A and Firm B.

Determine the mini. change ratio if PE ratio for combined firm is 3, 9, 10, 11, 12,

15, and 20.

Particulars

Firm A (Rs.)

Firm B (Rs.)

Market price per share ? P

12

4

Earnings per share ? EPS

1

0.5

Price / earnings ratio ? PE (Times)

6

4

Total earnings ? E

90,00,000

30,00,000

Number of outstanding equity shares - S

45,00,000

30,00,000

Solution: Minimum Exchange Ratio for Firm B:

ER B = (P B S A ) / [(PE AB) (E A + E B) ? P B S B]

= (4 / 45,00,000) / [(PE AB) (90,00,000+Rs. 30,00,000) ? (4) (30,00,000)

= 1,80,00,000 / [(PE AB) (Rs.1, 20,00,000) ? 1,20,00,000

= 1,80,00,000 / [(PE AB) - 0

= 1.5 / [(PE AB) - 0

ER AB

3

9

10

11

12

15

20

Max. ER Ab

0.5

0.167

0.15

0.136

0.125

0.10

0.075

3.2.11 BASIS FOR DETERMINING THE EXCHANGE RATIO

When a firm plans to acquire two or more firms, acquiring firm need to

pay some financial compensation to the target firm(s). Typically, acquiring firm

offers its shares in exchange for the target firm`s shares. Then how many shares

of acquiring firm should be offered to target firm? The number of shares to be
offered depends on the exchange ratio. Exchange ratio (swap ratio) is the number

of shares the acquiring firm is willing to give in exchange for one share of the

target firm. For example take swap ratio of IOC-IBP merger, The Indian Oil

Corporation (IOC) was approved a share swap ratio 125:100, that is 125 equity

shares of IOC would be offered for every 100 equity shares of IBP, for merging

its subsidiary IBP Co with itself. This ratio was offered due to the amalgamation

that will help it save about Rs. 45 crores annually in overhead expenses. At the

same time the merger will increase the IOC market share to 61 per cent.

How the swap ratio or exchange ratio is determined? What are the bases on which

the exchange ratio is determined? The following are the commonly used bases for

determining the exchange ratio:

1. Earnings per share (EPS) or Earnings approach,

2. Market price per share (MPS) or Market value approach,

3. Book value per share (BVPS) or Book value approach, and

4. Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) Value Per Share (DCF PS)

1. Earnings Per Share (EPS) or Earnings Approach

Under this base EPS of acquiring firm and target firm are considered for

determining exchange ratio. EPS of target firm is divided by the EPS of acquiring

firm for getting swap ratio. For example, Firm A is planning to acquire Firm B,

and it is negotiated with the executive of Firm B and came to an understanding

that the exchange ratio is determined based on the both firms EPS. The EPS of

Firm A is Rs. 8, and Firm B is Rs.4. The exchange ratio is 0.5 (i.e., Rs.4 / Rs.8).

It indicates that half a share of acquiring Firm A will be exchanged for one share

of target Firm B. In other words for every 2 shares of target Firm B one share of

Firm A is offered. EPS base is right base because EPS reflect prima facie the

earning power. But is suffers some limitations. They are it ignore the differences

in growth rate of earnings of the two firms, ignores the gains in earnings arising
out of merger, ignores the differential risks associated with the earnings of the

two firms.

2. Market Price Per Share (MPS) or Market Value Approach

Under this approach exchange ratio is determined based on relative market prices

of the shares of the acquiring firm and target firm. Market price per share of

target firm is divided by market price per share of acquiring firm for getting swap

ratio. Market price per share is determined by the following formulae:

Market Price per share = Earnings Per Share (EPS) ? Capitalisation Rate

For example, Firm A is planning to acquire Firm B, and it is negotiated with the

executive of Firm B and came to an understanding that the exchange ratio is

determined based on the relative market price per share. Acquiring Firm A` s

shares sell for Rs. 100, and target Firm B` s shares sell for Rs.30. The exchange

ratio is 0.3 (i.e., Rs.30 / Rs.100). In other words for 3 shares of the acquiring Firm

A will be exchanged for every 10 shares of target Firm B.

Determination of exchange ratio based on the relative market price per share is

definitely appropriate one, only when the both firms` shares are actively traded in

a competitive market. But when trading is meager, market prices may not be

reliable and it may be difficult to identify market price when the shares are not

traded. Market price is not available if the any of the firms` shares are not quoted

at a stock exchange. If it is quoted it may be difficult to identify the right price

since they keep on fluctuating, and those who have vested interest may

manipulate market prices.

3. Book Value Per Share (BVPS) or Book Value Approach

Here relative book value per share of the two firms may be used for determining

exchange ratio. Book value per share of target firm is divided by the book value

per share of acquiring firm for getting swap ratio. Book value (BV)per share is

determined by the following formulae:
BV per share=Shareholders` Funds or Net worth ? No. of outstanding equity

shares

For example, Firm A is planning to acquire Firm B, and it is negotiated with the

executive of Firm B and came to an understanding that the exchange ratio is

determined based on the book value per share. Firm A` s book value per share is

Rs. 20, and target Firm B` s book value per share is Rs.14. The exchange ratio is

0.7 (i.e., Rs.14 / Rs.20). 7 shares of the acquiring Firm A will be exchanged for

every 10 shares of target Firm B.

The proponents of book value approach contend that it provide a very objective

basis. But, it is not very possible argument because book value per share is

influenced by accounting policies, which reflect subjective judgments. Apart from

this they are some more objections against book value approach of exchange

ratio: book values do not reflect changes in purchasing power of money, and book

values often are highly different from true economic values.

4. Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) Value Per Share (DCF PS)

Under this approach exchange ratio is determined based on discounted cash flow

value per share of the acquiring firm and target firm. Equity value using DCF

method is divided by number of equity shares outstanding to get DCF value per

share. Equity value using DCF method is equals to the firm value using DCF

method minus debt value. For example, Firm A is planning to acquire Firm B, and

it is negotiated with the executive of Firm B and came to an understanding that

the exchange ratio is determined based on the DCF value per share. Firm A` s

DCF value per share is Rs. 30, and target Firm B` s DCF value per share is Rs.15.

The exchange ratio is 0.5 (i.e., Rs.15 / Rs.30). It indicates that half a share of

acquiring Firm A will be exchanged for one share of target Firm B. In other

words for every 2 shares of target Firm B one share of Firm A is offered.
DCF value method of determining exchange is ideally suitable for firms who have

credible business plans and cash flow projections for a period of 5 to 10 years for

the merging firms.

3.2.12 EVALUATION OF MERGER PROPOSAL

Top management defines the organisation`s goals and outlines the policy

framework to achieve these objectives. The organisation`s goal for business

expansion could be accomplished, inter alia through business combinations

assimilating a target corporate which can remove the present deficiencies in the

organisation and can contribute in the required direction to accomplish the goal of

business expansion through enhanced commercial activity i.e., supply of inputs

and market for output product diversification, adding up new products and

improved technological process, providing new distribution new channels and

market segments, making available technical personnel and experienced skilled

manpower, research and development establishments, etc. Depending upon the

specific need and cost advantage with reference to creating a new set up and/or

acquiring a well established setup firm.

Search for a Merger Partner

The top management may use their own contacts with competitors in the same

line of economic activity or in other diversified field which could be identified as

better merger partners or may use the contacts of merchant bankers, financial

consultants and other agencies in locating suitable merger partners. A number of

corporate candidates identified and evaluated based on the organisational history

of business and promoters and capital structure; organisational goals; product,

market and competitors; organisational setup and management pattern; assets

profile movable and immovable assets, land and building; manpower skilled,

unskilled, technical personnel and detailed particulars of management employees;

accounting policies, financial management and control; operational data;

profitability projections; creditors profile and company`s credit performance and
record with its bankers in particular. They may be short listed when they passed

on the above detailed aspects of information.

Negotiating with Merger Partner

Top management can negotiate at a time with several identified short listed

companies suited to be merger partner for settling terms of merger and pickup one

of them which offers favorable terms.

Negotiations can be had with target companies before making any acquisitional

attempt. Same drill of negotiations could be followed in the cases of merger and

amalgamation. Activity schedule for planning merger covering different aspects

like preliminary consultations with the perspective merger partner and seeking its

willingness to cooperate in investigations should be prepared. There are other

aspects, too, in the activity of schedule covering, quantification action plan,

purpose, shape and date of merger, profitability and valuation, taxation aspects,

legal aspects and developmental plan of the company after merger.

3.13 STEPS FOR MERGER AND AMALGAMATION

Once the merger partner has been identified and terms of merger are settled the

following procedure can be followed.

1. Scheme of Merger / Amalgamation

Once two/more firms agree to merge with each other, and then they have to

prepare a scheme of amalgamation. Generally the acquiring company prepares

scheme of amalgamation after consulting its merchant banker or financial

consultants. There is no specific form prescribed for scheme of amalgamation but

scheme should generally contain the following information:

- Particulars about transferee (amalgamated) and transferor (amalgamating)

firms and the business of transferor.

- Appointed date.
- Main terms of transfer of assets from transferor to transferee with power to

execute on behalf or for transferee the deed/documents being given to

transferee.

- Main terms of transfer of liabilities from transferor to transferee covering any

conditions attached to loans / debentures / bonds / other liabilities from

bank/financial institution/trustees and listing conditions attached thereto.

- Effective date when the scheme will come into effect.

- Conditions as to carrying on the business activities by transferor between

appointed date and effective date.

- Description of happenings and consequences of the scheme coming into effect

on effective date.

- Share capital of Transferor Company and Transferee Company specifying

authorized capital, issued capital and subscribed and paid up capital.

- Description of proposed share exchange ratio, any conditions attached thereto,

any fractional share certificates to be issued, Transferee Company`s

responsibility to obtain consent of concerned authorities for issue and

allotments of shares and listing.

- Surrender of shares by shareholder of Transferor Company for exchange into

new share certificates.

- Conditions about payment of dividend, ranking of equity shares, pro rata

dividend declaration and distribution.

- Status of employees of the transferor companies from effective date and the

status of the provident fund, gratuity fund, super annuity fund or any special

scheme or funds created or existing for the benefit of the employees.

- Treatment on effective date of any debit balance of transferor company

balance sheet.
- Miscellaneous provisions covering income tax dues, contingencies and other

accounting entries deserving attention or treatment.

- Commitment of transferor and transferee companies towards making

applications/petitions under sections 391 and 394 and other applicable

provisions of the Companies Act, 1956 to their respective High Courts.

- Enhancement of borrowing limits of the transferee company upon the scheme

coming into effect.

- Transferor and transferee companies give assent to change in the scheme by

the court or other authorities under law and exercising the powers on behalf of

the companies by their respective Boards.

- Description of powers of delegates of transferee to give effect to the scheme.

- Qualification attached to the scheme, which require approval of different

agencies, etc.

- Description of revocation/cancellation of the scheme in the absence of

approvals qualified in clause 20 above not granted by concerned authorities.

- The transferor company will be dissolved without winding up after

amalgamation is affected.

- Statement to bear costs, etc. in connection with the scheme by the transferee

company.

The acquiring company should be ensured that the scheme of amalgamation is

just and equitable to the shareholders and employees of each of the amalgamating

company and to the public.

2. Approval of Board of Directors for the scheme

In India the scheme of amalgamation / merger is governed by the provisions of

Companies Act, 1956, under sections 391-394. Therefore, the scheme of

amalgamation requires approval from respective bodies. Respective Board of
Directors for transferor and transferee companies is required to approve the

scheme of amalgamation.

3. Approval from other Boards

According sec.391, of the Company`s Act, 1956, the scheme of amalgamation

should get it approved by shareholders of the acquiring firm and target firm.

Generally shareholders of amalgamating companies should hold their respective

meetings under the directions of respective High Courts, and consider the scheme

of amalgamation.

Approval of the scheme by specialized financial institutions / banks / trustees for

debenture holders

The Board of Directors should in fact approve the scheme only after it has been

cleared by the financial institutions / banks, which have granted loans to these

companies or the debentures trustees to avoid any major change in the meeting of

the creditors to be convened at the instance of the Company Court`s under section

391 of the Companies Act, 1956.

Approval of Reserve Bank of India is also needed where the scheme of

amalgamation contemplates issue of share / payment of cash to Non-Resident

Indians/Foreign nationals under the provisions of Foreign Exchange Management

(Transfer or Issue of Security by a Person Resident Outside India) Regulation,

2000.

Approval from respective high courts, confirming the amalgamation. The court(s)

issues orders for dissolving the amalgamating company, without winding up, on

receipt of reports from the official liquidator and the regional director.

4. Examination of Object Clause

Examination of object clauses of memorandum of association (MoA) of the

transferor and transferee companies to ascertain whether the power of

amalgamation / merger exists or not. Further, the object clause of MoA of
Transferee (amalgamated) Company should allow for carrying on the business of

the transferor (amalgamating) company. If it is not so, it is necessary to amend the

object clause, which require approvals from shareholders, board of directors, and

Company Law Board.

5. Intimation to Stock Exchange

The stock exchanges where transferor and transferee companies are listed or

quoted their shares should be informed about the amalgamation proposal. At the

same time, from time to time, all copies of notices, resolutions, and any orders

should be send to the stock exchanges.

6. Application to Court for directions

The next step is to make an application under section 391(1) to the High Court

having jurisdiction over the Registered Office of the company, for an order

calling a meeting of its members. The transferor company and the transferee

company should make separate applications to the High Court. The application

shall be made by a Judge`s summons in Form No.33 supported by an Affidavit in

Form No. 34 (see rule 82 of the Companies (Court) Rules. Ensure that the

Affidavit is signed and sworn in the prescribed manner by the deponent

prescribed in the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 (Rule 67 of the Companies

(Court) Rules, 1959). The following documents should be submitted with the

Judge`s summons:

(a) A true copy of the Company`s Memorandum and Articles;

(b) A true copy of the Company`s latest audited balance sheet; and

(c) A copy of the Board resolution, which authorizes the Director to make

the application to the High Court.

7. High Court directions for Members' Meeting

Upon the hearing of the summons, the High Court shall give directions fixing the

date, time and venue and quorum for the members` meeting and appointing an
Advocate Chairman to preside over the meeting and submit a report to the Court.

The court for calling the meeting of creditors in case such request has been made

in the application issues similar directions.

8. Approval of Registrar of High Court to notice for calling the meeting of

Members / Creditors

Pursuant to the directions of the Court, the transferor as well as the transferee

companies shall submit for the approval to the Registrar of the respective High

Courts the drafts notice/s calling the meetings of the members in Form No.36

together with a scheme of arrangements and explanations, statement under section

393 of the Companies Act and form of proxy in Form No. 37 of the Companies

(Court) Rules to be sent to the members along with the said notice. Once

Registrar has accorded approval to the notice, then the Chairman appointed for

the meeting by the High Court who shall preside over the proposed meeting of

members should be signed it.

9. Dispatch of Notices to Members / Shareholders

Once the notice has been signed by the chairman of the forthcoming meeting as

aforesaid it could be dispatched to the members under certificate of posting at

least 21 days before the date of meeting.

10. Advertisement of the Notice of Members' Meetings

The Court may direct the issuance of notice of the meeting of these shareholders

by advertisement. In such case rule 74 of the Companies (Court) Rules provides

that the notice of the meeting should be advertised in such newspaper and in such

a manner as the Court may direct not less than 21 clear days before the date fixed

for the meeting. The advertisement shall be in Form No. 38 appended to the

Companies (Court) Rules. The companies should submit the draft for the notice to

be published in Form No. 38 in an English Daily together with a translation

thereof in the regional language to the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT).
The advertisement shall be released in the newspapers after the Registrar

approves the draft.

11. Confirmation about the Service of the Notice

Ensure that at least one week before the date of the meeting, the Chairman

appointed for the meeting files an Affidavit to the Court about the service of the

notices to the shareholders that the directions regarding the issue of notices and

advertisement have been duly complied with.

12. Holding the Shareholders' General meeting and passing the resolutions

The general meeting should be held on the appointed by each company for

passing the scheme of amalgamation. The amalgamation scheme should be

approved by the shareholders, by a majority in number of shareholders present in

person or on proxy and voting on the resolution and this majority must represent

at least 3/4th in value of the shares held by the members who vote in the poll.

Getting approval of scheme amalgamation from shareholders in just enough it

should also get approval (at least 3/4th in value of creditors, in each class, who

have vote in either person or by proxy) from creditors of the company, for which

company need hold separate meeting for creditors.

13. Filing of Resolutions of General Meeting with NCLT for Confirmation

Once the shareholders` and creditors general meeting approves the amalgamation

scheme by a majority in number of members holding not less than 3/4ths in value

of the equity shares, the scheme is binding on all the members of the company.

The companies involved in the amalgamation / merger should present a copy of

the resolution passed by the shareholders approving the scheme of amalgamation

should be filed with the NCLT. Then the NCLT will fix a date of hearing. A

notice about the hearing and the date of hearing has to be published in two

newspapers. At the date of hearing NCLT here the parties concerned and

ascertaining that the amalgamation / merger scheme is fair and reasonable, and

then the NCLT will pass an order sanctioning the same.
14.Filing the NCLT Order with the Registrar of Companies (RoCs)

Once the approval of amalgamation order received from NCLT, then the same in

true copies, must be filed with the registrar of companies with in the time limit

specified by the NCLT.

15. Transfer of Assets and Liabilities

Section 394(2) vests powers in the High Court to for the transfer of any property

or liabilities from transferor company to Transferee Company, with effect from

the appointed date. In pursuance of and by virtue of such order such properties

and liabilities of the transferor shall automatically stand transferred to the

transferee company without any further act or deed from the date the Court`s

order is filed with ROC.

16. Allotment of Shares to Shareholders of Transferor Company

Pursuant to the sanctioned scheme of amalgamation, the shareholders of the

transferor company are entitled to get shares in the transferee company in the

exchange ratio provided under the said scheme. If there is any cash payment to be

made the same have to be arranged. There are three different situations in which

allotment could be given effect to:

i. Where transferor company is not a listed company, the formalities prescribed

under listing agreement do not exist and the allotment could take place

without setting record date or giving any advanced notice to shareholders

except asking them to surrender their old share certificates for exchange by

new ones.

ii.

The second situation will emerge different where Transferor Company is

listed company. In this case, the stock exchange is to be intimated of the

record date by giving at least 42 days notice or such notice as provided in the

listing agreement.
iii. The third situation is where allotment to Non-Resident Indians is involved

and permission of Reserve Bank of India is necessary. The allotment will take

place only on receipt of RBI permission. In this connection refer to

regulations 7, 9 and 10B of Foreign Exchange Management (Transfer or Issue

of Security by a Person Resident Outside India) Regulations, 2000 as and

where applicable.

Having made the allotment, the transferee company is required to file with ROC

the return of allotment in Form No. 2 appended to the Companies (Central

Government`s) General Rules and Forms within 30 days from the date of

allotment in terms of section 75 of the Act.

Transferee company shall having issued the new share certificates in lieu of and

in exchange of old ones, surrendered by transferor`s shareholders should make

necessary entries in the register of members and index of members for the shares

so allotted in terms of sections 150 and 151 respectively of the Companies Act,

1956.

17. Listing of Shares at Stock Exchange

After the amalgamation is effected, the company, which takes over the assets and

liabilities of the transferor company, should apply to the Stock Exchanges where

its securities are listed, for listing the new shares allotted to the shareholders of

the transferor company.

18. Court order to be Annexed to Memorandum of Transferee Company

It is the mandatory requirement vide section 391(4) of the Companies Act, 1956

that after the certified company of the Court`s order sanctioning scheme of

amalgamation is filed with the Registrar, it should be annexed to every copy of

the Memorandum issued by the transferee company. Failure to comply with

requirement renders the company and its officers liable to punishment.


19. Preservation of Books and Papers of Amalgamated Company

Section 396A of the Act requires that the books and papers of the amalgamated

company should be preserved and not be disposed of without prior permission of

the Central Government.

20. Post Merger Secretarial Obligations

There are various formalities to be compiled with after amalgamation of the

companies is given effect to and allotment of shares to the shareholders of the

transferor company is over. These formalities include filing of returns with

Registrar of Companies, transfer of investments of Transferor Company in the

name of the transferee, intimating banks and financial institutions, creditors and

debtors about the transfer of the transferor company`s assets and liabilities in the

name of the transferee company etc. All these aspects along with restructuring of

organisation and management and capital are discussed in chapter relating to post-

merger reorganization of Transferee Company.

21. Withdrawal of the scheme not permissible

Once the requisite majority of Shareholders and creditors has approved the

Scheme for merger, the Scheme cannot be withdrawn by subsequent meeting of

shareholders by passing Resolution for withdrawal of the Petition submitted to the

Court under section 391 for sanctioning the scheme.

22. Cancellation of Scheme and order of Winding-up

It was held by the Supreme Court in J.K (Bombay) (P) Ltd. v New Kaiser-i-Hind

that the effect of winding-up order is that except for certain preferential payments

provided in the Act, the property of the company is applied in satisfaction of its

liabilities, as they exist at the commencement of the winding-up.

So long as the scheme is in operation and is binding on the company and its

creditors, its provisions undoubtedly govern the rights and obligations of those on

whom it is binding. But once the scheme is cancelled under section 392(2) on the
ground that it cannot be satisfactorily worked and winding-up order passed such

an order is deemed to be for all purposes to be one made under section 433. It is

not because as if the scheme has been sanctioned under section 391 that a

winding-up orders under section 392(2) cannot be made.

3.2.14 TAX ASPECTS OF MERGERS / AMALGAMATIONS

Amalgamation for the purpose of Income Tax, 1961, is recognized only when the

conditions given under section 2 (1B) of the said Act, are fulfilled. Section 2 (1B)

defines amalgamation, in relation to companies, means the merger of one or more

companies with another company or the merger of two or more companies to

form one company. The company(ies) merging are called amalgamating

company or companies and the company with which the amalgamating merge or

the company, which is formed as a result of the merger, is called amalgamated

company. The amalgamated company is eligible to enjoy tax benefits if the

following conditioned are fulfilled:

i. All properties and liabilities of the amalgamating company(ies) immediately

before the amalgamation become the properties and liabilities of the

amalgamated company by virtue of the amalgamation;

ii. Shareholders holding not less than 3/4th in value of the shares in the

amalgamating company (ies) become shareholders of the amalgamated

company by virtue of the amalgamation.

TAX CONCESSIONS

Tax concessions are available for amalgamated company, amalgamating

company (ies), and Shareholders of the amalgamating company.

I. Tax Concessions to Amalgamated Company

The tax concessions are available to amalgamated company, that too if the

amalgamating company is Indian company.
1. Carry forward and Set off of Business Losses and Unabsorbed

Depreciation

Section 72 A, of the Income Tax Act, 1961, allows the amalgamated company to

carry forward accumulated business losses as well as unabsorbed depreciation of

the amalgamating company, provided the following conditions are fulfilled:

a. Amalgamated company continues the business of amalgamating company

for the minimum period of 5 years from the date of amalgamation order,

b. Amalgamated company should hold at least 3/4th of the value of the assets

of the amalgamating company (ies), acquired in the scheme of

amalgamation, for a minimum period of 5 years.

c. The amalgamated company ensure that the amalgamation is for genuine

business purpose, by fulfilling the conditions that are prescribed for revival

of amalgamating company (ies),

d. Amalgamation should be of a company owning an industrial undertaking

(the manufacturer or processing of goods, or manufacture of computer

software, or generation and distribution of electricity, or business of

providing telecommunication services like ? cellular, domestic satellite,

broad brand network, etc., or mining, or construction of ships, aircrafts or

rail systems)

2. Expenditure on Acquisition of Patent Right or Copy Rights

Generally acquisition of patents rights or copyrights involves expenditure that

may be recovered over a period of time. If there were any un-recovered amount

in the books of amalgamating company the same would be allowed to be written

off by the amalgamated company in the same number of balance installments.

After payment of the last installment the rights may be sold by the amalgamated

company for a profit or loss if they are no more required, and the profit or loss on

sale of the rights is the profit or loss of the amalgamated company. The
expenditure on acquisition of rights is eligible for depreciation if it is spent after

31st March, 1998.

3. Capital Expenditure on Scientific Research

Capital expenditure of research is must for any company that wants to stay back

in the industry. The amount spent on scientific research is generally a huge

amount, which is supposed to be recovered over the future period. If amalgamated

company accepts an assets represented by capital expenditure on scientific

research, on such asset any unabsorbed capital expenditure in the books of

amalgamating company would be eligible to be carried forward and set off in the

hands on amalgamated company.

4. Amortization of Preliminary Expenses

Preliminary expense is the amount spent in the beginning of the firm. If there is

any not written off amount in the books of amalgamating company the same

would be allowed to deduct in the same manner as would have been allowed to

the amalgamating company(ies).

5. Expenditure for Obtaining License to Operate Telecommunication

Services

When the amalgamating company transfers license to the amalgamated company

and the expenditure spent on obtaining the license are yet to be recovered, the

same is allowed to the amalgamated company in the same number of balance

instalments. After payment of the last installment the license may be sold by the

amalgamated company for a profit or loss if they are no more required, and the

profit or loss on sale of the rights is the profit or loss of the amalgamated

company.






6. Bad Debts

When the amalgamated takes over the debts of amalgamating company the same

would be allowed as a deduction to the amalgamated company in the same

manner as would have been allowed to the amalgamating company.

From the above it can be understood that income tax act, is not providing any

favor to the amalgamated company. In other words, whatever concessions or

deductions would have been available to the amalgamating company (ies) are

provided to the amalgamated company. Put in simple, the idea of providing tax

concessions or deductions is not put any disadvantage to the amalgamated

company due to the amalgamation.

II. Tax Concessions to Amalgamating Company(ies)

No Capital Gains Tax According to section 47 (vi), where there is transfer of

any capital asset from amalgamating company (ies) to any Indian amalgamated

company, such tranfer will not be considered as transfer of capital assets for the

purpose of capital gains.

III. Tax Concessions to the Shareholders of an Amalgamating Company (ies)

According to section 47 (vii), where a shareholder of an Indian amalgamating

company(ies) transfers his/her shares, such transaction is not treated as transaction

and there is no attraction of capital gains tax, provided the transfer of shares is

made in consideration of the allotment of any share to him/her or shares in the

amalgamated company.

3.2.15 ACCOUNTING FOR MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS

According to the Accounting Standard (AS) 14, Accounting for Amalgamations`,

issued by the Council of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India. This

standard will come into effect in respect of accounting periods commencing on or

after 1.4.1995 and will be mandatory in nature. The Guidance Note on
Accounting Treatment of Reserves in Amalgamations issued by the Institute in

1983 will stand withdrawn from the aforesaid date.

In India merger, defined as amalgamation, which involves the absorption of the

target company by the acquiring company that results in the uniting of the

interests of the two companies. The accounting treatment in the books of the

transferee company is dependent on the nature of amalgamation. If the

amalgamation is in the nature of merger then the merger should be structured as

pooling of interest. On the other hand acquiring purchases the shares of the target

company, then it should be structured as purchase. Therefore there are two main

methods of accounting for amalgamations:

(1) The pooling of interests method; and (2) The purchase

method.

1. Pooling of Interest Method

Use of this method is confined to circumstances which meet the criteria referred

to in paragraph 3(e) of Accounting Standard (AS) 14 (issued 1994) Accounting

for Amalgamations for an amalgamation in the nature of merger. Under this

method the assets and liabilities of the acquiring and the acquired companies are

aggregated based on book values without making any adjustments. There is no

goodwill, because there is no revaluation of assets and liabilities. Rreserves is

preserved and they appear in the financial statements of the transferee company in

the same form in which they appeared in the financial statements of the transferor

company. The difference in capital on account of the exchange ratio (swap ratio)

is adjusted in the reserves.

Illustration: Company H acquires company B, and issues share worth Rs.20

crore to company B`s shareholders. The balance sheets of the both the companies

at the time of merger are as follows:








(Rs. In Crore)

Particulars

Company H

Company B

Combined Co.

Assets:







Net fixed assets

25

38

63

Current assets

10

15

25

Total

35

53

88

Liabilities:







Shareholders funds

11

19

30

Borrowings

17

21

38

Current liabilities

07

13

20

Total

35

53

88

From the above table in can be understood that the shareholders funds are

recorded at the book values. Even shareholders` of Company B received shares

worth Rs.20 crore.

2. Purchase Method

Under this method the assets and liabilities of the acquiring company after the

acquisition are stated into the books of the acquired company at their market

values. The difference between the purchase consideration and the net books

value of assets over liabilities is shown as goodwill, in the acquiring company

books. The same has to be amortised over a period not exceeding five years. If the

purchase consideration less than the net book value of assets over liabilities, the

difference is shown as capital reserve`.

Illustration: Company H acquires company B, assuming to take all its assets and

liabilities. The fair market value of company B`s fixed assets and current assets is

Rs. 27 crore, and Rs.9 respectively. Current liabilities are valued at book value

while the fair value of debt is estimated to be Rs. 16 crore. Company H raises

cash of Rs. 20 crore to pay to B`s shareholders by issuing worth Rs. 20 crore to its

own shareholders. The balance sheets of the both the companies before

acquisition and after acquisition are shown below:










(Rs. In Crore)

Company H

Particulars

Company H

Company B

After Acquisition

Assets:







Net fixed assets

25

38

65

Current assets

10

15

24

Goodwill

--

--

07

Total

35

53

96

Liabilities:







Shareholders funds

11

19

39

Borrowings

17

21

37

Current liabilities

07

13

20

Total

35

53

96

From the above table in can be understood that the company H paid purchase

consideration that is higher than the net book values of assets over liabilities.

Thus, Rs. 7 crore shown as goodwill.

Calculation of Goodwill:









Rs. In crore.

Purchase consideration









20

Fair value of fixed assets



27

Fair value of current assets

09 36

Less: Fair value of debt



16

Fair value of debt current liabilities 07 23
Fair value of net assests









13

Goodwill













07

3.2.16 EVALUATION OF MERGER AS A CAPITAL BUDGETING

DECISION

When a firm plans to acquire any firm then it should consider the acquisition as a

capital budgeting decision. Hence, such a proposal must be evaluated as a capital

budgeting decision. Here the target company should be valued in terms of

potential to generate incremental future free cash inflows. Free cash flows in the

context of merger / amalgamation, are equal to earnings after tax plus non cash
expenses (depreciation and amortisation) less additional investments expected to

be made in the long-term assets and working capital of the acquired company.

Steps Involved in Evaluating Merger as Capital Budgeting Decision

It consists of the following steps ?

Step 1: Determination of Cost of Acquisition or Amalgamation (CoA)

Particulars

Amount (Rs)

Payment to equity shareholders



(No. of Equity shares issued in amalgamated company X

XXXX

Market Price of share)



Add: Payment to



Preference shareholders XXX



Debenture holders XXX



External Creditors XXX



Preference shareholders XX



Accepted obligations XXX

XXXX

Add: Dissolution expense XXX



Unrecorded liability XXX XXXX


XXXX

Less: Cash proceeds from sale of assets of target

XXX

company
Cost of Amalgamation / Merger

XXXXX

Step 2: Determination of Incremental Expected Free Cash Flows to the

Company (FCF)

Particulars

Amount
(Rs)

Operating Earnings after tax

XXXX

Add: Non cash expenses (Deprecation and amortisation)

XXX

Less: Investment in long-term assets

XX

Investment in working capital

XX

Free Cash Flows

XXXX


Step 3: Determination of Terminal Value (TV)

Terminal value is the value of the project at the end of the expected

closing period. It can be determined with the following equations:

i. TV when FCF are likely to be constant till infinity



TV = FCFT+1 ? Ko

ii. TV when FCF are likely to grow (g) at a constant rate



TV = FCFT+1 (1 + g) ? (Ko ? g)

iii. TV when FCF are likely to decline at a discount rate



TV = FCFT+1 (1 - g) ? (Ko + g)

Where: FCFT+1 = the expected FCF in the first year after the explicit forecast

period.

Ko = Cost of capital

Step 4: Determination of Appropriate Cost of Capital or Discount Rate (DF)

Cost of capital is generally used as discounting factor for determining present

value of FCF. Here the cast of capital determined based on the risk level of

amalgamating firm. If amalgamating company risk complexion is matching with

the amalgamated firm then the acquiring firm can use its own cost of capital (Ko)

as discounting factor. On the other hand if there is any variation in the risk

complexion of the amalgamating firm then appropriate cost of capital may be

computed after considering the variation in riskyness (high or low) of the

projected FCF from the target company.

Step 5: Determination of Present Value of FCF (PV FCF)

Incremental projected FCFs (determined in step 2) during the explicit forest

period are multiplied with the DF (determined in step 4) to get the present value

of the FCF during the explicit forest period.




Step 6: Determination of Net Present Value of FCF (NPV FCF)

Net present value of the incremental cash flows equals to PV of FCF (including

TV) minus PV of Cost of amalgamation. Generally firms use NPV as a technique

of evaluation of a merger or amalgamation or acquisition proposal. If the NPV is

positive then the amalgamation is financially feasible.

Illustration: Hindustan Co. Ltd., is planning to acquire Tarapur Co.Ltd. (target

firm). The balance sheet of Tarapur Co.Ltd. as on March 31 is as follows (current

year)

Liabilities

Amount

Assets

Amount

(Rs. In lakhs

(Rs. In lakhs

)

)

Equity share capital (2



Cash

10

lakhs shares of Rs.50

100

Debtors

40

each)

100

Inventories

70

Retained earnings

100 Plant & equipment

280

10% Debentures

100





Creditors

400

400

Additional Information:

1. Hindustan Co. Ltd., agreed to give 1 share (market price per share is Rs.

180) for every 2 shares of Tarapur Co. Ltd.,

2. The shares of Hindustan Co. Ltd., would be issued at its market price,

3. The debenture holders will get 11% debentures of the same amount.

4. The external liabilities are expected to be settled at Rs. 95 lakhs.

5. Dissolution expenses are Rs. 5 lakhs are to be met by the amalgamating

company.

6. The FCFs of Tarapur`s are expected to grow at 4 per cent per annum, after

6 years,

7. Relevant cost of capital for Tarapur is 12per cent,

8. Tarapur`s says that there is unrecorded liability of Rs. 10 lakhs.
9. The expected incremental cash flows from amalgamation for 6 years are:

Year

1

2

3

4

5

6

FCFs (Rs. In lakhs)

75

100

125

160

115

65

Your are required to advise the company regarding financial feasibility of the

amalgamation.

Solution: Step 1 Determination of Cost of Acquisition or Amalgamation

(CoA)

Particulars

Amount (Rs)

Payment to equity shareholders



(1,00,000 X Rs.180)

18,00,000

11% Debentures

1,00,00,000

External Liabilities settlement

95,00,000

Unrecorded liability

10,00,000

Dissolution expenses of Tarapur firm

5,00,000

Cost of Amalgamation / Merger

2,28,00,000

Step 2: Determination of Incremental Expected Free Cash Flows to the

Company (FCF)

The expected incremental cash flows from amalgamation for 6 years are given

Year

1

2

3

4

5

6

FCFs (Rs. In lakhs)

75

100

125

160

115

65

Step 3: Determination of Terminal Value (TV)

The FCFs of Tarapur`s are expected to grow at 4 per cent per annum, after 6

years. So TV of the project at the end of 6 years can be calculated with the

following formula:

TV = FCFT+1 (1 + g) ? (Ko ? g)

Where: g = growth rate

FCFT+1 = the expected FCF in the first year after the explicit forecast

period.

Ko = Cost of capital
TV6 = FCF6 (1 + g) ? (Ko ? g)

= Rs. 65 lakhs (1+0.04) ? (0.12 ? 0.04)

= Rs. 67.6 lakhs ? (0.08)

= Rs. 845

Step 4: Determination of Appropriate Cost of Capital or Discount Rate (DF)

Hindustan Co. Ltd., is using 12 per cent as discounting factor

Step 5: Determination of Present Value of FCF (PV FCF)

Incremental projected FCFs (determined in step 2 plus step 3) during the explicit

forest period are multiplied with the DF (determined in step 4) to get the present

value of the FCF during the explicit forest period.

FCF

Discounting

Present Values

Year

(Rs. In lakhs)

Factor (12%)

(Rs. In lakhs)

1

75

0.893

66.975

2

100

0.797

79.70

3

125

0.712

89.00

4

160

0.636

101.76

5

115

0.567

65.205

6

65

0.507

32.955

6 Terminal Value

845

0.507

428.415

Total present value

864.01

Step 6: Determination of Net Present Value of FCF (NPV FCF)

(Rs. In lakhs)

Total PV of FCF including TV at the end of 6 year



864.01



Less: PV of cost of amalgamation







228.00

Net Present Value











636.01

Decision: The planned acquisition is financially feasible, since its NPV is

positive (ie., Rs.636.01 lakhs)


SUMMARY

A business may grow over time as the utility of its products and services is

recognized. It may also grow through an inorganic process. Mergers and

acquisitions are manifestations of an inorganic growth process. The term merger

refers to a combination of two or more companies into a single company where

one survives and the others lose their corporate existence. Mergers or acquisition

types depend upon the offeror company`s objectives, profiles, combinations

which it wants to achieve. Mergers can usually distinguished into horizontal

mergers, vertical mergers, and conglomerate mergers. Conglomerate mergers

have been further sub-divided into: financial conglomerates, and managerial

conglomerates

The basic purpose of merger is to achieve faster growth of the corporate business.

There are a good number of reasons attributed for the occurrence of mergers and

acquisitions, the main reasons are: leverage the benefit of synergetic operating

economies, diversification of business risk, get the benefit of tax shield, acquire

specific assets, limit or elimination of competition, effective utilization of under-

utilised assets, utilise surplus financial resources, circumvent government

regulations, and create an image of aggressiveness and strategic opportunity,

empire building and to amass vast economic powers of the economy.

Corporate restructuring in the form of merges or acquisitions are generally

motivated by equity shareholders, managers, and the promoters of the combining

companies. Restructure particularly merger has been symbolic with conflict,

dislocation and economic and financial pain or gain. It is largely perceived in

terms of its external consequences for investors, employees, competitors,

suppliers, and host communities.

Amalgamating and amalgamated firms need to calculate the net present value of

their decisions. Basis for computation of NPV of acquirer and acquiree cash
compensation, or compensation in stock. The compensation may be paid in the

form of cash or stock. Determination of the form of compensation depends on

overvaluation, taxes, sharing of risks and rewards, and discipline. If the firm

decides to give stock as compensation then the bases for exchange ratio is:

earnings per share, or market price per share, or book value per share, or

discounted cash flow.

Merger or amalgamation proposal should be evaluated based on the legal

procedure, tax benefits, cost and benefits, and merger as capital budging decision.

Merger evaluation starts with search for a merger partner, and ends with post

merger secretarial obligations.

Amalgamation for the purpose of income tax, 1961, is recognized only when the

conditions given under section 2 (1b) of the said act, are fulfilled. Tax

concessions are available for amalgamated company, amalgamating company

(ies), and shareholders of the amalgamating company. The tax concessions are

available to amalgamated company, that too if the amalgamating company is

Indian company. Carry forward and set off of business losses and unabsorbed

depreciation, expenditure on acquisition of patent right or copy rights, capital

expenditure on scientific research, amortization of preliminary expenses,

expenditure for obtaining license to operate telecommunication services.

Tax concessions to amalgamating company(ies) no capital gains tax

according to section 47 (vi), where there is transfer of any capital asset from

amalgamating company (ies) to any indian amalgamated company, such

tranfer will not be considered as transfer of capital assets for the purpose of

capital gains.

According to the accounting standard (as) 14, accounting for amalgamations`,

issued by the council of the institute of chartered accountants of india. Tere are

two main methods of accounting for amalgamations: the pooling of interests

method; and the purchase method.
REVIEW QUESTIONS

11. What do you mean by takeover? Discuss the types of takeovers.

12. Write a brief note on evolution of mergers and acquisitions in India.

13. What are the different forms of mergers? Explain in detail.

14. Explain the purposes or reasons for mergers.

15. Discuss the benefits of mergers.

16. Merges or acquisitions are generally motivated by equity shareholders,

managers, and the promoters of the combining companies. Discuss.

17. Merger has been symbolic with conflict, dislocation and economic and

financial pain or gain. Comment.

18. Write a note on:

(a). Differential Efficiency & Financial Synergy.

(b). Operating Synergy & Pure Diversification

19. Explain the benefits and dangers of mergers.

20. How do you determine the forms of compensation for mergers?

21. What is swap ratio? How do you compute it?

22. What do you mean by exchange ratio? Discuss the basis for determining

exchange ratio.

23. What is scheme of amalgamation? List out the contents of scheme of

evaluation.

24. Discuss the various steps involved in mergers or amalgamations.

25. Mergers or amalgamations are eligible for some tax shields. Discuss.

26. What are the important tax provisions relating to mergers or

amalgamations?

27. Explain the methods of accounting for amalgamation.
28. What are cost of merger from the point of view of acquiring company?

29. Discuss the steps involved in evaluation of merger as a capital budgeting

decision.

30. Write a short notes on: (a). Swap ratio. (b). Horizontal merger.





(c). Operating Synergy.

(d). Hostile takeover.

PROBLEMS

1. Company P has a value of Rs. 2,00,00,000 and Company Q has a value of

Rs.50, 00,000. If the two firms merge, cost savings with a present value of

Rs.50, 00,000 would occur. Firm P proposes to offer Rs. 50,00,000 cash

compensation to acquire Firm Q. Calculate the net present value (NPV) of the

merger to the two firms.

2. Firm H plans to acquire firm B. Following are the statistics of firms before the

merger ?

Particulars

H

B

Market price per share (Rs.)

30

12

Number of Shares

1,50,000

75,000

Market value of the firm (Rs.)

75,00,000

15, 00,000

The merger is expected to bring gains, which have a PV of Rs.15, 00,000.

Firm H offers 37,500 shares in exchange for 75,000 shares to the shareholders

of firm B. Calculate the net present value (NPV) of the merger to the two

firms.

3. The following information for Firm A and Firm B. Determine the maximum

change ratio if PE ratio for combined firm is 3, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, and 20.

Particulars

Firm A (Rs.)

Firm B (Rs.)

Market price per share ? P

12

4

Earnings per share ? EPS

1

0.5

Price / earnings ratio ? PE (Times)

6

4

Total earnings ? E

90,00,000

30,00,000

No.of outstanding equity shares - S

45,00,000

30,00,000
4. The following information for DW Co. and WD Co. Determine the minimum

Swap ratio if PE ratio for combined firm is 3, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, and 20.

Particulars

DW Co (Rs.)

WD Co. (Rs.)

Market price per share ? P

12

4

Earnings per share ? EPS

1

0.5

Price / earnings ratio ? PE (Times)

6

4

Total earnings ? E

90,00,000

30,00,000

No. of outstanding equity shares-S

45,00,000

30,00,000

5. Firm H acquires Firm B, and issues share worth Rs.30 crore to Firm B`s

shareholders. The balance sheets of the both the companies at the time of

merger are as follows:







(Rs. In Crore)

Particulars

Firm H

Firm B

Assets:





Net fixed assets

20

35

Current assets

12

15

Total

32

50

Liabilities:





Shareholders funds

10

19

Borrowings

15

20

Current liabilities

07

11

Total

32

50

Show the combined firm`s assets and liabilities using pooling of interest method.

5. Company H acquires company B, assuming to take all its assets and

liabilities. The fair market value of company B`s fixed assets and current

assets is Rs. 30 crore, and Rs.10 respectively. Current liabilities are

valued at book value while the fair value of debt is estimated to be Rs. 17

crore. Company H raises cash of Rs. 20 crore to pay to B`s shareholders

by issuing worth Rs. 20 crore to its own shareholders. The balance sheets

of the both the companies before acquisition and after acquisition are

shown below:


(Rs. In Crore)

Particulars

Company H

Company B

Assets:





Net fixed assets

28

38

Current assets

11

15

Goodwill

--

--

Total

39

53

Liabilities:





Shareholders funds

14

19

Borrowings

18

21

Current liabilities

07

13

Total

39

53

Show the combined firm`s balance sheet by using purchase method

7. VS Co. Ltd., is planning to acquire SR Co.Ltd. (target firm). The balance sheet

of SR Co.Ltd. as on March 31 is as follows (current year)

Amount

Amount

Liabilities

Assets

(Rs. In lakhs

(Rs.In lakhs )

)

Equity share capital (4



Cash

20

lakhs shares of Rs.25 each)

200

Debtors

80

Retained earnings

200 Inventories

140

11% Debentures

200

Plant

560

Creditors

200



800

800

Additional Information:

1. VS Co. Ltd., agreed to give 1 share (market price per share is Rs. 350) for

every 2 shares of SR Co. Ltd.,

2. The shares of Hindustan Co. Ltd., would be issued at its market price,

3. The debenture holders will get 12% debentures of the same amount.

4. The external liabilities are expected to be settled at Rs. 190 lakhs.
5. Dissolution expenses are Rs. 8 lakhs are to be met by the amalgamating

Co.

6. The FCFs of SR`s are expected to grow at 5 per cent per annum, after 7

years,

7. Relevant cost of capital for SR is 12per cent,

8. SR`s says that there is unrecorded liability of Rs. 10 lakhs.

9. The expected incremental cash flows from amalgamation for 6 years are:

Year

1

2

3

4

5

6

FCFs (Rs. In lakhs)

140

190

250

330

220

120

Your are required to advise the company regarding financial feasibility of

the amalgamation.

SUGGESTED READINGS

8. Allen D, An Introduction to Strategic Financial Management, London:

CIMA / Kogan Page.

9. Verma, J.C., Corporate Mergers, Amalgamations, & Takeovers, New Delhi:

Bhatrat Publishing House, 2002.

10. Hampton, J.J., Financial Decision Making - Concepts, Problems, and Cases,

New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

11. Chandra, P., Financial Management ? Theory and Practice, New Delhi:

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2004.

12. Copeland, T.E., and Weston, J.F., Financial Theory and Corporate Policy,

New York: Addison-Wesley.

13. Copeland, T., T.Koller, and Murrin, J., Valuation: Measuring and Managing

the Value of Companies, New York: John Wiley (International Edition).

14. Sudarsanam, P.S., Essence of Mergers & Acquisitions, New Delhi: Prentice

Hall of India.
15. Weston, J.F. and Brigham, E.F., Essentials of Managerial Finance, Dryden

Press, 1977.

16. Weston, J.FRED ET AL, Mergers, Restructuring and Corporate Control,

New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 1996.

17. Emery, D.R. and Finnert, J.D., Corporate Financial Management, New

Jersey: Prentice Hall Inte`l, 1997.

18. ICAI, Statements of Accounting Standards (AS 14): Accounting for

Amalgamation, New Delhi.

19. http://www.cireindia.org/resources/as14_defin.html





Unit- IV

LEASE FINANCING

Leasing is used in many developed countries as a method of financing

investments. Leasing has grown as a big industry in the USA and UK and spread

to other countries during the present century. In the modern days with the

expansion of world trade, leasing is not confined to domestic trade or production

but has gone beyond the frontiers of a country because of which we have cross

border leasing. The prospects of leasing in India are good due to growing

investment needs and scarcity of funds with public financial institutions. This

type of lease finance is particularly suitable in India where a large number of

small companies have emerged.

Meaning

Leasing is a method of acquiring the right to use equipment for a consideration.

Leasing is a contract between the owner (lessor) and the user (lessee) for a fixed

term for the use on hire of a specific asset selected by the lessee; the lessor retain

ownership of the asset and the lessees has possession and use of the asset on
payment of a specified rental over a period. It is a sort of contractual arrangement

between the lessor and lessee and is regulated by the terms, conditions and

covenants of such a contract. In other words, leasing arrangements provide an

enterprise with the use of and control over assets without receiving title to them.

In general, a lease is a contractual arrangement under which the owner of an asset

(lessor) agrees to allow the use of his asset by another party (lessee) in exchange

of periodic payments (lease rents) for a specified period. The lessee pays the

lease rent as a regular fixed payment over a period of time at the beginning or at

the end of a month, quarter, half year or year. Although generally fixed, lease

rents can be tailored both in terms of amount and timing to the profits and cash

flow position of the lease. At the end of the lease contract the asset reverts back

to the real owner i.e. the lessor. However, in long term lease contracts, the lessee

is generally given the option to buy or renew the lease.

Normally, lease agreement contains certain conditions and warranties to govern

its future operations. For instance, these may relate to maintenance of leased

assets, payment of property, insurance and other taxes pertaining to leased asset,

option of buying the asset at a specified price after the expiry of lease period, etc.

The terms, conditions and options incorporated in lease arrangements vary widely

from one contract to another.

Terms in the lease agreement

In a lease contract, the lessor agrees to lease to the lessee and the lessee agrees to

take on lease from the lessor subject to terms of the lease contract. The various

terms involved in the formation of a lease contract are as follows: Lessor:

The party who is the owner of the equipment and who gives it for lease to the

other party for payment of a periodical amount.

Lessee: The party who obtains the equipment for use for which he pays periodical

rentals.
Lease Property: The subject of the lease, the asset, article or equipment that is

on lease.

Term of lease: The lease period for which the agreement will be in operation.

Lease rentals: This refers to the consideration for lease. This may be connected

with interest on lessor investment, maintenance cost of the equipment by the

lessor, depreciation of the asset, and servicing charges or packaging charges for

providing the above services.

Warranties: The lessee makes the selection of equipment based upon its own

judgement. The lessor makes no express or implied warranties including those or

merchant ability or fitness for particular use of the equipment and hereby

disclaims the same. The lessor shall not be responsible for any repairs, service or

defects in the equipment or the operation thereof.

Manufacturer Warranties: The lessor agrees that the Lessee shall be entitled to

the benefits of the warranties provided the manufacturers/suppliers of the

equipment. Any performance guarantee provided by the supplier shall be in the

joint names of the lessor and the lessee and shall be enforceable by the lessor or

the lessee or both of them.

Title, identification, ownership of equipment: Lease contract provides that the

equipment shall at all time remain the property of the lessor. The lessee also

agrees and undertake not to sell, assign, sublet, pledge, hypothecate or otherwise

suffer a lien upon, or against the equipment or remove the equipment from the

factory or office or site where originally put to use or located, without the prior

consent of the lessor in writing which consent the lessor agrees will not be

unreasonably withheld. Conditioned upon the lessee`s compliance with and

fulfillment of the terms and conditions of this agreement, the lessee shall have the

right to have exclusive peaceful possession, operation and use of the equipment

for the full terms of the lease and any renewals thereof.
Equipment in transit: The equipment leased, will be delivered by the

manufacturers/suppliers to the location specified by the lessee. The lessor shall

not be responsible for any damage incurred to the equipment prior to or during

deliver. Prior to the dispatch of the equipment, the lessee shall ensure that transit

insurance on the equipment being dispatched is provided by the supplier naming

the lessor as loss payee.

Indemnity: The lessee agrees to comply with all laws and regulations relating to

the transportation, possession, operating and use of the equipment and assumes all

liabilities including injuries to or of persons arising from or pertaining to the

transportation, possession, operation or use of the equipment. The Lessee agrees

to and keep indemnified and hold safe and harmless the lessor against all such

liabilities and also against loss of equipment by seizure by any person. Any fees,

taxes or other charges legally payable by the lessee in relation to the possession

and use of the equipment and which is paid by the lessor in the event of the

lessee`s failure to pay shall at the lessor`s option become immediately due from

the lessee to the lessor.

Inspection : The lessor or a representative shall have the right from time to time

during the normal hours on any working day with prior notice in writing to the

lessee to enter upon the lessee`s premises for the purpose of the existence,

condition and proper maintenance of the equipment.

Repairs, loss and damage: The lessor shall not be called upon to keep the

equipment in good repair, condition and working order and the lessee at its own

cost and expense will keep the in good repair, condition and working order. All

parts, mechanisms and devices or any replacements made by the lessee to the

equipment shall immediately be deemed part of the equipment for all purpose

thereof and shall become the property of the lessor, any payment for such parts,

mechanisms and devices from the lessor. In the event, any item of equipment is

lost, stolen or destroyed or damaged beyond repair for any reason, the lessee shall
pay to the lessor the amount of lease rentals then remaining unpaid, including any

renewal options entered into pursuant to this agreement.

Insurance: The lessee for the benefit of and on behalf of the lessor obtain and

maintain for the entire term of this agreement at its own expense insurance against

normal risks and such other risks of loss as are customarily insured against on the

type of equipment leased hereunder and by businesses in which the lessee is

engaged in for such amount, provided however, that the amount of insurance

against loss or damage to the equipment shall not be less than the original cost of

the equipment. Alternatively the lessor may insure the equipment as aforesaid and

the lessee shall reimburse the insurance premium and other costs and expenses to

the lessor.

Steps in leasing transactions

The important steps involved in a leasing transaction can be summarized as

follows:

Firstly, the lessee has to take a decision about the asset required and

determine the manufacturer or the supplier. He also decides about his

other requirements, viz., the design specification, the price, warranties,

terms of delivery, installation and servicing.

The lessee then enters into a lease agreement with the lessor. He

specifies to him his requirements as determined above. The lease

agreement contains the obligations of the lessor and the lessee as: (i) The

basic lease period during which the lease is irrevocable; (ii) The timing

and amount of periodical rental payments during the basic lease period;

(iii) Details of any option to renew the lease or to purchase the asset at

the end of the basic lease period. In the case of absence of any such

option to the lessee, the lessor takes possession of the asset and is entitled

to any residual value associated with it; and (iv) Details regarding the

responsibility for payment of cost of maintenance and repairs, taxes,
insurance and other expenses. In case of a Net lease agreement, the

lessee pays all these costs. However, in case of a Maintenance lease

agreement, the lessor maintains the asset and also pays for the

insurance.

After the lease agreement is signed, the lessor contacts, the manufacturer

or supplier to supply the asset to the lessee. The lessor makes payment to

the manufacturer or the supplier after the asset has been delivered, tested

and accepted by the lessee.

Legal aspects of leasing

The provisions relating to bailment in the Indian Contract Act govern equipment

leasing agreements. There are basically two parties involved in a leasing contract,

lessor and lessee. Lessor is a person who is leasing the equipment to the lessee,

whereby the lessee becomes the bailee, as he is in possession of the equipment

and is using it in production. In the case of financial lease, the lessee will become

the owner after paying the full value of the lease equipment. For this purpose, an

agreement will be entered into under the Inidan Contract Act between the lessor

and lessee. Such a contract contains the following :

Details of contracting parties i.e. lessor and lessee

Details of the asset or equipment or property which is leased,

Nature of the lease: The clause specifies whether the lease is an operating

lease, a financial lease or a leverage lease.

Amount, time and place of lease rental payments.

Time and place of equipment delivery.

Lessee`s responsibility for taking delivery and possession of leased

equipment, maintenance, repairs, registration, etc. and the lessor`s right

in case of default by the lessee.
Lessee`s right to enjoy the benefits of the warranties provided by the

equipment manufacturer/supplier.

Period Lease, Indemnity, Prohibition on sub-leasing etc.

Insurance to be taken by the lessee on behalf of the lessor.

Variation in leases rentals if there is a change in certain external factors

like bank interest rates, depreciation rates, and fiscal incentives.

Option of lease renewal for the lessee.

Return of equipment on expiry of the lease period,

Details on termination of the lease, about various conditions and also

how the ownership of the asset or equipment will be treated at the point

of termination of the contract

Arbitration procedure in the event of dispute.

Types of leasing

A lease financing transaction can be differently classified on the basis of

differences in the terms and conditions such as, number of parties to the

transaction; extent to which risks and rewards of ownership are transferred; and

domiciles of the equipment manufacturer, the lessor and the lessee. Considering

the differences in the above criteria the lease agreements can broadly be put into

following categories.

Financial lease: A financial lease is a long-term arrangement which is

irrevocable during its primary lease period. The financial lease is one which

satisfies one or more of the following conditions:

The lessor transfer title to the lessee at the end of the lease period.

The lease contains an option to purchase the asset at a bargain price.

The lease period is equal to or greater than 75% of the estimated

economic life of the asset.
At the beginning of the lease, the present value of the minimum lease

payments equals or exceeds 90% of the fair value of the leased

property to the lessor (less any investment, tax credits, realized by the

lessor).

In case of a financial lease, practically all the risks incidental to the ownership of

the asset and the benefits arising there from are transferred to the lessee, except

the legal title which may or may not be eventually transferred. The lessee has

also to bear costs of insurance, repairs and maintenance of the asset and other

related expenses. The financial lease is also termed as Close-end lease since the

lease agreement, more or less is irrevocable and the rental payments are so fixed

that they ensure return of the total investment at a pre-determined rate of return.

Operating lease: The International Accounting Standard committee defines an

operating lease as any lease other than a finance lease. An operating lease has the

following characteristics

The lease term is significantly less than the economic life of the

equipment.

The lessee enjoys the right to terminate the lease at short notice

without any significant penalty.

The lessor usually provides the operating know-how, supplies the

related services and undertakes the responsibility of insuring and

maintaining the equipment, in which case the operating lease is called

a Wet lease`.

An operating lease where the lessee bears the cost of insuring and maintaining the

leased equipment is called a Dry lease`. The operating lease does not shift the

equipment-related, business and technological risks from the lessor to lessee.

The lessor structuring an operating lease transaction has to depend upon multiple

leases or on the realization of substantial resale value (on the expiry of first lease),
to recover the investment cost plus reasonable rate of return thereon. Hence, to

deal in operating leasing one requires an in-depth knowledge of the equipment

and the resale market for such equipment. In our country, as the resale market for

most of the used capital equipments is not active, operating leases are not very

popular. Nevertheless, this form of lease is ideal for firms engaged in industries

with a high degree of technological risk.

Sale and lease back: In case of a sale and lease back arrangement, a firm sells an

asset to another person who in turn leases it back to the firm. The asset is

generally sold at its market value. The firm receives the sale price in cash and

gets the right to use the asset during the basic lease period. The firm makes

periodic rental payments to the lessor. The title to the asset now vests with the

lessor who is naturally also entitled to any residual value the asset might have at

the end of the lease period.

The sale and lease backs arrangement is beneficial both for the lessor and the

lessee. The lessee gets immediate cash which results in improvement in his cash

flow position. The lessor gets the benefits in terms of tax credit due to

depreciation. The sale and lease back arrangements are popular with the

companies which are facing short-term crisis.

Leveraged leasing: This form of leasing has become very popular in recent

years. This type of lease agreement is used for financing those assets which

require large capital outlays. Such a type of lease arrangement involves three

parties - the lessee, the lessor, and the lender. Under this arrangement, the lessor

borrows funds from the lender and himself acts as an equity participant.

Normally, the amount borrowed is substantial Vis-?-vis the funds provided by the

lessor himself. The lessor services the debt out of lease rents received. The

position of the lessee under a leveraged leasing agreement is the same as on case

of any other type of lease. The position of the lessor, however, undergoes a
change. The loan is generally secured by a mortgage on the asset besides

assignment of the leased asset`s rental payments.

Primary and secondary lease: The lease contract is sometimes divided into two

parts, namely, primary lease and secondary lease. The primary lease provides for

the recovery of the cost of the asset and profit through lease rentals during the

initial years (say 4 to 5 years) of lease contract followed by the

secondary/perpetual lease at nominal lease rents. In other words, more lease rents

are charged in the primary and less in the secondary period of the contract. These

forms of lease contracts are also referred to as front-ended lease and back ended

lease respectively

Domestic Lease: If all parties to the lease transaction ? the equipment supplier,

lessor and lessee ? are domiciled in the same country, it is a domestic lease.

International lease: If the parties to the lease agreement are living in different

countries, the lease is an international lease. The term International leasing`

covers three separate types of activities: Cross border leasing, Overseas

subsidiaries, and Import leasing.

Cross border leasing: Leasing across national frontiers is cross border leasing.

The cross border leasing exists where the lessee and lessor are domiciled in

different countries. It includes export leasing.

Overseas subsidiaries: When a financial institution sets up leasing subsidiaries

overseas, each conducting purely domestic business involving lessees in the same

country they are called overseas subsidiaries.

Import Leasing: It is an arrangement by which a leasing company, a

manufacturing company or the government enters into an agreement with a

foreign company to acquire sophisticated equipments on lease basis. In fact, this

activity requires a lot of government support and suitable changes in the import

regulations.
In-house leasing: When an industrial house promotes a leasing company for the

benefit of companies in the same group, that company is known as In-house

company`. These companies are normally floated to take advantage of tax

benefits and creating an additional source of finance through public issues by

them. The in-house leasing companies enable the industrial house to claim

greater amount of expenses as tax deductible charge than what it can claim

otherwise. If the industrial house floats leasing company, it can charge

depreciation on the leased assets in the books of the leasing company and lease

rentals in the books of lessee as tax deductible charges. As such from the point of

view of the industrial house as a whole the lease rentals as well as depreciation on

the leased assets are claimed as tax deductible charges reducing the amount of

taxable income.

Hire purchase Vs lease financing

In case of a hire purchase transaction, the goods are delivered by the owner to

another person on the agreement that such person pays the agreed amount in

periodical installments. The property in the goods passes to such person only on

the payment of the last installment. In a hire purchase transaction, therefore,

theoretically the seller continues to retain the title to the asset. The ownership

has, however, to ultimately pass to the buyer unless the buyer exercises the option

not to buy the asset by stopping payments of future installments. The buyer can

claim depreciation on the cost of the asset and interest as expense for tax

purposes. On the other hand, in case of lease financing, the lease rent is deducted

as an expense for tax purposes. Depreciation on the leased asset is claimed by the

lessor.

In case of a hire purchase on completion of the contract, the residual value of the

asset goes to the buyer. While in case of a lease financing, the residual value goes

to the lessor, in case where the lessee has a right to cancel the arrangement as in

the case of vehicles or air craft leases. However, in case of a finance lease where
the financing is made for purchase of equipment useful only to the lessee, there is

no provision for cancellation of the lease agreement. In such a case, the residual

value devolves on the lessee. The residual value in such a case is zero or if

positive it will be treated as miscellaneous income and be subject to taxation.

Lease evaluation

A leasing transaction has to beneficial both for the lessor and the lessee. Each

one evaluates the transaction from his angle. In the following pages, we are

explaining the techniques adopted by the concerned parties for evaluating a lease

transaction.

Evaluation by lessor

The Internal Rate of Return (IRR) is the most commonly adopted technique by

the lessor evaluating lease transaction. Internal Rate of Return is that rate of

return at which the sum of the discounted cash inflows equals the sum of

discounted cash outflows. In other words, it is the rate which discounts the cash

flows to zero`.

In case of a leasing transaction, the cash inflows are in the form of rentals

received from the lessee, while the cash outflows are in the from of payments

made by the lessor to the manufacturer or supplier of the leased asset. The

internal rate of return is computed on the basis of these cash flows. It is then

compared with the weighted average cost of capital of the lessor. In case the IRR

is more than the weighted average cost of capital, the investment should be made.

The sources of long-term funds are mainly debt and equity. Dept capital consists

of loans from banks/financial institutions, issue of debentures, etc. The equity

capital represents the amount brought in by the shareholders and the earnings

retained in the business. It may also be mentioned here that interest on debt is

allowed as an expenditure for tax purpose, while dividend on shares is not

allowed as an expenditure for tax purposes. The computation of cost of
shareholders` funds is most cumbersome. Generally, it is calculated according to

Dividend plus growth approach.

While estimating his cash inflows, the lessor takes into account the rental

payments made by the lessee, depreciation on the asset leased out, investment

allowance (if available) and the receipt of residual value, etc.

Besides considering the cash inflows arising from leasing out the assets, as

explained above, the lessor also makes an assessment of risk involved in the

leasing transaction. A lease, as a matter of fact, is a term loan in the form of an

equipment or asset. Hence, while appraising a lessee, a lessor will apply the same

principles which a banker applies while granting loans. The lessor, like a banker,

is also mainly concerned with the six Cs`, viz. character, capacity, credit (past

experience of the creditors), conditions (within the economy), competition and

collateral. In case, as a result of his appraisal, the lessor finds that the lease

transaction is more risky, he may demand higher rentals, increased security

deposit, personal guarantees, shorter lease term, additional collateral security, etc.

The following illustration will considerably help the students in understanding

how to evaluate a lease transaction from the point of view of the lessor.

Example ? 1: The following are the details regarding an equipment to be given

on lease by A Ltd.

(i)

Cost of equipment of the lessor Rs.1,00,000 financed 80%

through debt and balance through equity. Cost of the debt

amounts to 18% and equity 15% before tax.

(ii)

The lessor is in 55% tax bracket. The equipment is used for

three shifts. The rate of depreciation is normal 15% and 7.5%

for each shifts. The rate of depreciation is normal 15% and 7.5

for each additional shift. Depreciation is charged according to

diminishing balance method.
(iii)

The salvage value of the equipment is Rs.16,000.

(iv)

The direct cost to the lessor is Rs.500 in the Ist year.

(v)

Estaimated cost for maintenance and general administration in

respect of the equipment to the lessor is Rs.1,500 per annum.

(vi)

The lessee agrees to pay the following:

(a) Annual rent-Rs.36,000 for 5 years. The payment is to be

made at the end of each year.

(b)The security deposit of Rs.3,000 which is refundable at the

end of the lease term.

(c)A sum of Rs.1,350 non-returnable management fees payable

at the time of inception of the lease.

Suggest whether it is beneficial for the lessor to lease the equipment using IRR

technique.

Answer:

(1) COST OF CAPITAL FOR LESSOR

Source

Amount

After tax cost

Total cost

Equity

20,000

15 %

3,000

Long-term Debt

80,000

8.1 %

6,480
9,480




*18 x 45/100 =8.1%
9,480


Tax Adjusted Average Cost of Capital = ----------------- x 100 = 9.5%

1,00,000





(2) COMPUTATION OF ANNUAL TAX LIABILITY

Years



1

2

3

4

5

Rs.

Rs.

Rs.

Rs.

Rs.



Lease Revenue

36,000

36,000

36,000

36,000

36,000

Direct Cost

-500

-

-

-

-

Maintenance & -1,500

-15,00

-1,500

-1,500

-1,500

Administration
Cost
Depreciation

-30,000

-21,000

-14,700

-10,290

-7,203

EBT

4,000

13,500

19,800

24,210

27,297

Income Tax @

-2,000

-7,425

-10,890

-13,315

-15,013

55%

1,800

6,075

8,890

10,895

12,894

Income after Tax



(3) COMPUTATION OF ANNUAL NET CASH INFLOWS

Years



1

2

3

4

5

Rs.

Rs.

Rs.

Rs.

Rs.



Lease Revenue

36,000

36,000

36,000

36,000

36,000

Sale

of -

-

-

-

+16,000

Equipment
Direct Cost

-500

-

-

-

-

Administration

-1,500

-1,500

-1,500

-1,500

-1,500

cost
Refundof deposit

-

-

-

-

-3000

Tax paid

-2,200

-7,425

-10,890

-13,315

-15,013

31,800

27,075

23,610

21,185

32,487




(4) CASH OUTFLOWS AT YEAR O`

Rs.

Cost of Equipment 1,00,000
Less : Management Fees 1,350
Security Deposit 3,000 4,350
95,650

(5) COMPUTATION OF INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN

Year

Cash

Cash

Discout

Present

Discount Present

outflow inflow factor at

value

factor at

value

15%

12%



Rs.

Rs.

Rs.

Rs.

Rs.

Rs.

0

-95,650









1



31,800 0.870

27,666

0.893

28,397

2



27,075 0.756

20,469

0.797

21,579

3



23,610 0.658

15,535

0.712

16,786

4



21,185 0.572

12,118

0.636

13,535

5



32,487 0.497

16,146

0.567

18,420







91,934





98,717

NPV

-3,716

+3,067



3,067
IPR = 12 + { ------------------------- x 3}
3,067 +3,716

= 12 + 1.36

= 13.36 %

The weighted average cost of capital is only 9.5% while the IRR from leasing out

the asset is 13.36%. Hence, it is beneficial for A` Ltd. to lease out the

equipment.




Evaluation by Lessee ? Lease or buy decision

The lessee of the asset while deciding whether to buy the asset or take it on lease

will consider the benefits available under each of the alternatives. He will select

the alternative which is most beneficial to him. It will be useful here to compare

the distinctive features of buying` and leasing` which have to be kept in mind by

the intending user.

Particulars Buying Leasing

[i] Initial cost Incurred Not incurred

[ii] Investment allowance &

depreciation charges Available Not available

[iii) Salvage Value Available Not available

[iv] Management fees and Not Payable Payable

lease rentals

A comparison of the benefits available under `buying` and leasing can be made

according to discounted cash flow techniques, using either Net Present Value

(NPV) or Internal Rate of Return (IRR) method.

NPV Method

According to this method, the following steps will have to be taken for evaluating

a lease proposal :

a. The present value of cash flows associated with the buying` alternative will be

ascertained.

b.The present value of cash flows under the leasing` alternative will be

ascertained

c. The decision between buying` and leasing` will be made by comparing the

NPV under each of the alternatives. The alternative having higher NPV will be

preferred. This will be clear from the following illustration.
Example ? 2: A bulldozer, which has a service life of 10 years, can be purchased

for Rs.1,80,000. It can also be hired at the rate of Rs.45,000 per annum payable

at the beginning of each year. Operating costs are to be borne by the user.

A contractor requiring the use of the bulldozer only for a period of two years

seeks your advice. If purchased, he expects to use it for 2 years and then sell it at

80 per cent of the purchase price. He can finance its purchase by his own

resources to the extent of Rs.80,000 and the balance by borrowing at an interest

rate of 18 per cent annum. The interest on the loan is payable annually at the end

of each year and the loan can be repaid out of the sale proceeds of the bulldozer.

For income-tax purposes, depreciation is an admissible deduction at 25 per cent

on diminishing balance method. Excess realization, If any, over the written down

value is subject to tax. The effective tax rate for contractor is 50 per cent. Tax

liabilities can be assumed to arise at the close of each year.

The contractor expects a minimum internal rate of 10 per cent net of taxes on his

own funds. Prepare a suitable statement and advise the contractor, indicating

clearly the basis for your recommendation.

Answer

The gross revenue from the use of the bulldozer will be the same whether it is

purchased or taken on hire. Similarly, the operating costs will also be the same.

It will, therefore, be proper to work out only the cash inflows and outflows that

will be different under the two alternatives.

A. Purchase
[i] Outflows :
Amount P.V. Discounted
Factor @ 10% value
p.a Rs.

Cash outflow on purchase
[see note I ) 80,000 1,000 80,000
* interest on borrowing for
first year 9,000 0.909 8,181
*interest on borrowing for
second year 9,000 0.826 7,434
Income-tax payable on profit
On sale of the bulldozer 21,375 0.826 17,657
1,19,375 1,13,272


* The rate of income-tax being 50% the real incidence of interest on the

firm will be only ? of Rs.18,000



[ii] Inflows :
Amount P.V. Discounted
Factor @ 10% value
p.a Rs.
Cash received on sale of the
bulldozer after repaying
borrowing [see note 3] 44,000 0.825 36,344
Saving in tax because of depreciation
First Year 22,500 0.909 20,453
Second Year [see note 4] 16,875 0.826 13,939
83,375 70,736
Thus, the purchase of the bulldozer will result in a net discounted cash outflow of

Rs.42,536 [i.e., Rs.1,13,272 ? 70,736]

(B) Hiring (or leasing)

[i] Outflows :
Amount P.V. Discounted
Factor @ 10% value
p.a Rs.
Hire charges for the first year 45,000 1.000 45,000
Hire charges for the second year 45,000 0.999 40,905
90,000 85,905


[ii] Outflows :
Amount P.V. Discounted
Factor @ 10% value
p.a Rs.
Tax savings in the first year on
Hire charges [see note 5] 22,500 0.909 20,453
Tax savings on hire charges for the
Second year 22,500 0.826 18,585
45,000 39,038
The net outflows in case the bulldozer is hired will be Rs.46,867 [i.e., 85,905 -

39,038].

It is, thus, clear that the net discounted outflows in case the bulldozer is purchased

are lower than the net discounted outflows in case it is taken on hire. Hence, the

first proposition (purchase) should be accepted, if there are no uncertainties

involved.

In case, the amount realizable on the sale of the bulldozer at the end of two years

[1,44,000] is rather uncertain and, on the face of it, 80% of the original cost

appears to be high, the conclusion may well be in favour of hiring. Moreover, the

rate of return mentioned is the minimum of 10%. In case it is possible to utilize

the sum of Rs.80,000 in some more profitable venture, it may be better to take the

bulldozer on hire.

Working Notes:

1. The net cash outflow on purchase is only Rs.80,000, sine Rs.1,00,000 is

borrowed and repaid at the end of the two years. The interest on such

borrowings is however, an outflow.

2. The written down value of the bulldozer after two years of the is

Rs.1,01,250 [depreciation is Rs.45,000 in the first year and Rs.33,750 in

the second]. Hence, there is a profit of Rs.42,750. It is presumed that the

tax on this profit is payable immediately at the end of two years.
3. Cash realized on sale is Rs.1,44,000. However. Rs.1,00,00 [loan] has to

be paid back. Hence, net cash inflow is Rs.44,000.

4. Depreciation is Rs.45,000 and Rs.33,750 for the first and the second years

respectively. Savings in tax would be 50% of these amounts.

5. The hire charges will be paid in the beginning of the year, but the tax

saving on the same will accrue only at the end of the year.

Tax provisions relating to leasing

The principal income tax provisions relating to leasing are

The lessee can claim lease rentals as tax-deductible expenses.

The lease rentals received by the lessor are taxable under the head of

business or profession.

The lessor can claim depreciation on the investment made in leased

assets.

The major sales tax provisions relevant for leasing are

The lessor is not entitled for the concessional rate of central sales tax

because the asset purchased for leasing is meant neither for resale nor

for use in manufacture. ( It may be noted that if a firm buyes an asset

for resale or for use in manufacture it is entitled for the concessional rate

of sales tax.)

The 46th Amendment Act has brought lease transactions under the

purview of sale` and has empowered the central and state government

to levy sales tax on lease transactions. While the Central Sales Tax Act

has yet to be amended in this respect, several state governments have

amended their sales tax laws to impose sales tax on lease transactions.




Accounting considerations

For lessor: Assets under financial leases should be disclosed as assets given on

lease` as a separate section under the head fixed assets` in the balance sheet of

the lessor. The classification of the assets should correspond to that adopted for

other fixed assets.

Lease rentals should be shown separately under gross income in the income

statement of the relevant period. It is appropriate that against the lease rental a

matching lease annual charge is made to the income statement, which represents

recovery of the net investment over the lease period. This charge is calculated by

deducting the finance income for the period from the lease rental for the period.

The annual lease charge would comprise minimum statutory depreciation.

There would be a lease equalization charge where the annual lease charge is more

than the minimum statutory depreciation.

There would be a lease equalization credit where the annual lease charge is less

than the minimum statutory depreciation. This would require a separate lease

equalization account (LEA). The LEA should be transferred every year to the

income statement. Statutory depreciation must be shown separately in the income

statement. Accumulated statutory depreciation should be deducted from the

original cost of the leased asset on the balance sheet of the lessor to arrive at the

net book value.

Balance standing in the LAA should be adjusted in the net book value of the

leased assets. The amount of adjustment in respect of each class of fixed asset

could be shown in the main balance sheet or in a schedule.

The finance income should be calculated by applying the interest rate implicit in

the lease to the net investment in the lease during the relevant period. Some

lessors use a simpler method of calculating by apportioning the total finance

income from the lease in the ratio of minimum lease payments outstanding during

each of the respective periods comprising the lease term.
Leased asset for an operating lease should be depreciated on a basis consistent

with the lessor`s normal depreciation policy.

In the case of a sale and lease back transaction, if the rentals and sale price are

established at fair value, profit or loss is normally recognized immediately. If the

sale price is below fair value, profit or loss is recognized except that if loss is

compensated by future rentals at below market price, it is deferred and amortized

in proportion to the rental payments over the useful life and vice versa.

For lessee: A lessee discloses assets taken under a finance lease by way of a note

to the accounts, disclosing the future obligations of the lessee as per the

agreement.

Lease rentals should be accounted for on an accrual basis over the lease period t

recognize an appropriate charge in this respect in the income statement, with a

separate disclosure thereof. The appropriate charge should be worked out with

reference to the terms of the lease agreement, type of asset, proportion of lease

period to the life of the asset as per technical or commercial evaluation and other

such considerations.

The excess of lease rentals paid over the amount accrued in respect thereof should

be treated as pre-paid lease rental and vice versa.

In the case of operating lease, the aggregate lease rental payable over the lease

term should be spread over the term on straight-line basis irrespective of the

payment schedule as per the terms and conditions of the lease.

Advantages of Leasing

Acquisition of capital assets generally needs substantial cash outlay. This is

sometimes quite beyond the financial capacity of the actual user. Leasing serves

as a source of long-term funds that can be used for acquisition of capital assets.

The basic advantages from leasing can be summarized as follows:
Protects against obsolescence: In the case of ownership, the firm bears the risk

of the asset becoming obsolete. This dimension of potential risk is too important

to be ignored and particularly in the present era of rapidly changing technologies.

Leasing provides a cushion against all such hazards by shifting the risk of

obsolescence of equipment of the lessor. This is particularly true of operating

leases which are of short duration and cancelable at the option of the lessee.

Faster and cheaper credit: It has generally been found that acquisition of assets

under a leasing arrangement is cheaper and faster as compared to acquisition of

assets through any other source. Leasing companies are more accommodating

than banks and financial institutions in respect of terms of financing. The rental

payments are fixed keeping in view the expected profits and cash generation of

individual lessees, which is generally not possible in the case of lending by banks

and other similar institutions.

Enhance liquidity: Leasing arrangements enable the lessee to utilize more of his

funds for working capital purposes in place of low yielding fixed assets.

Moreover, acquisition of assets under lease arrangements does not alter the debt-

equity ratio of the lessee. Hence, the lessee can resort to further borrowings in

case the need arises.

Boon for small firms: Acquisition of assets by means of a leasing arrangement is

particularly beneficial to small firms which cannot afford to raise their capacity

on account of paucity of financial resources. It serves as a boon for technocrats

who are unable to arrange funds even for promoters contribution or margin

money as required by financial institutions.

Absence of restrictive covenants: The financial institutions while lending money

usually attach several restrictions on the borrower as regards management, debt-

equity norms, declaration of dividend, etc. Such restrictions are absolutely absent

in the case of financing through a lease agreement.
Convenience and flexibility: If an asset is needed for a short period only, it does

not seem to make much sense on the part of the firm first to spend time in

selecting an asset, negotiating its purchase, arranging insurance, registration, etc.

and then to repeat all these steps to resell the asset. Leasing obviates the need of

this exercise and thus emerges out to be a very convenient and an inexpensive

form of acquiring the use of services of the equipment.

Whole financing: Lease financing enables a firm to acquire the use of an asset

without having to make a down payment for initial equity investment.

Tax benefits: Leasing finance provides enough opportunity for both lessor and

lessee to gain in both income tax and sale tax. A lease payment is tax deductible.

If an asset is purchased, it must be capitalized, and the annual depreciation charge

is deducted as a tax-deductible item. Sales tax will be paid by the lessor as the

equipment is bought by him. But later on, under financial lease he can claim a

part of the sales tax from the lessee, when the equipment is transferred to the

lessee. The lessee will be paying the sales tax on lesser amount. This is so

because by the time the property or equipment is sold to him, its value gets

reduced.

Disadvantages of leasing

Acquisition of assets through leasing arrangements also results in certain

disadvantages, as listed below.

Deprived of ownership: The lessee has only the right to use the asset as the

ownership lies with the lessor. If the lessor`s financial condition deteriorates or if

the leasing company is wound up, the lessee may be deprived of the use of

equipment interrupting its normal manufacturing operations.

No scope for modernization: Under the lease, the lessee is generally prohibited

from making alterations/improvements on the leased asset without the prior

approval of the lessor. It may cause problems to the lessee if the lessor

disapproves of his plan of alteration. Moreover, the lessor may impose certain
restrictive conditions, sometimes, regarding the use of the asset, say, number of

hours the equipment may be put to use and so on.

In case of default: In case the lessee makes a default in rental payments, the

lessor is entitled, at his will, to take over the asset and the lessee has no right to

prevent him from doing so. In case of a financial lease arrangement, the lessor

may also file a suit against the lessee for damages.

Costly: Compared to term loans by banks, lease finance is costlier. If there is no

investment allowance, the lease transactions bring tax loss. At the termination of

the lease agreement, the asset is taken by the lessor and the lessee will lose the

residual value.

Leasing in India

In rural areas we come across leasing when agricultural lands are given on lease

for a specified period. In Tamilnadu, temple lands were on lease for a long time

and that used to be a source of income for the temples. However leasing of capital

equipments is recent origin. Leasing has proved to be an effective system for

financing capital equipment in Europe, Japan and USA.

The modern concept of financial leasing was pioneered in India during the year

1973 by setting up of First Leasing Company of India Limited in Madras by

SPIC group as an exclusive leasing company. This company enjoyed a virtual

monopoly for a period of six years. Then, a number of other leasing companies

have come into existence. They are Mazda Leasing, Twentieth Century Leasing

company, Ross Morarka Leasing Co., Pioneer Leasing, Express Leasing Co., etc.

As a matter on fact, in the last decade, the pace at which the number of companies

are entering into the leasing business, it can be said that there is a mushroom

growth of leasing business, it can be said that there is a mushroom growth of

leasing companies. It is estimated that there are about more than 600 leasing

companies in India providing a package of financial services and more are

expected to enter the capital market in the coming years. As a result of
amendment in the Banking Regulation Act, a large number of nationalized banks

are also expected to participate directly in the leasing business.

During the last decade, there was a big spurt in the setting up of leasing

companies in the country by most entrepreneurs of all sorts and has resulted in

keen competition. Most of the new companies floated leasing business at the

crest of leasing boom without any grip over the economies of leasing. They

became more interested in seeking short-term gains at the expense of long-term

results so that they could pay promised dividends to investors. But they could not

do so.

Experience with leasing companies, however, has been somewhat mixed. Several

of them are under-capitalized and not particularly well-managed. The last few

years have seen a shake out in the business leaving the more efficient and better

geared companies in business today. The euphoria of Indian leasing industry

which took firm roots in the country more due to circumstance in the capital

market during the 1984-86 boom period has however ended. Now the game is

being played by such companies that follow a prudent policy both in terms of

finalizing lease agreements as well as growth.

Leasing companies, like hire-purchase companies, are governed by the stipulation

of their borrowing being restricted to ten times of their net worth and maintenance

of minimum liquidity ratio of 15 per cent. The Narasimham Committee is of the

view that having regard to the important and growing role of leasing and hire

purchase institutions in the financial intermediation process, minimum capital

requirements should be stipulated in addition to the existing requirements relating

to gearing and liquidity.

Review questions

1. Distinguish between financial lease and operating lease.

2. Distinguish between domestic lease and international lease.
3. How is accounting done for financial lease with respect to lessor?

4. How is accounting done for financial lease with respect to lessee?

5. Why companies go for leasing rather than purchasing equipment?

6. Describe the various legal provisions that govern the leasing business in

India.

7. Explain the concept of leasing. State its advantages and limitations.

8. What factors would you, as a lessee, keep in mind while selecting the

lessor.

9. Explain the important provisions of guidance regarding accounting

treatment for leasing transactions.

10. Discuss the methods for evaluating the leasing proposal.

11. Leasing finance has proved its unique adaptability to various financial

problems. Its use is being rapidly extended both to new industries as also

to new applications. Discuss it merits as compared to other methods of

financing.

12. What is financial lease? How is it different from other types of leases?

13. What are the important steps in a leasing transaction?

References

Maheswari .S.N, Financial Management, Principle and Practice", Sultan Chand

& Sons, New Delhi, 2004

Narasimham, M., The Financial System, Nabhi, New Delhi:, 1992.

Rustagi, R.P., Financial Management ? Theory, Concepts and Problems,

Galgotia New Delhi:, 2002.

Santhanam .B, Financial Services", Margham Publications, Chennai, 2003

Joseph Anbarasu.D, et.al, Financial Services, Sultan Chand & Sons, New

Delhi, 2003

Suneja H.R, Merchant Banker", Himalaya Publications House, Mumbai, 2003

*********
VENTURE CAPITAL

Capital is one of the most important factors of production. No entity can start

functioning without required capital as this helps the entrepreneurs in acquiring

machinery, equipment and other productive facilities. The companies engaged in

traditional line of business can easily procure necessary financial capital from the

conventional capital market. But the entrepreneurs face great difficulty while

venturing out to procure financial capital for newly floated enterprises as at the

initial stages of business the risk is very high and the return, quite uncertain.

Common investors hesitate to invest their savings in such companies even though

they leas to high industrial growth and economic development, because it is

difficult to trade-off between risk and returns. Lack of finance deters the new

entrepreneurs and technocrats from starting new ventures even though they may

very well have innovative ideas and requisite technological knowledge. Hence

the question arises that how these types of firms shall then be financed? Under

the circumstance, the concept of venture capital fund was born with fundamental

objective to provide initial capital and support in building capital base to the

entrepreneurs, having a sound background of professional education, expertise

and initiative to launch the business based on fast changing technology.

Venture capital is a form of equity financing specially designed for funding high

risk and high reward projects. It plays an important role in financing hi-

technology projects and helps to turn research and development into commercial

production. Besides financing technology, venture capital is also involved in

fostering growth and development of enterprises. Both the U.S.A. which is the

birth place of venture capital, and the U.K. have already seen considerable

activity in the area of venture capital.

When companies want to raise finance but are not in a strong position to borrow

money, they can negotiate a sale of the part of the equity stake in a new business.

This share capital for new or expanding business is often referred to as risk
capital,` emphasizing the risk involved in any investment in shares or suggesting

the idea that it would lead to growth. Where normal lending seems appropriate

instead, venture capital will not be provided and for some business, the offer of

venture capital is linked to other loans such as convertible loans in a fixed time

limit as part of a complete financing package.

Concepts

Venture Economics had defined Venture Capital as providing seed, start-up and

first stage financing` and also funding the expansion of companies that have

already demonstrated their business potential but do not yet have already

demonstrated their business potential but do not yet have access to the public

securities market or to credit oriented institutional funding sources, venture

capital also provides management in leveraged buy out financing.

The European Venture Capital Association has described it as risk finance for

entrepreneurial growth oriented companies, and investment for medium or long-

term to maximize returns. It is a partnership with the entrepreneur in which the

investor can add value to the company because of his knowledge and experience.

Steven James Lee had defined it as actual or potential equity investments in

companies through the purchase of stocks, warrants, options or convertible

securities. Venture capital is a long-term investment discipline that often requires

the venture capitalists to wait five or more years before realizing a significant

return on the capital resources.

International Finance Corporation, Washington defines venture capital as equity

or equity featured capital seeking investment in new ideas, new companies, new

products, new processes or new services that offer the potential of high returns on

investment. If may also include investment in turn around situations.

Thus the capital provided to start a venture is known as venture capital. Venture

capital refers to organized private or institutional financing that provide

substantial amounts of capital mostly through equity purchases and occasionally
through debt offerings to help growth oriented companies develop and succeed.

The term venture capital denotes institutional investors that provide equity

financing to young business and play an active role advising their managements.

Venture capital is an important source of funds for technology based industries.

Venture capital is equity support to fund new concepts that involve a higher risk

and at the same time, have growth and profit potential. Venture capital is a

temporary start-up financing in the form of equity capital or loans, with returns

linked to profits and with some measure of managerial control. Venture

capitalists except losses on some ventures to be greater than with traditional

financing, but they invest because they think that greater than normal returns on

others will more than make up for those losses. Venture capital is ideally suited

to projects involving uncertainty, poor information and lack of collateral.

However, venture capital finance is different from conventional finance, i.e.

money lending and bank finance, because venture capital financier takes keen

interest in business performance of the investee`s firm. The concept of venture

capital has been evolved as a method of seed capital or start up financing. In

practice venture capital provides finance to budding entrepreneurs, having skills

and business acumen, to attain their cherished goals. These new breed

entrepreneurs often come forward with a new technology or idea or products or

processes and approach a venture capital company for financial assistance. These

entrepreneurs being new cannot meet the rigid requirements of the traditional

financial institutions. In such cases venture capitalists come with all kinds of

resources needed, e.g. financial and managerial assistance for proper

implementation of these projects. Once these projects reach the stage of

profitability, the venture capitalists sell their equity holding at a higher price to

yield maximum capital gain as a reward for taking higher risks entailed in

supplying seed capital.


Characteristics of the venture capital

The main characteristics of the venture capital are long time horizon, lack of

liquidity, high risk, equity participation and participation in management.

Long Time Horizon: Venture financing is a long-term illiquid investment; it is

not repayable on demand. It requires a long-term investment attitude that

necessitates the venture capital firms to wait for a long-period, say 5 to 10 years,

to make substantial profits.

Lack of Liquidity: Because venture capital investment are made in private

companies, the investments are illiquid until the company goes public or is sold

and the proceeds are distributed to the limited partners. This illiquidity is inherent

in the nature of the securities that venture capitalists` purchase and in the stages of

development that a typical partnership must go through.

High Risk: Within a given portfolio of venture capital investments the returns

will vary widely. A few will return many times the initial investments, others will

fail completely, and many will simply struggle and become part of what is

commonly known as the living dead`.

High Returns: Venture capital has historically achieved high rates of return. But

venture capital performance has also varied greatly. This wide variation in

returns over time emphasizes the importance of diversifying across time as well

as industry and stage of investment.

Equity Participation: Actual or potential equity participation through direct

purchase of shares, options or convertible securities. The objectives are to make

capital gains by selling off the investment once the enterprise becomes profitable.

Participation in Management: Continuing participation of the venture capitalist

in the management of the entrepreneur`s business. This hands-on management

approach helps him to protect and enhance the investment by actually involving
and supporting the entrepreneur. More than finance, a venture capitalist provides

his marketing technology, planning and management skills to the new firms.

Methods of Venture capital

For all entrepreneurs except a chosen few, Raising money is the hardest part of

starting a business ? and the most rewarding when one is successful at it. There

are various methods of financing entrepreneurial ventures. They are seed money

financing, development financing, later stage financing, turn around.

Seed money financing: The venture capital institution provides seed capital at

the early stage of the borrowing concern. In seed capital, the funds are provided

for testing the product and examining the commercial viability of the product. It

enables the venture capital institution to find out the technical skill of the

borrowing concern and its market potentiality. So, we can say seed capital is

more of a product development and all the finance required at this stage is

provided by the venture capital institution.

Once the product is tested in the market and after being satisfied with its

acceptability by the market, financing will be provided for further development of

the product and marketing of the product.

The start up may be classified into four categories.

A new high technology, introduced by the entrepreneur.

A new business started by an entrepreneur who has a thorough working

knowledge and experience-normally started by persons who were working

in an established firm and having gained sufficient experience.

New projects started by existing companies

A new company promoted by existing company. Here, the venture capital

institution is keen to have a first-rated management which may have a

second rated product. But not vice versa i.e., venture capital will not be
provided for a concern having a second-rated management but a first-

quality product

Development financing:. The borrowing concern has successfully launched the

product in the market which is evident from its acceptability. However, the

business has not become commercially successful for want of some more finance.

It is at this stage, the venture capital institution provides more funds than at the

initial stage. It is also known as expansion financing and financing can be for

working capital or for expansion.

Later stage financing: The business concern which has borrowed venture

capitals has now become a well established business. But still, it is not able to go

in for public issue of shares. At this stage, the venture capital institution will

provide finance.

Messanine capital : This is a stage where the borrowing company is not only well

established but has overcome the risks and has started earning profits. But they

have to go for some more years before reaching the stage of self sustenance. This

finance is used by the borrowing company for purchase of plant and machinery,

repayment of past debts, and entering new areas.

Bridge capital : This is a medium term finance ranging from one to three years

and used for growth of the business.

Management buy-outs: Here, we deal about the nature of management that is

likely to exist in the borrowing concern. In the case of management buy-outs,

venture capital is used for removing the external control on the management, by

acquiring all the shares and the voting rights.

Management Buy-in: In the case of buy-in, funds are provided for an outside

group to buy an on going company. But this is not popular as it requires a ready

management, an investor and a company to take over the existing one.
Turn around: A sick company may be taken over by providing two important

inputs of capital and management.

Financial turn around: When the company is able to improve its conditions

financially, it is called financial turn around, which is due to the financial

assistance by venture capital institution.

Management turn around: Similarly, when the management of the company

makes a turn around by becoming self dependent and is able face the challenges

of business, it is called management turn around.

Modes of venture financing

The financing pattern of the deal is the most important element. Venture

capitalists carry out substantial financial engineering to provide enough flexibility

to meet the requirements of the company. The venture capitalist typically makes

an investment in equity and quasi-equity.

Equity: The venture capital company invests in the equity of the company either

at par or premium. Investment in the form of equity is the most desirable form of

venture financing, as it does not put any pressure on the cash flow of the company

in the initial period. Ideally the venture capital assistance should be provided

entirely through equity, reflecting an approach of sharing risks and rewards.

However in order to retain the day-to-day management and control with the

promoter, the normal limit of assistance by way of equity is to be at a level

slightly lower than of the promoter`s equity.

Quasi-equity: The quasi-equity instruments are converted into equity at a later

date. The convertible instruments are used by the venture capitalist due to

necessity of leverage, and need to provide incentive to the promoters. These

instruments are normally converted into equity at the book value or at a premium

in a later date. The premium automatically rewards the promoter for their

initiative and hard work. Since it is performance related, it motivates the

promoter to work harder so as to minimize dilution of their control on the
company. The convertible instruments include convertible debentures and

convertible preference shares.

Venture capital investment process

The venture capital investment activity is a sequential process involving

following steps.

Deal origination: A continuous flow of deals is essential for the venture capital

business. Deals may originate in various ways. Referred system is an important

source of deals. Deals may be referred to VCFs by their parent organizations,

trade partners, industry associations, friends, etc. Yet another important source of

deal flows is the active search through networks, trade fairs, conferences,

seminars, etc. A third source used by venture capitalists is certain intermediaries

who match VCFs and the potential entrepreneurs.

Screening: As venture capital is a service industry and operates on small staff,

before going in for the in-depth analysis, the VCFs screen out projects on certain

broad criteria. For example, the screening process may limit project to areas on

which venture capitalists are familiar in terms of technology, or product or market

scope, etc.

Evaluation: During this process, the venture capitalists ask the firm for a

business plan, wherein detailed information about the proposed venture is given

and then an assessment of the possible risk and return on the venture is done. The

venture capitalists evaluate project`s risk in isolation and thus effects of risk on

total portfolio investment are rarely assessed. As a result a little effort has been

made to eliminate the risk factors in order to enhance profit as well to hedge the

risk.

Deal structuring: This involves negotiating the terms of the deal, i.e. a return

commensurate with the risk, minimizing taxes, and assuring investment liquidity,

board membership and right to replace management in case of consistent poor

managerial performance.
Post investment activities and exit: The most crucial stage in any venture capital

investment is the exit. The goal of the venture capitalist is to sell the investment

in a period at a considerable gain. The different possible routes for exit from

venture investments are: Initial public offer, Trade sale, Promoters buy back,

Company buy back, and Management buy out.

Factors determining venture capital investments

Venture capital finance is a risky business. The factors which are taken into

consideration in providing investment rather than loans are growth prospects,

possible future dividends and a likelihood that the shares acquired would

eventually become marketable. The venture capital schemes are carefully drawn

up to allow the original owners to retain control of the company through a

majority shareholding although the agreement usually allows the lender to appoint

a director on the board of the company. A venture capitalist studies and critically

examines the under mentioned variables to analysis the ventures before it takes

financing decision.

Management and organization pattern: Venture capitalists judge a business

proposition by assessing the entrepreneur, the man behind the project, the men

who manage it. Experience shows that a successful entrepreneur possesses

mental attributes and behavioral attributes. A venture capitalist would, before

taking a decision to invest, carry out analysis of how the enterprise is organized

with reference to the organizational chart, management team, equity holders,

employee satisfaction, trade union activities and industrial peace, maintenance of

personal records and strength and weaknesses.

Production process: This is an important aspect, especially for venture capitalists

following policy directions to finance concerns engaged in import or use of new

technology in production process. The important factors to be considered are 1.

Equipment and machinery used, cost of such equipments and capital expenditure

proposed to be incurred in acquiring the plant and equipment; 2. Skilled and
trained production personnel and their availability; 3.Subcontracting work in

production process involved; 4. Inventory levels in the production department,

delivery period involved in supply of inventory items, source of supply and

reliability of suppliers, purchasing process and other related aspects; 5. Quality

control and consumers` satisfaction.

Marketing and sales: Marketing is a critical area and the success of a company

depends largely upon its marketing endeavours, policies and strategies. A venture

capitalist would study a company`s marketing strength with reference to strength

of the product being marketed, with regard to its seasonality, customers` profile,

credit terms customers, consumer-awareness literature disseminated by the

company, advertising programme and allocated budget, and the firm handling

advertising for the product; size of market, presence and strength of competitors,

market growth and information system, etc; pricing system followed by the firm;

periodic marketing reports; sales projections and probability of success based on

realistic assumptions; salesmen`s ability and capacity. The role of business

associations in influencing market conditions, pricing of products, consumer

motivations, etc., is also an important indicator.

Profitability: Venture capitalists favour those firms for investment that can

project a high degree of profitability. Cash-generation capacity of the ventures is

also examined before arriving at a decision for investment. If a company were

unable to generate sufficient cash, it would definitely suffer from shortage of

working capital. Time is another critical factor. The firms that can deal in their

products in the market with a reasonably good rate of growth potential within

reasonable a time span are financed by the venture capital funds.

Reference information: An entrepreneur provides reference for personal as well

as corporate identification in the business plan. The venture capitalist analyse the

following information provided by the entrepreneurs :
Corporate structure includes subsidiaries, divisions, departments, branches,

regional offices, etc. The full details of their location, documents of

incorporation, bye-laws, regulations, etc., should be verified to assess their main

role in corporate matters.

Legal matters: Agreements and deeds entered into by the entrepreneur with

various parties and related documents should be verified to ascertain the existing

encumbrances upon the corporate title, properties or ownership. Any lawsuit

relating to the entrepreneur pending in any court of law company`s patent right,

trade marks, copyrights and licenses, etc., should be verified and ascertained.

Professional reference: Banks, Auditors, Lawyers, Insurance agents, landlords or

lessors, Customers, Suppliers, Competitors, Subcontractors, etc., who may be able

to provide strategic information about the entrepreneur to the venture capitalist,

which can help him, decide whether or not to invest in the venture.

Valuation Methods

A Venture capitalist would find it worthwhile to value current outside investments

made in an enterprise so as to take a decision about his share in the equity capital

of the company. The venture capitalist use different valuation methods, some of

them are Conventional valuation method, Present-value method and Revenue

multiplier method.

Conventional valuation method: This is based on the expected increase in the

initial investment that could be sold out to a third party or through public offering

via the exit route. Price-Earning ratio is calculated on the maturing date,

multiplying the earning level post-tax effect by P/E ratio on the future maturity

date arrives at valuation of investment at a future date. This method does not take

into account the stream of cash flows beginning from the date of investment till

the date of liquidity of investment.

Present-value method: This method takes into account the stream of earnings

generated during the entire period of the investment from the date of initial
investment till date of maturity at a presumed discounted rate. This method is

popularly known as First chicago method`. Three alternative scenarios styled as

success`, survival` and failure` are assumed for the entire maturing period of

the project that are discounted by a uniform discount rate to arrive at the present

value of investment.

Each scenario is assigned a probability figure. Probability figures are based on

many factors, which affect the earning stream: price of raw material; price of

finished good; marketing factors. The product is multiplied by respective

probability figures to arrive at expected value in each scenario. The total of these

scenarios gives the expected present value of the company. Based on such value

the venture capitalist makes his investment. The problem with this method is that

it is based more on a value judgment by the venture capitalist than empirical

consideration.

Revenue multiplier method: Revenue multiplier is an assumed factor used to

estimate the value of an enterprise. By multiplying the annual estimated sales by

such factor, the valuation figure is derived. This method is based on sales income

and not on earning. Assuming the absence of profit in the early stage of a project,

the method is useful for valuation at the early stages.

The Multiplier (M) is obtained by using the following equation.



(l+g)n(e)(PE)

M = ------------------

(l)+dn



Where,



M = Multiplier.



g = growth rate.



n = Number of years between initial investment and exit date.


e = Expected profit margin (post tax) percentage at the exit date.



PE = Expected price earning ratio at the exit date.

d = Appropriate discount rate for venture capital investment and

undertaking risk.



Valuation, (V) is obtained by using the following equation:



R(l + g)n (a)(PE)
V = -------------------------------

(l)+dn




Utilization of earlier investment is an important part of investigation that would

reveal the ability of management to economically and efficiently utilize funds.

Exit mechanism

Exit mechanism is the most important aspects of venture capital industry. The

success of venture capital activity largely depends on envisaging efficient exit

mechanism from investments and successful implementation of disinvestments.

An efficient exit plan enables venture investors to get appropriate returns on

investments. Venture capitalists are supposed to plan exit from venture at the

time of investment. The proposed exit plan should have least problems and

conform to statutory provisions. The exit from investment can be envisaged

through various routes.

Sale of share on stock exchange after listing: Venture capitalists generally

invest in ventures at the start-up stage and propose to disinvest their holding after

company brings out initial public offering (IPO) for raising funds to finance

expansion. Consequent listing on stock exchange provides an exit route from

investment.
IPO/Offer for sale: Venture capitalists may also disinvest their holding through

offer for sale to public. This route is often preferred where venture is successful

and its internal generations are adequate to meet immediate fund for expansion.

Therefore, no IPO is envisaged and instead part of existing equity is offered for

sale. In such cases, however, investee company should have equity not less than

minimum threshold limit for listing and at least 25 per cent of equity is offered for

sale.

Strategic sales: At times, venture capitalists disinvest their holding in ventures to

strategic investors who may have some kind of synergy of their own business

with companies they propose to invest. Arrangement is generally worked out

where by promoters disinvest their substantial holdings and remain associated

with ventures professions.

Buy back of equity by company: Recently, Companies(Amendment) Act, 1999

has allowed companies to buy its own equity shares. Even though venture

capitalists may not intend to exit through this route, they may consider it as when

the venture has failed to achieve high growth and the return from the investment

is likely to be low/average.

Promoters buy back. Promoters buy back is not generally a preferred route for

exit from investment. Venture capitalists consider it is an exit option where

promoters are in a position to mobilize funds for buy back of equity held by

venture investors. This option is normally exercised where growth of venture is

low/average and returns from investment are also likely to be low/average.

Advantages of venture capital

Venture capital has made significant contribution to technological innovations

and promotion of entrepreneurism. Many of the path breaking technologies

computers have emerged from small business set up by people with ideas (but no

financial resources) and supported by venture capital. There are abundant

benefits to economy, investors and entrepreneurs provided by venture capital.
Economy oriented

Helps in the industrialization of the country.

Helps in the technological development of the country.

Generates employment.

Helps in developing entrepreneurial skills.

Investor oriented

Benefit to the investor is that they are invited to invest only after the

company starts earning profit, so the risk is less and healthy growth of

capital market is entrusted.

Profit to venture capital companies.

Entrepreneur oriented

Helps small and medium first generation entrepreneurs to translate their

ideas into a reality.

Promotes entrepreneurship and foster entrepreneurism in the country.

Venture Capital in India

Prior to independence, we had one example of formal venture capital type of

financing in our country. The Tata Group`s Investment Corporation of India

successfully promoted a number of enterprises like Associated Bearings, National

Rayons and Ceat Tyres in that area. These enterprises were undoubtedly hi-tech

areas at that time. However, in the post-independence period, the government

term-lending institutions eclipsed such ventures.

Under public sector auspices, venture capital fund was first started by Industrial

Finance Corporation of India (IFCI). It started the Risk Capital Foundation

(RCF) way back in 1975. This has been converted into a company known as Risk

capital and Technology Finance Corporation Ltd., (RCTFC) as a subsidiary of the

IFCI with effect from 12th January 1988 for providing technology development
finance. It is funded by the Unit Trust of India, the IFCI and the World Bank. In

1976 the seed capital scheme was introduced by IDBI. Till 1984 venture capital

took the form of risk capital and seed capital. In 1986 ICICI launched a venture

capital scheme to encourage new technocrats in the private sector in emerging

fields of high-risk technology.

Consequently, Government of India felt the need of venture capital funds in India

in the context of structural development and growth of small-scale business

enterprises. In 1986-87 a 5 per cent cess was levied on all know-how payments to

create a venture capital fund by IDBI. The ICICI also became a partner of the

venture capital industry in the same year. During 1988-89 the new and young

entrepreneurs were facing difficulties to raise equity capital from the conventional

market. Under the circumstance, the scheme to launch venture capital funds was

formulated.

Initially, a fund under the nomenclature of venture capital fund` was required to

be established with certain corpus for being invested in the new and young firms

with high potential of returns. Government decided to allow then concessional

treatment of capital gains arising out of liquidation of equity holding in the

assisted firms. At present, several venture capital firms are incorporated in India.

The Indian venture capital industry is just about a decade old as compared to that

in Europe and US. In this short span it has nurtured close to 1000 ventures, mostly

in SME segment and has supported budding technocrat/professionals all through.

The VC industry, through its investments in high growth companies as well as

companies adopting newer technologies backed by first generation entrepreneurs,

has made a substantial contribution to economy.

The Indian venture capital industry is dominated by public sector financial

institutions. A few private sector venture capital firms have been set up recently.

At present three are about fifteen venture capital funds in India that have provided

venture finance of over Rs.4.6 billion to several ventures. VCFs in India are not
pure venture capitalists. They pursue both commercial as well as developmental

objectives. Venture finance is made available to high-tech as well non-tech

businesses. A large number of high-tech ventures financed by VCFs are in thrust

areas of national priority such as energy conservation, quality upgradation,

advanced materials, biotechnology, reduced material consumption, environment

protection, improved international competitiveness, development of indigenous

technology, etc.The venture capital firms in India can be categorized into the

following four groups:

Venture capital funds promoted by the all India development financial

institutions such as Technology Development and Information

Company of India Limited (TDICI) by ICICI, Risk Capital

Technology Finance Corporation Ltd.,(RCTCF) by IFCI and Risk

Capital Fund (RCF) by IDBI.

Venture capital funds promoted by the state-level developmental

financial institutions such as Gujarat Venture Capital Limited (GVCL)

and Andhra Pradesh Industrial Development Corporation`s Venture

Capital Limited (APIDC-VCL).

Venture capital funds promoted by public sector banks such as

Canfinance and SBI Caps.

Venture Capital funds promoted by the foreign banks/private sector

companies and financial institutions such as Indus Venture Capital

Funds, Credit Capital Venture Fund and Grindlay`s India

Development fund.

Issues of Indian venture capital industry

Following are the major issues faced by this industry in India.

Limitations on structuring of venture capital funds: VCFs in India are

structured in the form of a company or trust fund and are required to follow a
three-tier mechanism-investors, trustee company and AMC. A proper tax-

efficient vehicle in the form of Limited Liability partnership Act` that is popular

in USA, is not made applicable for structuring of VCFs in India. In this form of

structuring, investors liability towards the fund is limited to the extent of his

contribution in the fund and also formalities in structuring of fund are simpler.

Problems in raising of funds: In USA primary sources of funds are insurance

companies, pension funds, corporate bodies, etc., while in India domestic

financial institutions, multilateral agencies, state government undertakings are the

main sources of funds for VCFs. Insurance companies and pension funds while

allowing themselves to invest in the VCFs would enlarge the possibility of setting

up of domestic VCF. Further, if mutual funds are allowed to invest upto 5 per

cent of their corpus in VCFs by SEBI, it may lead to increased availability of fund

for VCFs.

Lack of incentive to investors: Presently, high net worth individuals and

corporates are not provided with any incentives for investment in VCFs. The

problem of raising funds from these sources further gets aggravated with the

differential tax treatment applicable to VCFs and mutual funds. While the income

of the mutual funds is totally tax exempted under section 10 (23D)of the Income

Tax Act, income of domestic VCFs, which provide assistance to small, and

medium enterprise is not totally exempted from tax. In absence of any incentive,

it is extremely difficult for domestic VCFs to raise money from this investor

group that has a good potential.

Domestic VCFs vis-?-vis offshore funds: The domestic VCFs operations in the

country are governed by the regulations as prescribed by SEBI and investment

restrictions as place by CBDT for availing of the tax benefits. They pay

maximum marginal tax of 35 per cent in respect of non-exempt income such as

interest through debentures, etc., while off-shore funds which are structured in tax

havens such as Mauritius are able to overcome the investment restriction of SEBI
and also get exemption from income tax under tax avoidance treaties. This denies

a level playing field for the domestic investors for carrying out the similar activity

in the country.

Limitations on industry segments: In sharp contrast to other countries where

telecom, services and software corner the largest share of venture capital

investments, in India other conventional sectors dominate venture finance.

Opening up of restrictions in recent time, on investing in the services sectors such

as telecommunication and related services, project consultancy, design and testing

services, tourism etc, would increase the domain and growth possibilities of

venture capital.

Limitation on exit mechanism: The VCFs that have invested in various ventures

have not been able to exit from their investments due to limited exit routes and

also due to unsatisfactory performance of OTCEI. The threshold limit placed by

various stock exchanges acts as deterrent for listing of companies with smaller

equity base. SEBI can consider lowering of threshold limit for public issue/listing

for companies backed by VCFs. Buy-back of equity shares by the company has

been permitted for unlisted companies, which would provide exit route to

investment of venture capitalists.

Legal Framework: Lack of requisite legal framework resulting in inadequate

penalties in case of suppression of facts by the promoters-results in low returns

even from performing companies. This has bearing on equity investments

particularly in unlisted companies.

Review questions

1. What is venture capital? What are the characteristic features of venture

capital?

2. What are the stages involved in venture capital financing?

3. How a venture capital firm evaluates a borrowing company?
4. What are the different types of venture capital companies?

5. What is the significance of venture capital? How does it promote new

class of entrepreneurs?

6. Write a note on the development of venture capital funds of India.



References

Gladstone.D., Venture Capital Handbook", Prentice Hall, Englewood

Cliffs:1988,

Henderson, J.W., Obtaining Venture Financing: Principles and Practices,

Lexington Books, Massachusetts, 1988.

Maheswari .S.N, Financial Management, Principle and Practice", Sultan Chand

& Sons, New Delhi, 2004

Misra, Asim Kumar, Venture Capital Financing. Shipra Publications, New

Delhi: 1996.

Narasimham, M., The Financial System, Nabhi, New Delhi:, 1992.

Pondey, I.M, Venture Capital Experience In India, Prentice-Hall, New Delhi,

1996.

Rustagi, R.P., Financial Management ? Theory, Concepts and Problems,

Galgotia New Delhi:, 2002.

Santhanam .B, Financial Services", Margham Publications, Chennai, 2003

Joseph Anbarasu.D, et.al, Financial Services, Sultan Chand & Sons, New

Delhi,2003

Satyanarayana Chary.T, Venture Capital Concepts & Applications, MacMillan

India Ltd., Delhi, 2005

Suneja H.R, Merchant Banker", Himalaya Publications House, Mumbai, 2003

***********
Unit ? V

structure

5.1

Introduction

5.2

Objectives

5.3

Preference share capital

5.4

Convertible debentures

5.5

Warrants

5.6

Secured premium notes (SPN)

5.7

Deep discount bonds (DDB)

5.8

Options

5.9

Summary

5.10 Self assessment questions

5.11 Further readings

5.1

Introduction

A broad classification for a group of securities used by companies to raise money

that combine both debt and equity characteristics is known as hybrid securities.

Hybrid securities pay a predictable (fixed or floating) rate of return or dividend

until a certain data. At that date the holder has a number of options including

converting the securities into the underlying share. Therefore unlike a share the

holder has a known cash flow and, unlike a fixed interest security, there is an

option to convert to the underlying equity. It is important to note that hybrid

security is structured differently and while the price of some securities behave

more like fixed interest securities, others behave more like the underlying shares

into which they convert. The importance hybrid instruments/sources of financing

are preference share capital, convertible debentures, warrants, secured premium

notes, deep discount bonds and options.
5.2

Objectives

After reading this lesson, you should be able to

(a)

Explain the features, advantages and limitations of preference

share capital

(b)

Discuss the method for valuation of convertible debentures

(c)

Differentiate between a warrant and convertible security and

explain the theoretical value of a warrant

(d)

Define Secured Premium Note and the ascertainment of its rate of

return

(e)

Explain an option and its role in fund raising activities of a firm.

5.3

Preference share capital

Preference share is a type of security through which a company obtains funds in

exchange for certain type of preferential treatment to its holders which are not

usually accorded to holders of the company`s equity shares. Preference share

occupies a position (relative to the residual ownership claims issued by

companies) similar to that of a limited partner in a general preference in the

distribution of assets, in the event of liquidation of the business, and in income,

with respect to distribution of earnings.

Section 85 of the Companies Act, 1956 defines preference shares as those which

have the following two characteristics: (i) these shares have a preferential right to

be paid dividends at a fixed rate, and (ii) these shares have preferential right to the

return of capital in case of liquidation. Both these preferences are available to

preference shareholders as against the equity shareholders. As a source of

financing, the preference shares are given preference in income distribution as

well as in distribution of assets in case of liquidation of the company.

Preference shares on one hand have a prior claim relative to equity shareholders

in the income and in the firm`s assets, but on the other hand, are subordinate to all
debts with respect to earnings and assets. Preference share is a hybrid security,

processing some characteristics of debt and some of equity. Legally, it is part of a

company`s equity base and preference dividends are not a tax-deductible expense.

Preference share carries a fixed dividend rate, and this fixed rate plus the

preferred`s prior claims to income and assets, make it resemble debt.

However, the preference share capital represents an ownership interest and not a

ground for liquidation. This commitment includes that the preference

shareholders have the right to receive dividends in priority over the equity

shareholders. Indeed it is this preference which distinguishes preference shares

from equity shares. A dividend need not necessarily be paid on either type of

shares. However, if the Directors want to pay equity dividend, then the full

dividend due on the preference shares must be paid. It should be noted, that even

if earnings are sufficient to pay the preference dividend, and even if enough cash

is available to make payment, the directors are not obligated to declare the

dividend payable. Nor can the preference shareholders take legal action to obtain

their unpaid dividends. The only commitment made by the company is that

preference dividends will be paid in the amounts agree upon before any dividends

are paid on equity share. This commitment in itself, however, is generally

sufficient to cause management to treat preference dividends as if they were a

legal, periodic obligation of the company. Theoretically, it is also possible that the

company may pay only preference dividend but no dividend to equity

shareholders.

The position of preference shareholders as the ownership holder of the company

is limited and restricted vis-?-vis the equity shareholders. Section 87 of the

Companies Act, 1956 provides that the preference shareholders can exercise the

right to vote only on resolutions placed before the company which directly affect

the rights attached to preference shares. However, they can vote on every

resolution placed before the company, if the dividend on preference shares has
remained unpaid (i) in case of cumulative preference share, for an aggregate

period of not less than 2 years, and (ii) in case of non-cumulative preference share

for a period not less than 2 years (immediately preceding) or not less than 3 years

comprised in past 5 years. However, as against the equity shares, which are not to

be redeemed during the life time of the company, the preference shares must be

redeemed within a period of 20 years from the date of issue (Section 80A of the

Companies Act, 1956).

5.3.1 Features/attributes of preference share capital

The main attributes of preference shares capital are discussed below:

1.

Prior claim on income/assets

Preference capital has a prior claim/preference over equity capital both on the

income and assets of the company. In other words, preference dividend must be

paid in full before payment of any dividend on the equity capital and in the event

of liquidation, the whole of preference capital must be paid before anything is

paid to the equity capital. Thus, preference capital stands mid way between

debentures and equity as regards claim on income and assets of the company. It is

also referred to as a senior security. Stated in terms of risk perspective, preference

capital is less risky than ordinary shares but more risky than debentures.

2.

Cumulative dividends

Preference capital is cumulative in the sense that all unpaid dividends are carried

forward and payable before any ordinary dividend is paid.

3.

Redeemability

Preference capital has a limited life/specified/fixed maturity after which it must be

retired. However, there are no serious penalties for breach of redemption

stipulation.

The preference shares have a stated call price which is above the original issue

price and decreases over time. Like the call feature on bonds, the call feature on
preference shares provides flexibility to the issuer company. Since the market

price of straight preference shares tends to fluctuate with changes in interest rate,

the value of the preference share call feature is determined by the same

considerations as is the call feature for bonds. The refund of preference share is

illustrated in Example 5.1

Example 5.1: Amrit Manufacturing Company (AMC) is considering refunding its

preference shares. They have a par value of Rs. 100 and a stated dividend of 12

per cent. The call price is Rs. 104 per share and 5,00,000 shares are outstanding.

The AMC can issue new preference shares at 11 per cent. The new issue can be

sold at par, the total par value being Rs. 5 crore. Flotation costs would be Rs.

13,60,000. Marginal tax rate is 35 per cent. A 90-day period of overlap is

expected between the time the new preferences share are issued and the time the

existing preference shares are retired. Should the AMC refund its preference

shares.

Solution

Analysis of preference shares refund using capital budgeting analysis

Net Cash Outflow:
1

Cost of calling old preference shares (5,00,000 ? Rs.

Rs. 5,20,00,000

104)

2

Net proceeds of new issues (Rs. 5 crore ? Rs. 13,60,000)

4,86,40,000

3

Difference (1 ? 2)

33,60,000

4

Preference share dividend on old preference shares

15,60,000

during overlap (5,00,000 ? Rs. 104 ? 3/12)

5

Net cash outlay (3 + 4)

49,20,000

6

Annual net cash outflow on old preference shares:





Preference share dividend

60,00,000

7

Annual net cash outflow on new preference share:





Preference share dividend

55,00,000

8

Differences (6 ? 7)

5,00,000

9

Present value (Rs. 5,00,000 ? 0.11)

45,45,454

10 Net benefit (Rs. 45,45,454 ? Rs 49,20,000)

(3,74,454)
Decision: The preference share issue should not be refunded as the benefit is

negative.

4.

Fixed dividend

Preference dividend is fixed and is expressed as a percentage of par value. Yet, it

is not a legal obligation and failure to pay will not force bankruptcy. Preference

capital is also called a fixed income security.

5.

Convertibility

Preference share capital may sometimes be convertible partly/fully into equity

shares/debentures at a certain ratio during a specified period. A variant in India is

cumulative convertible preference shares which combine the cumulative and

convertibility features. It has, however, been a non-starter so far.

6.

Voting rights

Preference capital ordinarily does not carry voting rights. It is, however, entitled

to vote on every resolution if (i) the preference dividend is in arrears for two years

in respect of cumulative preference shares or (ii) the preference dividend has not

been paid for a period of two/more consecutive preceding years or for an

aggregate period of three/more years in the preceding six years ending with the

expiry of the immediately preceding financial year.

7.

Participation features

Preference capital may be participating, entitling participation in surplus profits, if

any, that is, profits after payment of preference dividend and equity dividend at a

certain specified rate. Similarly, it may be entitled to participate in the residual

assets after the payment of their normal claim according to a specific formula in

the event of liquidation of the company.

5.3.2 Advantages of preference share capital

Preference share capital as a source of long-term financing has the following

advantages:
1.

The preference shares carry limited voting right though they are a

part of the capital. Thus, these do not present a major control or

ownership problem as long as the dividends are paid to them.

2.

As an instrument of financing, the cost of capital of preference

shares is less than that of equity shares.

3.

In case of the company is able to earn a rate of return more than

cost of capital of preference shares, the financial leverage

generated by the issue of preference shares produces magnified

increase in EPS for the equity shareholders.

4.

The preference shares financing may also provide a hedge against

inflation because of the fixed financial commitment which is

unaffected by the inflation.

5.

As there is no legal compulsion to pay preference dividend, a

company does not face liquidation or other legal proceedings if it

fails to pay the preference dividends.

5.3.3 Limitations of preference share capital

The following are the limitations of preference share capital:

1.

The cost of capital of preference share is higher than cost of debt

as the preference dividend is not tax deductible and also because of

larger investment risk assumed by the preference shareholders.

2.

Though there is no compulsion to pay preference dividend, yet the

non-payment may adversely affect the market position of the

company and may reduce the market price of the equity shares and

hence affect the value of the firm.

3.

The compulsory redemption of preference shares after 20 years

will entail a substantial cash outflow from the company.
4.

If the company is not able to earn a return at least equal to the cost

of preference share capital, then it may result in decrease in EPS

for the equity shareholders.

5.3.4 Redemption of preference share capital

As already stated, a company in India can issue only those preference shares

which are redeemable within a period of 20 years. This results in repayment of

preference share capital as per terms and conditions of issue. So long as the

preference capital is appearing in the balance sheet, it represents the capital

contribution by the owners of the firm and thereby provides a buffer or a security

to the creditors of the company. However, whenever these shares are redeemed

and the funds of the company are used to repay the preference share capital, the

security available to the creditors stands reduced by the amount of repayment.

This may be a cause of worry to the creditors who might have extended credit to

the company on the basis of owners contribution`. So, in order to protect the

interest of the creditors and to preserve the security available to them, section 80

of the Companies Act, 1956 provides the following conditions for redemption of

preference shares:

(i)

Such shares must be fully paid up.

(ii)

Such shares can be redeemed out of profits which would otherwise

be available for dividends or out of the proceeds of a fresh issue of

shares made for the purpose of redemption.

(iii)

Any premium payable on redemption of such shares shall be

provided from out of the profits or out of the company`s share

premium account.

(iv)

Where the shares are redeemed out of distributable profits, the face

value of the shares redeemed must be transferred to the capital

redemption reserve account, out the profits otherwise available for

distribution as dividend (i.e., distributable profits).
(v)

The amount credited to capital redemption reserve account may be

utilized by the company by way of issue of fully paid bonus shares

only.

A perusal of the above conditions explains that the crux of these conditions is that

the preference share capital which is being redeemed must be replaced by capital

only either (i) directly by the issue of fresh capital, or (ii) indirectly by converting

the profits into share capital. This will help preserving the security available to the

creditors. However, it may be noted that the conditions laid down in section 80 do

not ensure the cash availability to the firm for repayment. The firm, in addition to

fulfilling the above conditions must also have sufficient liquidity to repay the

preference share capital. The financial manager has to take care of this aspect

also. In case the firm has accumulated profits as well as sufficient liquidity, then

the firm faces no problem in redeeming the preference share capital. If not, the

only way is to issue fresh capital (equity of preference) and out of the proceeds of

such fresh issue, the existing preference capital may be redeemed. However, the

issue of fresh capital, no doubt, is subject to the conditions prevailing in the

capital market.

Thus, the issue of preference share, from the point of view of composition of

capital structure has the important advantage of avoiding the obligation to make

fixed interest payments while, tat the same time, realizing the benefits obtainable

from the use of financial leverage. Preference share capital financing also permits

the company to avoid sharing control through participation in voting. The

company need not pay dividends on preference shares if it so chooses, so long as

it fails to pay equity dividend. Therefore, the existence of preference shares

capital does not increase the financial risk of the firm.

The limited claim on corporate earnings possessed by preference shareholders

provides the equity shareholders with an opportunity to gain (or loss) from the use

of financial leverage in the corporate capital structure. From the point of view of a
bondholder, however, preference share is part of the equity cushion protecting

him from loss. From the financial administrator`s point of view, finally,

preference share is both debt and equity; he must analyze his firm`s situation from

both points of view in order to mix its long-term fund sources into an appropriate

capital structure from the firm.

In brief, preference capital (i) involves high cost; (ii) does not dilute control, (iii)

has negligible risk and (iv), puts no restraint on managerial freedom. The

shareholders receive modest returns and are vulnerable to arbitrary managerial

actions. It is not a popular source of long-term finance in India.

5.4

Convertible debentures

Convertible debentures in India, for practical purposes, are of relatively recent

origin. Yet during this short period the features of these debentures have

undergone significant changes. In the early eighties when they became prominent

for the first time they were typically compulsorily convertible (partially or fully)

at a stated conversion price on a predetermined date. The terms of such

debentures were fixed by the Controller of Capital Issues. Towards the end of

eighties, more particularly in 1989, a strange aberration occurred. In that year

several convertible debenture issues were made which had the following features:

(i) they were compulsorily convertible (fully or partially) in one or more stages,

(ii) the conversion price was left open to be determined later by the Controller of

Capital Issues, and (iii) the issuer was given some latitude for determining the

timing of conversion.

All the details about conversion terms, namely, conversion ratio, conversion

premium/price and conversion timing are specified in the offer

document/prospectus. The companies can issue fully convertible debentures

(FCDs) or partly convertible debentures (PCDs). The number of ordinary shares

for each convertible debenture is the conversion ratio. The conversion price is the

price paid for the ordinary share at the time of conversion. Thus, conversion ratio
equals par value of convertible debentures divided by the conversion price. The

conversion time refers to the period from the date of allotment of convertible

debentures after which the option to convert can be exercised. If the conversion is

to take place between 18-36 months, the holder will have the option to exercise

his rights in full or part. A conversion period exceeding 36 months is not

permitted without put and call options. The call options give the issuer the right to

redeem the debentures/bonds prematurely on stated terms. The investor has the

right to prematurely sell them back to the issuer on specified terms. In addition,

compulsory credit rating is necessary for fully convertible debentures.

With the repeal of the Capital Issues Control Act and the enactment of SEBI Act

in 1992, the rules of the game applicable to convertible debentures have changed.

As per SEBI guidelines, the provisions applicable to fully convertible debentures

(FCDs) and partially convertible debentures (PCDs) are as follows:



The conversion premium and the conversion timing shall be

determined and stated in the prospectus.



Any conversion, partial or full, will be optional at the hands of the

debenture holder, if the conversion takes place at or after 18

months but before 36 months from the date of allotment



A conversion period of more than 36 months will not be permitted

unless conversion is made optional with put` and call` options.



Compulsory credit rating will be required if the conversion period

of fully convertible debentures exceeds 18 months.



From the SEBI guidelines it is clear that convertible debentures in

India presently can be of three types:

(a)

Compulsorily convertible debentures which provide for

conversion within 18 months
(b)

Optionally convertible debentures which provide for

conversion within 36 months.

(c)

Debentures which provide for conversion after 36 months

but which carry call` and put` features.

5.4.1 Valuation of convertible debentures

Internationally, convertible debentures are convertible into equity shares at the

option of the debenture holders. In India, in addition to such debentures,

companies also issue debentures which are compulsorily convertible (partly or

wholly) into equity shares. For example, in June 1989, Tata Iron and Steel

Company (TISCO) offered 3 lakh partly convertible debentures of Rs. 1200 each

at par. The principal terms of these partly convertible debentures were as follows:

(i) compulsory conversion of Rs. 600 par value into an equity share of Rs. 100 at

a premium of Rs. 500 on February 1, 1990, (ii) interest rate of 12 per cent per

annum payable half yearly, and (iii) redemption of the non-convertible portion at

the end of 8 years.

Compulsory partly/fully convertible debentures

What is the value of a partly convertible debenture like the one issued by TISCO?

The holder of such a debenture receives (i) interest at a certain rate over the life of

the debenture, (ii) equity share/s on part conversion, and (iii) principal repayment

relating to the unconverted amount. Hence the value of such a debenture may be

expressed as follows:

n

I

aP

F

V



0

t

i

j

t

t

j

t1 1 k

1 k

1 k

d

e

j m

d

where, V0 = Value of the convertible debenture at the time of issue



It = Interest receivable at the end of period, t



n = Term of debentures



a = Equity shares on part conversion at the end of period, i


Pi = Expected pre-equity share price at the end of period, i



Fj = Instalment of principal payment at the end of period, j



kd = Required rate of return on debt



ke = Required rate of return on equity

Example 5.2: The Tata Iron and Steel Ltd (TISCO) had offered in June 1989, Rs.

30 lakh partly convertible debentures of Rs. 1,200 each at par. The conversion

terms were: (i) compulsory conversion of Rs. 600 par value into an equity share

of Rs. 100 at a premium of Rs. 500 within six months of the date of allotment,

that is, on February 1, 1990. (ii) 12 per cent per annum interest payable half-

yearly and (iii) redemption of non-convertible portion of the debentures at the end

of 8 years.

It had also simultaneously issued 32, 54, 167, 12 per cent FCDs of Rs. 600 each at

par on rights basis to the existing shareholders. Each debenture was fully

convertible into one share of Rs. 600, that is, Rs. 100 par plus a premium of Rs.

500 within six months from the date of allotment of debentures.

Assuming 8 and 10 per cent as the half-yearly required rate of return on debt and

equity respectively, find the value of a TISCO convertible debenture at the time

of issue.

Solution

Value of the PCD =

72



Rs

16 36 1

1



Rs ,20

0

600



Rs







1.08

t

1

16

t2



08

.

1



1.1



0

1.0

8

= Rs 352.03 + Rs 1,090.91 + Rs 175.20 = Rs 1,618.14

Cost: The cost of partly convertible debenture (kc) is given as

n I 1 T

aP b

F

t

n

S



0

i

j

t

i

j

t1 1 k

1 k

1 k

c

c

j m

c
S0 = net subscription price of debentures at the time of issue

It = interest payable at the end of period, t

T = tax rate

a = number of equity shares offered on the occurrence of conversion at

the end of period, i

Pi = per equity share price at the end of period i

b = proportion of net realizable proportion of Pi on the equity share

issues to the public

Fj = principal repayment instalment at the end of period, j

kc = cost of capital/discount rate

For the TISCO convertible issue as detailed in Example 2, assuming further issue

expenses, Rs 80, 35 per cent tax rate and 75 per cent as the net realizable

proportion of equity shares issued to public, the cost of capital (convertible

debenture) on a semi-annual basis is the discount rate by solving the following

equation:

721

16

35

.

0

361

35

.

0

1 200

,

1

75

.

0

600

120

,

1





1 k

1 k

1 k

c

t

t 2

1 k

c

c

16

c

Optionally convertible debentures

The value of a debenture depends upon three factors: (i) straight debenture value,

(ii) conversion value and (iii) option value.

Straight debenture value (SDV) equals the discounted value of the receivable

interest and principal repayment, if retained as a straight debt instrument. The

discount factor would depend upon the credit rating of the debenture.

n

I

P

Symbolically SDV

=



16

t1 1 k d

1 kd
8

12

100







=



t

8

t1 1 16

.

1 16

.

Where,

Maturity period = 8 years, discount factor = 0.16, interest = 0.12 payable annually

and face value of debenture = Rs. 100.

Conversion value (CV): if the holders opt for conversion, is equal to the share

price multiplied by the conversion ratio, that is, the number of equity share

offered for each debenture.

If the price of share is, Rs. 50 and one debenture is convertible into 5 shares

(conversion ratio = 5), the CV = Rs. 250 (Rs. 50 ? 5).

The value of a convertible debenture cannot be less than the SDV and CV which,

in a sense, represent its two floor values. In other words, the value of convertible

debenture would be the higher of the SDV and CV.

Option value (OV): The investors have an option, that is, they may not exercise

the right/exercise the right at a time of their choosing and select the most

profitable alternative. Thus, the option has value in the sense that the value of

debenture will be higher than the floor values. Therefore, the value of the

convertible debentures = Max [SDV, CV] + OV.

5.4.2 Evaluation of convertible debentures

Convertible debentures have emerged as fairly popular instruments of long-term

finance in India in recent years. In the first place, they improve cash flow

matching of firms. With the invariably lower initial interest burden, a

growing/expanding firm would be in a better position to service the

debt/debenture. Subsequently, when it would do well, it can afford the servicing

of the financing instrument after conversion.

Secondly, they generate financial synergy. The assessment of risk characteristics

of a new firm is costly and difficult. Convertible debentures provide a measure of
protection against error of risk assessment. They have two components: straight

debentures and call option. In case the firm turns out risky, the former will have a

low value while the latter will have a high value and vice versa if the firm turns

out to be relatively risk free. As a result, the required yield will not be very

sensitive to default risk. In other words, firms with widely varying risks can issue

convertible debentures on similar terms whereas the cost for straight debentures

would be substantially different. Thus, convertible debentures offer a

combination/financial synergy/risk synergy to companies to obtain capital on

more favourable terms.

Finally, convertible debentures can mitigate agency problems associated with

financing arising out of conflicting demand of equity-holders and debenture-

holders/lenders. The focus of the latter is on minimizing default risk whereas the

former would like the firm to undertake high risk projects. This conflict can be

resolved by the issue of convertible debentures. The debenture-holders would not

impose highly restrictive covenants to protect the interest and firms can undertake

profitable investment opportunities.

5.5

Warrants

A warrant is an option to purchase a specified number of shares at a specified

price during or at the expiry of a specified period. So, a warrant gives the holder

the right to purchase from the company a fixed number of shares in future at a

pre-determined price. The holder of the warrant may be allowed to transfer or sell

his right in the secondary market or to keep the right as an investment. The holder

of a warrant can choose whether or not to exercise the option. If it is exercised,

then the investor becomes a shareholder in the normal way. If it is not, then the

warrant lapses. The investor who chooses to exercise the warrant sends the

required amount of cash and warrants to the issuing company at an appropriate

time. In return, the company issues shares. Although, warrants are not a major
source of funds, their characteristics may help the company to attain the desired

capital structure.

Warrants are generally issued with other securities (a bond or a preference share)

in a package. Warrants may be attached to a debt issue to work as a sweetener and

to add to the marketability of the issue. For companies that are marginal credit

risks, the use of warrants may induce investors to purchase a debt issue that would

otherwise be difficult or impossible to sell. During period of monetary restraint,

even some financially sound companies may decide to use warrants to make their

debt issue more attractive to investors. If a firm is a financially risky proposition,

warrants may enable it to obtain debt or preference share capital financing. In

case of a new firm, warrants may provide an opportunity to the debt holder or

preference shareholders to share in the future success of the firm. As the initial

capital is generally considered risky, it suppliers expect an opportunity to share in

the rewards they hope will result from the use of the funds they supply.

The warrants, which generally originate by being attached to a new issue of debt

securities, may be permanently attached to issue or may be detachable. A non-

detachable warrant cannot be sold separately from the bond but can only be

detached when the bondholder exercises his option and purchases shares.

Detachable warrants may be sold separately from the bond consequently, the

bondholder does not have to exercise his option in order to obtain value from the

warrant. He may, if he wishes, simply sell the warrant in the market.

5.5.1 Warrants and convertible securities

A warrant is different from convertible securities (convertible debentures as well

as convertible preference shares). A convertible security requires surrender of the

security in exchange for the equity shares. A warrant, on the other hand, requires

a surrender of the warrant plus the payment of additional cash, called the option

price or the exercise price, in order to obtain the equity shares. Warrants are
issued by a company to investors who may exercise them to buy the shares or

may re-sell them to other investors.

A convertible security issue gives the holder the right to receive equity shares

through the exchange of the convertible for the equity shares; the warrant entitles

the security holder to purchase equity share at a specified price. Both securities

provide the purchaser with the opportunity for a speculative gain if the company

is successful and the market price of the equity share increases. However, despite

the similarities between these two methods of raising new equity capital, they are

not perfect substitutes for one another. It is, therefore, important for the financial

administrator to know when it is preferable to issue debt plus warrants and when a

convertible issue is the better course of action.

If the warrant is converted then the capital structure is shifted to a relatively lower

leverage position because new equity capital is issued without any change in

debts. If convertible securities are converted then the reduction in leverage would

be more pronounced because new equity share would be issued with a reduction

in debt. Therefore, the warrant conversion reduces the leverage but not as much as

the convertible securities reduce. Another effect of the warrant conversion is the

dilution of earnings and control because a number of new equity shares would be

issued, hence affecting the controlling position of the existing shareholders.

So, the warrants and convertible securities differ both from the point of view of

flow of capital funds as well as effect on the EPS. In case of conversion of

convertible securities, new equity share is issued, but there is no infusion of new

capital into the company. That occurred when the convertible issue was sold

initially. All that takes place when the securities are converted is an exchange of

one security (the bond) for another (the equity share)-- a conversion of debt into

equity. However, when warrants are exercised, the bonds with which they were

issued when warrant holders exercise their option represent an inflow of new

capital to the firm. These new funds can then be used to purchase additional
assets, to retire debt, or for any other purpose aimed at increasing the firm`s

earnings.

5.5.2 Warrants and share right

A warrant is like a share right, but not exactly alike. The share right is issued to

the existing shareholders free of cost, with generally, an option to exercise the

right themselves or to sell it to other investors. In both the share right and the

warrant conversion, the holder has to pay a price for getting new shares from the

company and hence there is flow of capital from the investors to the company.

From the point of view of the company, the warrant and the share right can be

differentiated as follows:

(i)

The purpose of the warrant may be to make a debt issue or a

preference capital issue attractive, whereas the right has an

objective of raising fresh funds as well as to maintain the prorata

share holding of the existing shareholders. The warrant has no such

feature of maintaining ownership position.

(ii)

The share right is generally exercised in a short period of one

month or so, whereas warrants are generally convertible after a

year or so. Although both right and warrants result in flow of

capital fund but warrants provide deferred equity financing.

(iii)

The right shares are generally issued at a price lower than the

prevailing market price to induce the existing shareholders to apply

for the right shares, whereas the conversion price of the warrants

may be kept slightly higher than the current prevailing market

price in order to accommodate the expected increase in market

price in future.

Thus, a warrant has some unique features which are different from that of a right

or a convertible security. The unique features of warrants can be summarized as

follows:
(i)

Warrants are issued by attaching them to other securities. When

issued in this fashion, warrants work as sweetener as they make the

issue more attractive.

(ii)

Warrants can be detached from the original secrity and can be

traded as a separate instrument.

(iii)

The number of equity shares that can be purchased is fixed and is

stated on the face of the warrant instruments.

(iv)

The exercise price for which the shares can be purchased in future

is also fixed.

(v)

Warrants issue generally have a specified period over which they

can be exercised and become useless thereafter.

(vi)

Warrants carry no voting rights and are not entitled to receive

dividend or interest payment. A warrant is only an option to

purchase shares, the warrant holder is not entitled to any dividends

paid on the equity shares nor does he has any voting power.

However, if bonus shares are declared, the option price of the

warrant may be adjusted to account for the change.

5.5.3 Valuations of warrants

Just like other securities, warrants also have a value. An important consequence

of unique characteristics of warrant is that these have a theoretical value in

addition to its resale market value. The theoretical value of a warrant equals the

difference between the market price of the equity shares purchased through

warrants and the total option price paid for these shares to the company. The

theoretical value, also called the minimum value, can be expressed as follows:

TVw = (MP ? OP) ? N

Where, TVw = Theoretical value of a warrant

MP = Market price of underlying equity shares
N =

Number of equity shares that can be purchased with one

warrant



OP = Option or exercise price of the equity shares.

In case, a warrant entitles to purchase only one equity share, then the



TVw = (MP ? OP)

Thus, the theoretical value may be defined as a discount allowed on equity shares

to the warrant holder. If an investor buys warrants for their theoretical value and

exercise them, they end up paying the same price for the equity shares as they

would if they were to buys these shares in the market. However, if the market

price of the equity shares is equal to or below the option price, then the theoretical

value of a warrant would simply be zero as warrants will never have a negative

value. When the market price of equity shares fall below the offer price, the

theoretical value is negative as per the above equation. However, the theoretical

value of the warrant identifies a price below which the warrant is not likely to

sell, the theoretical value is said to be zero whenever the market price of the

equity shares is equal to or less than the offer price.

The warrant has a market value also and is generally higher then the theoretical

value of the warrant. The theoretical value represents the minimum value of the

warrant and will be equal to the market value only on the last day on which the

warrant can be converted into equity shares. Prior to this date, the actual market

value will be higher than the theoretical value, and the reason for this is obvious.

If the right to convert the warrant can be exercised at any time during a given

period then the investor has the option of holding the warrant instead of

purchasing shares. Holding the warrant is equivalent to holding the equity shares,

except that the investment in warrant is less and the warrant holder does not have

the right of dividend and voting. It follows that an investor might prefer to

purchase a warrant and not immediately exercising it. This option of not

exercising the warrant, in addition to the opportunity of exercising it immediately
and acquiring the equity shares, has a value. This value is reflected in the market

price of a warrant, and consequently the warrant`s market price may exceed the

theoretical value.

It may be observed that the advantage of a warrant over equity share is that the

maximum possible loss is less than if the share itself is held (as the warrant is

cheaper). If the equity share achieves a higher price, this advantage of holding a

warrant rather than holding the equity shares becomes less important. For

example, the current market price (MP) of the equity share is Rs. 100 and a

warrant entitles to purchase two shares at a price of Rs. 40 per share. The

theoretical value can be ascertained as follows:

TVw = (MP ? OP) ? N



= (100 ? 40) ? 2



= Rs. 120.

So, the theoretical value of the warrant is Rs. 120. If an investor buys a warrant

for Rs. 120, his loss is restricted to Rs. 120 only, whereas if he chooses to buy two

shares today at market price of Rs. 100 each, the his loss may go even up to Rs.

200. If the price of the share falls sharply, then the shareholder may suffer full

loss. However, the warrant holder can suffer a loss equal to the value of the

warrant only, although his potential for price gain is same as that of the equity

shareholder. This protection against the loss is maximum when the share price is

close is to exercise price of the warrant. The market value of a warrant has been

presented in Figure 1.


Fig-1

It may be noticed that the market value of a warrant is close to the theoretical

value at very high share price. The greatest difference arises when the market

price equals the exercise price. In the above case, if the market price falls from

Rs. 100 to Rs. 90, then the two shares will fall in value to Rs. 180 and the value of

the warrant will also decline from Rs. 120 to Rs. 100 [i.e., TVw = (90 ? 40)2]. The
loss on the warrant i.e., Rs. 20 is equal to the loss on two share and there is no

advantage of holding/purchasing of the warrant. Therefore, the market value of a

warrant will approximate the theoretical value if the market price a share is very

high. The market value of a warrant depends upon many factors such as:

(i)

Share price: A higher share price will increase the value of a

warrant as shown in Figure 1.

(ii)

Offer price: A higher offer price will mean a lower value for the

warrant as the warrant holder must pay more for the shares

purchased.

(iii)

Underlying risk: The total risk of the volatility of the share price

also affects the market value of the warrant. Figure 1 shows that a

warrant may have a value even when the share price is below the

offer price; and it may happen if there is a possibility that the
market price will rise above the offer price before the expiry of the

conversion period.

(iv)

Time to expiry: The longer the time to expiry, the higher would be

the value of the warrant.

The dividend condition that the warrant holders are not entitled to any divided

before exercising the right also affects the market value of the warrant. This

dividend, however, is payable to the equity shareholders.

The behaviour of the market value line in Figure 1 may be summarized as

follows: First, the market value of a warrant tend to stay at or above its theoretical

value. Second, the market value will remain positive even when the theoretical

value is zero because a positive price is required to induce trading. Third, the

warrant premium reaches its highest level at about the exercise price of the

underlying equity shares because the leverage effects and possibility of

subsequent increase in market price of the equity share. The difference between

the market value and the theoretical value, which is also known as warrant

premium, has been shown as shaded area in Figure 1. It may be observed that the

warrant premium is highest when the share price is at or close to the offer price

and that the warrant premium decreases as the share price moves away, in any

direction, from the offer price.

5.6

Secured premium notes (SPN)

Secured Premium Note is a tradeable instrument with detachable warrant against

which the holder gets equity share (s) after a fixed period of time. The SPN have

feature of medium to long-term notes.

During August 1992, TISCO Ltd. issued a special debt instrument called the SPN,

having a face value of Rs. 300. No interest was payable on this and it was to be

redeemed in four equal installments of Rs. 150 each (totaling Rs. 600) at the end

of 4th year to 7th year. Out of each repayment of Rs. 150, Rs. 75 was to be

considered as repayment of the principal and Rs. 75 was to be considered as
capital gain. There was a warrant attached with the SPN, which entitled every

SPN holder to get one equity share from the company at a price of Rs. 100. The

rate of return on the SPN was not stated explicitly, however, may be ascertained

from the point of view of SPN holders as follows:

(i)

If warrant option is not exercised

In this case, the outflow of Rs. 300 today will result in inflows of Rs. 150 each at

the end of 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th year. The rate of return is the value of r` in the

following equation:

150

150

150

150

-300 =





1 r4

1 r5 1 r6 1 r7

By trial and error procedure, the value of r`, in the above equation comes to

13.7% (approx.).

(ii)

If warrant option is exercised

In case, the SPN holder exercises his option at the end of 1st year from the date of

allotment and the market price of the share at that time is Rs. 175, then the SPN

holder will be able to make a capital gain of Rs. 75 (i.e., Rs. 175-100). The rate of

return, in this case, is the value of r` in the following equation:

75

150

150

150

150

-300 =





1 r1

1 r4 1 r5 1 r6 1 r7

By trial and error procedure, the value of r`, in the above equation comes to

19.5% (approx.). It may be noted that the full capital gain of Rs. 75 has been

considered to find out the rate of return of the investor. However, if this capital

gain is subject to tax, then the rate of return to the SPN holder will be less than

19.5%.

From the point of view of TISCO Ltd., the issue of SPN was a profitable

proposition as no cash outflow was involved for the first 3 years (neither in the

form of interest nor in the form of repayment) and a substantial inflow was
expected at the end of 1st year in the form of subscription to equity shares on the

warrant conversion.

5.7

Deep discount bonds (DDB)

A Deep Discount Bond is also a type of a zero interest bond. But it is not

convertible. It has got a face value but the issue price of the Deep Discount Bond

is a discounted value. The Deep Discount Bond is redeemed at the expiry of a

specified period at the face value. The return to the Deep Discount Bond holders

is available in the form of difference between the issue price and the realizable

maturity value. There is no coupon rate and no interest is payable during the life

of the Deep Discount Bond. The Industrial Development Bank of India issued in

1992, Deep Discount Bond of the face of Rs. 1,00,000 redeemable in 25 years.

The issue price was however, Rs. 2,700 and the investor were given option to get

redemption at the end of 5th, 10th, 15th and 20th year at different values. If an

investor holds the Deep Discount Bond for full 25 years, then the rate of return

comes to about 15.5%. Since then SIDBI, ICICI and IFCI have also issued Deep

Discount Bond of different denominations and maturities.

There are three main advantages of deep discount bonds to the investor:

1.

In some countries there may be some tax advantage in receiving a

capital gain rather than an income gain.

2.

Secondly, a deep discount bond is a leveraged instrument, because

the bonds are sold at a discount a relatively small up-front payment

gives the investor exposure to a larger nominal amount.

3.

Thirdly, there is no or significantly reduced reinvestment risk for

the investor i.e. the possibility that market interest rates may fall in

the future; the bond has a longer duration than a bond of

comparable maturity which pays fixed or floating interest.
5.8

Options

An option is a contract that gives the holder the right, but not the obligation, to

buy or sell an underlying asset at a pre-specified price for a specified time period.

An American option gives the option holder the right to buy or sell the underlying

asset at any time before and on the expiration date of the option. A European

option (e.g., options on the S&P 500 Index) gives the option holder the right to

buy or sell the underlying option only on the expiration date. Most options traded

on exchanges in the United States and abroad are American options. Options are

classified as either call options or put options.

5.8.1 Types of options

Options may fall under any one of the following categories:

1.

Call options

A call option gives the purchaser (or buyer) the right to buy an underlying

security (e.g., a stock) at a prespecified price called the exercise or strike price

(X). In return, the buyer of the call option must pay the writer (or seller) an up-

front fee known as a call premium (C). This premium is an immediate negative

cash flow for the buyer of the call option. However, he or she potentially stands to

make a profit should the underlying stock`s price be greater than the exercise

price (by an amount exceeding the premium) when the option expires. If the price

of the underlying stock is greater than X (the option is referred to as in the

money), the buyer can exercise the option, buying the stock at X and selling it

immediately in the stock market at the current market price, greater than X. If the

price of the underlying stock is less than X when the option expires (the option is

referred to as in the money`), the buyer can exercise the option, buying the stock

at X and selling it immediately in the stock market at the current market price,

greater than X. If the price of the underlying stock is less than X when the option

expires (the option is referred to as out of the money`), the buyer of the call

would not exercise the option (i.e., buy the stock at X when its market value is
less than X). In this case, the option expires unexercised. The same is true when

the underlying stock price is equal to X when the option expires (the option is

referred to as at the money`). The call buyer incurs a cost C (the call premium)

for the option, and no other cash flows result.



Fig 2-Payoff function for the buyer of a call option on a stock

Buying a call option: The profit or loss from buying a call option is illustrated in

Figure 2. As Figure 2 shows, if, as the option expires, the price of the stock

between the stock`s price (S) and the exercise price of the option (X) minus the

call premium paid to the writer of the option (C). If the underlying stock`s price is

A as the option expires, the buyer of the call has just broken even because the net

proceeds from exercising the call (A ? X) just equals the premium payment for

the call (C).

Notice two important things about call options in Figure 2:

1.

As the underlying stock`s price rises, the call option buyer has a

large profit potential. The higher the underlying stock`s price at

expiration, the larger the profit on the exercise of the option.

2.

As the underlying stock`s price falls, the call option buyer has a

higher potential for losses, but they are limited to the call option
premium. If the underlying stock`s price at expiration is below the

exercise price, X, the call buyer is not obligated to exercise the

option. Thus, the buyer`s losses are limited to the amount of the

up-front premium payment (C) made to purchase the call option.

Thus, buying a call option is an appropriate position when the underlying asset`s

price is expected to rise.

Writing a call option: The writer of a call option sells the option to the buyer (or

is said to take a short position in the option). In writing a call option on a stock,

the writer or seller receives an up-front fee or premium (C) and must stand ready

to sell the underlying stock to the purchaser of the option at the exercise price, X.

Note the payoff from writing a call option on a stock in Figure 3.



Fig-3: Payoff function for the writer of a call option on a stock

Notice two important things about this payoff function:

1.

As the underlying stock`s price falls, the potential for a call option

writer to receive a positive payoff (or profit) increases. If the

underlying stock`s price is less than the exercise price (X) at

expiration, the call option buyer will not exercise the option. The

call option writer`s profit has a maximum profit equal to the call

premium (C) charged up front to the buyer of the option.
2.

As the underlying stock`s price rises, the call option writer has

unlimited loss potential. If the underlying stock`s price is greater

than the exercise price (X) at expiration, the call option buyer will

exercise the option, forcing the option writer to buy the underlying

stock at its high market price and then sell it to the call option

buyer at the lower exercise price. Since stock prices are

theoretically unbounded in the upward direction, these losses could

be very large.

Thus, writing a call option is an appropriate position when the underlying asset`s

price is expected to fall. Caution is warranted, however, because profits are

limited but losses are potentially unlimited. A rise in the underlying stock`s price



2.

Put options

A put option gives the option buyer the right to sell an underlying security (e.g., a

stock) at a prespecified price to the writer of the put option. In return, the buyer of

the put option must pay the writer (or seller) the put premium (P). If the

underlying stock`s price is less than the exercise price (X) when the option

expires (the put option is in the money`), the buyer will buy the underlying stock

in the stock market at less than X and immediately sell it at X by exercising the

put option. If the price of the underlying stock is greater than X when the option

expires (the put option is out of the money`), the buyer of the put option never

exercises the option (i.e., selling the stock at X when its market value is more than

X). In this case, the option expires unexercised. This is also true if the price of the

underlying stock is equal to X when the option expires (the put option is trading

at the money`). The put option buyer incurs a cost P for the option, and no other

cash flows result.

Buying a put option: The buyer a put option on a stock has the right (but not the

obligation) to sell the underlying stock to the writer of the option at an agreed
exercise price (X). In return for this option, the buyer of the put option pays a

premium (P) to the option writer. The potential payoffs to the buyer of the put

option is shown in Figure 4.



Fig-4: Payoff function for the buyer of a put option on a stock

Note the following:

1.

The lower the price of the underlying stock at the expiration of the

option, the higher the profit to the put option buyer upon exercise.

For example, if stock prices fall to D in Figure 4, the buyer of the

put option can purchase the underlying stock in the stock market at

that price and put it (sell it) back to the writer of the put option at

the higher exercise price X. As a result, after deducting the cost of



2.

As the underlying stock`s price rises, the probability that the buyer

of a put option has a negative payoff increases. If the underlying

stock`s price is greater than the exercise price (X) at expiration, the

put option buyer will not exercise the option. As a result, his or her

maximum loss is limited to the size of the up-front put premium

(P) paid to the put option writer.
Thus, buying a put option is an appropriate position when the price on the

underlying asset is expected to fall.

Writing a put option: The writer or seller of a put option receives a fee or

premium (P) in return for standing ready to buy the underlying stock at the

exercise price (X) should the buyer of the put choose to exercise the option at

expiration. See the payoff function for writing a put option on a stock in Figure 5.



Fig-5: Payoff function for the writer of a put option on a stock

Note the following:

1.

When the underlying stock`s price rises, the put option writer has

an enhanced probability of making a profit. If the underlying

stock`s price is greater than the exercise price (X) at expiration, the

put option buyer will not exercise the option. The put option

writer`s maximum profit, however, is constrained to equal the put

premium (P).

2.

When the underlying stock`s price falls, the writer of the put

option is exposed to potentially large losses. If the price of the

underlying stock is below the exercise price (e.g., D in Figure 5),

the put option buyer will exercise the option, forcing the option

writer to buy the underlying stock from the option buyer at the
exercise price (X) when it is worth only D in the stock market. The

lower the stock`s price at expiration relative to the exercise price,

the greater the losses to the option writer.

Thus, writing a put option is an appropriate position if the price on the underlying

asset is expected to rise. However, profits are limited and losses are potentially

large.

Notice from the above discussion that an option holder has three ways to liquidate

his or her position. First, if conditions are never profitable for an exercise (the

option remains out of the money`), the option holder can let the option expire

unexercised. Second, if conditions are right for exercise (the option is in the

money`), the holder can take the opposite side of the transaction: thus, an option

buyer can sell options on the underlying asset with the same exercise price and

the same expiration date. Third, if conditions are right for exercise, the option

holder can exercise the option, enforcing the terms of the option. For an American

option, this exercise can theoretically occur any time before the option expires,

while for a European option this exercise can occur only as the option expires,

i.e., on its maturity.

5.8.1 Features of option contract

1.

Highly flexible

On one hand, option contracts are highly standardised and so they can be traded

only in organised exchanges. Such option instruments cannot be made flexible

according to the requirements of the writer as well as the user. On the other hand,

there are also privately arranged options which can be traded over the counter`.

These instruments can be made according to the requirements of the writer and

user. Thus, it combines the features of futures` as well as forward` contracts.
2.

Down payment

The option holder must pay a certain amount called premium` for holding the

right of exercising the option. This is considered to be the consideration for the

contract. If the option holder does not exercise his option, he has to forego this

premium. Otherwise, this premium will be deducted from the total payoff in

calculating the net payoff due to the option holder.

3.

Settlement

No money or commodity or share is exchanged when the contract is written.

Generally this option contract terminates either at the time of exercising the

option by the option holder or maturity whichever is earlier. So, settlement is

made only when the option holder exercises his option. Suppose the option is not

exercised till maturity, then the agreement automatically lapses and no settlement

is required.

4.

Non-linearity

Unlike futures and forward, an option contract does not possess the property of

linearity. It means that the option holder`s profit, when the value of the underlying

asset moves in one direction is not equal to his loss when its value moves in then

opposite direction by the same amount. In short, profits and losses are not

symmetrical under an option contract. This can be illustrated by means of an

illustration:

Mr. X purchases a two month call option on rupee at Rs. 100 = 3.35$. Suppose,

the rupee appreciates within two months by 0.05 $ per one hundred rupees, then

the market price would be Rs. 100 = 3.40$. If the option holder Mr. X exercises

his option, he can purchase at the rate mentioned in the option i.e., Rs. 100 =

3.35$. He gets a payoff at the rate of 0.05 $ per every one hundred rupees. On the

other hand, if the exchange rate moves in the opposite direction by the same

amount and reaches a level of Rs. 100 = 3.30$. The option holder will not
exercise his option. Then, his loss will be zero. Thus, in an option contract, the

gain is not equal to the loss.

5.

No obligation to buy or sell

In all option contracts, the option holder has a right to buy or sell an underlying

asset. He can exercise this right at any time during the currency of the contract.

But, in no case, he is under an obligation to buy or sell. If he does not buy or sell,

the contract will be simply lapsed.

5.8.2 Option values

The model most commonly used by a practitioners and traders to price and value

options is the Black-Scholes pricing model. The Black-Scholes model examines

five factors that affect the price of an option:

1.

The spot price of the underlying asset

2.

The exercise price on the option

3.

The option`s exercise date

4.

Price volatility of the underlying asset

5.

The risk free rate of interest

The profit and loss from exercising an option is a function of the spot price of the

option`s underlying asset and the exercise price on the option. The difference

between the underlying asset`s spot price and an option`s exercise price is called

the option`s intrinsic value. For a call option, the intrinsic value is:

Stock price ? exercise price

If Stock price > Exercise price
(option is in the money)

Zero



(option is out of the money)

For a put option, the intrinsic value is:



Exercise price ? Stock price

If Stock price < Exercise price
(option is in the money)

Zero



(option is out of the money)
At expiration, an option`s value is equal to its intrinsic value.

Figure 6 illustrates the time value effect for a call option. For example, suppose

you have a call option on a stock with an exercise price of $50 and an expiration

in three months. The underlying stock`s price is currently $ 60. The intrinsic value

of the option is $ 10 ($60 - $ 50). The option is currently selling on the Chicago

Board of Trade for $ 12.50. Thus, the value of the call option is greater than its

intrinsic value by $ 2.50. The difference between an option`s price (or premium)

and its intrinsic value is called its time value. If you exercise the option today

(prior to expiration), you receive the intrinsic value but give up the time value

(which in this example is $ 2.50).



Fig-6: The intrinsic value versus the before exercise value of a call option

The time value of an option is the value associated with the probability that the

intrinsic value (i.e., the stock price) could increase (if the underlying asset`s price

moves favourably) between the option`s purchase and the option`s expiration date

itself. The time value of an option is a function of the price volatility of the

underlying asset and the time until the option matures (its expiration date). As

price volatility increases, the chance that the stock will go up or down in value

increases. The owner of the call option benefits from price increases but has

limited downside risk if the stock price decreases, since the loss of value of an

option can never exceed the call premium. Thus, over any given period of time,
the greater the price volatility of the underlying asset, the greater the chance the

stock price will increase and the greater the time value of the option. Further, the

greater the time to maturity, the greater (longer in time) the opportunity for the

underlying stock price to increase; thus, the time value of the option increases.

It is this time value` that allows an out of the money option to have value and

trade on the option markets. As noted above a call option is out of the money if

the exercise price is greater than the underlying stock`s price, or the intrinsic

value of the option is zero. This option still has time` value and will trade at a

positive price or premium, however, if investors believe that prior to the option`s

expiration, the stock price will increase (to a value greater than the exercise

price). As an option moves towards expiration, its time value goes to zero. At any

point in time, the time value of an option can be calculated by subtracting its

intrinsic value (e.g., $ 10) from its current market price or premium (e.g., $

12.50).

The risk-free rate of interest affects the value of an option in a less than clear-cut

way. All else constant, as the risk-free rate increases, the growth rate of the stock

price increases. As the risk-free rate of interest increases, the required rate (and

ultimately realized rate) of return increases on all investments. The result is

greater stock price growth. However, the present value of any future cash flows

received by the option holder decreases. For a call option, the first effect tends to

increase the price of the option, while the second effect tends to decrease the

price. It can be shown that the first effect always dominates the second effect.

That is, the price of a call option always increases as the risk free rate increases.

Conversely, the two effects both tend to decrease the value of a put option. Thus,

the price of a put option decreases as the risk free rate increases.
5.8.3 Benefits of options

Option trading is beneficial to the parties. For instance, index-based options help

the investment managers to insure the whole portfolio against fall in prices rather

than hedging each and every security individually.

Again, option writing is a source of additional income for the portfolio managers

with a large portfolio of securities. Infact, large portfolio managers can guess the

future movement of stock prices accurately and enter into option trading.

Generally, the option writers are the most sophisticated participants in the option

market and the option premiums are simply an additional source of income.

Options trading is also quite flexible and simple. For instance, option transactions

are index based and so all calculations are made on the change in index value.

The value at which the index points are contracted forms the basis for the

calculation of profit or loss, fixing of option price etc.

In an option contract, the loss is pegged to the minimum of amount i.e., to the

extent of the option premium alone. Hence, the players in the option market know

that their losses can be quantified and limited to the amount of premium paid.

This may also lead to high speculation. Therefore, it is very essential that options

trading must be encouraged for the purpose of hedging risks and not for

speculation.

5.9

Summary

Hybrid securities combines the attributes of both debt and equity investment. It is

designed to satisfy the requirements of the issuers, investors, the regulators and

rating agencies. Preference shares entitles investors for fixed dividend payments.

The preference dividend paid by the company is not tax deductible. Some

investors preference share because rating agencies and analysts may view

preference share as equity like`, but this benefit is at best illusory, convertible

preference shares are corporate fixed income securities that the investor can

choose to turn into a certain number of shares of the company`s common stock
after a predetermined time span or on a specific date. Convertible debentures are

debentures, which, at a specified time after the issue, are converted to equity

shares at the option of the holder. In general a debenture may be fully or partly

convertible. As the name suggests, a partly convertible debenture is a debenture

only a part of which is convertible into an ordinary share. A warrant is an option

that gives the holder the privilege of buying a specified number of share of the

company at a specified exercise price at any time- on or before the expiration

date. Warrants usually come as attachments to bonds to make an issue more

attractive to investors. A deep discount bond is a debt security with no coupon

(zero-coupon) or substantially lower coupon than current interest rates. The bonds

are issued at a discount to their nominal value, with the discount reflecting the

prevailing market interest rate. Option can be viewed as an instrument that

provides its holder with an opportunity to purchase or sell a specified asset at a

stated price on or before a set expiration date. The two most common types of

options are called calls and puts. A call option is an option to purchase a specified

future date at a stated price. A put option is an option to sell a given number of a

stock on or before a specified future date at a stated striking price.

5.10 Self assessment questions

1.

What is preference share? Discuss the merits and demerits of

preference share as a source of finance.

2.

Explain the method for valuation of compulsorily convertible

debentures into shares.

3.

How is the value of an optionally convertible debenture affected

by the straight debenture value, conversion value and option

value?

4.

What is warrant? What the theoretical value of a warrant seek to

measure?

5.

Write short notes on:
(a) Deep Discount Bond

(b) Secured Premium Note

6.

What is an option? Define call and put options. Do they play any

role in fund-raising activities of a firm?

5.11 Further readings



Corporate Finance by S.R. Vishwanath



Managerial Finance by Lawrence J. Gitman



Financial Management by M.Y. Khan and P.K. Jain



Fundamentals of Financial Management by V. Sharan

This post was last modified on 14 March 2022